Home

R&S FSW-K70 Vector Signal Analysis

Contents

1. Cep eee saa Db Do MER EF INPut IQ BAEanced rn ne ere INP t IG FULDEScale AUTO INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel S INS Tr ment CREate DUPlicalte nates eet oit etie aceti hae ea t pebbled 301 INSTr ment GREateREBEACO Ine pi oerte th eret ccr cuca tiie 301 INS Trument CREate NEW rtr eren 301 p 302 INSTrument LIST INS Tr rment RENAITIG ca Iro cte neared 303 INS Tr ment SELect ri he e itecto vo erbe s EY x UH En E DE 304 LAYOUEADDEWINDOW error tore eee rer y vy ER ee ve anaes 419 EAYout GATalogEWINDBOWJ ctore er t n hee eph ee FERE 420 LAYout IDENtIyWINDOW cette ina att Fee orb ere ns Fey ERE Fee Eee raa e XY NNI eaa 421 LAYout REMove WINBOYW 1 rne erae re
2. nennt 191 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 3 R amp S FSW K70 Contents 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 7 1 7 2 8 1 8 2 8 3 9 1 9 2 9 3 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 11 11 1 Result Range 200 Demodulation Settings ccccteccescctecterescccstiecesccetiecesscateeeesscassatesscs 202 Measurement Filter Settings eese nennen nennen 210 Evaluation Range eene nnn nnn 212 Adjusting Settings Automatically eese nnns 214 ICI cse 216 Traco SOU GS 216 Trace 5 6 2 219 220 Modulation Accuracy Limit 225 Display and Window Configuration eeeeeeeeeennnneeennnnn nennen 228 ZOOM FUNCHONS 231 Analysis in MSRA MSRT 4 1 nnne nnn nnne 233 Data Import and 234 Import Export
3. enne 362 TRIGger SEQuence EEVel EX l ernaleport iater 363 25 363 TRIGger GEQuence 363 TRIGgei 364 SEQuence 364 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Ana log Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 362 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP
4. 440 lt gt lt gt 440 lt gt lt gt 441 lt gt lt gt 5 441 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation 442 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation 443 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance 443 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance 443 gt lt gt 5 2 444 lt gt lt gt 445 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic 7 445 lt gt lt gt 445 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion
5. lt gt lt gt encuentra tnb c e cbe a CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK lt gt 2 lt gt D lt 2 lt gt nein ici retra ane lt gt 2 rptu a a lt gt lt gt CALGulatesrs MARKer em RAC CAl Culatesns MARIKerSmp X cepit rure np pec bete ct Ep ec wen verus t pap On C duae 400 CAL Culatesnz MARKoersimm 2Y 9 co cat i ceat e teme im e deed icta De ue dade tate cu 432 CALCulate lt n MARKersm gt 2S iiec tret ether rrr irent rene GAL Culate lt n gt STATistics CODF tp ec cett tbe egeo tenente eicere CAEGCulatesn2 STATistics MODE rti crate det onte ed eue ra uut nca a CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet Culate lt n gt STATistics 5 tp teret e eee epe ese e rad CAECulatesn
6. 196 Removing patterns from a Standard edes ved 197 Adding patterns to a statdald rerit ate tete x Rt RR Rx Ene tK ERR REIS 197 Displaying available 1 197 Bu E 197 L Show Compatible Show All eee 197 o eM a EE DETECTED C C DET TEL 197 AV OPS 197 NOW 197 Delelg oni E 198 cios 198 Patom coah 198 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Comect eerie 198 Standard Patterns selecting an assigned pattern The Standard Patterns are the patterns assigned to the currently selected standard You can add existing patterns to the standard or remove patterns already assigned to the standard The highlighted pattern is currently selected for pattern search Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 371 Burst and Pattern Configuration Removing patterns from a standard Removes the assignment of the selected patterns to the standard The patterns are removed from the Standard Patterns
7. 462 5 5 462 5 5 5 462 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ CONDition lt gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for
8. o Trace 2 A Sl r Traces 3 9 r 4 Blank uesa c IMM E Stop 100 sym gt C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Trace Wizard Screen r n 20 dBm EM mE 40 dBm EM Traces Max Avg Min mE ClrWrite Min 60 dBm Trace Wizard 80 dBm Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 535 Stop 2 535 Measuring User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 287 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Problem The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the AMPT key e 3 Press the Unit softkey e 4 the Y Axis Unit softkey e 5 Select dB Problem The Vector result display and the Constellation result display look different Spectrum VSA Ref Level 1 96 dBm Std EDGE_8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 22 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 148 SGL BURST PATTERN i Crw Const I1 Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 0 sym sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 i Crw D 1 Q Meas amp Ref Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 91 l Stop 2 91 NIY 16 03 2010 10 08 34 Date 16 MAR 2010 10 08 34 Reason e The Vector I Q diagram shows the measurement signal after the measurement fil ter and synchronization e
9. STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 4 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Register 11 11 5 This register comprises information about limit violations in Phase Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUI STATus QUI Fl LH 5 5 tion and t tionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CONDi tionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVEN Status Reporting System Bit
10. de En EE A 359 c ra etr eeu rv ger br ve pote tuat 359 Bse reds 358 TRACe lt n gt DATA 2 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOL Ol hortor trt n en 361 TRIGE SEQUENCE TIME cria t a emet ber trat i d eoe ees ced ti dade 361 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME mr rtr rar rrr nte ener 361 TRIGger SEQuernce 1FPower HOLDBDOfT trt rrr 362 TRIGger SEQuence IEPower HYS Teresis ucii eii d Der pl neri best XXE 362 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBBOWer 2 ret rr ri i terr rr rr ri nena Einb 362 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel F Power sis TRIGger SEQuence EEVeLIQPOWSr nct etit t tritt ta dei t tradita 363 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal ports ioci rettet rest enne hne 363 TRIGger SEQuence SL OBe ertet rer ho rere pr a tied e EE Cr enn E 364 SOURCS iret satis re cer o eg Deam deni em cni 364 Index Symbols 4ASK Constellation diagram 91 8PSK Constellation diagram 75 16APSK Constellation diagram 92 95 Ronnie 490 A
11. 002 ttt ttt 385 5 5 385 5 20 ttt ttt ttt ttt totns SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent cett ttt 5 5 5 58 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 1 370 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE ttt ttt ttt sts 370 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME 2 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate 373 5 2 244 374 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove ettet 374 5 5 5 58 371 5 2
12. 403 lt gt lt gt 403 lt gt lt gt 403 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese 404 lt gt lt gt 404 lt gt lt gt 404 GALCulatesmMARKersm MAXIm tmcLEEFT nante dan ro ttt xo otn ce ion redde RT 404 lt gt lt gt 404 lt gt lt gt 405 lt gt lt gt 405 lt gt lt gt 405 lt gt lt gt 405 lt gt lt gt 405 lt gt lt gt 1 8 1 14 4 1 1 60 405 SEAR O 406 GALOulate MA
13. 443 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance lt gt lt gt 5 444 lt gt lt gt 5 445 lt gt lt gt 5 445 lt gt lt gt 5 445 lt gt lt gt 5 2 446 lt gt lt gt 5 447 lt gt lt gt 447 CALECulatesnz MARKersim INK teu na nett etta eter ur CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak Culate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiIMUMILEF Tis ttu pee ehe peau orte p nete lt gt lt gt
14. 5 414 CAL Culate AGING VAL acutae cls denies tenet ned ath crat ete tee 415 CALECulate RTMS WINDOwsnedVALDS ruv E raga Fa ada ENN 415 SENSeJRTMS CAPTuIGIOPESSL rone E aao OR I PH D MERGE 415 CALCulate RTMS ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters State OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 233 Analysis CALCulate RTMS ALINe VALue Position This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master Parameters Position Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time pretrigger posttrigger of the MSRT measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 233 CALCulate RTMS WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRT View or MSRT Mast
15. 19 e Common Parameters irt 2200 55 3 1 Evaluation Data Sources in VSA data sources for evaluation available for VSA are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode The data source determines which result types are available see table 3 1 For details on selecting the data source for evaluation see chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 228 In diagrams in the frequency domain Spectrum transformation see Result Type Transformation on page 229 the usable bandwidth is indicated by vertical blue lines Spectrum RealImag CapBuf usable IQ Bandwidth Start 7 68 MHz Stop 7 68 MHz ecl UMC M 16 Measurement amp Reference Signal oci cei sette dietas 16 er in eene ume eDim M cpu a dedo fe otia rua e 17 Error M 17 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 15 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays WIG UO DERE 17 Modulation ACCURACY 3 ti ed dt oe e 18 WV M 18 Capture Buffer The captured data In capture buffer result diagrams the result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis The curr
16. 0 448 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VALue lt gt 11 2 448 lt gt 11 6 408 lt gt 11 410 lt gt 11 2 2 448 lt gt 11 5 nennen 408 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue x CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent RESult eese 448 lt gt 11 5 408 lt gt 11 410 lt gt 11 5 448 lt gt 11 5 lt gt 11 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK RESult
17. 4 44 000 0 234 How to Export and Import I Q 4 4 2 236 How to Perform Vector Signal 239 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 239 How to Perform Customized VSA 2 241 How to Analyze the Measured 1 1 11 enne 250 Measurement 257 Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer eene nnn 257 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK 258 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE 266 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 275 Flow Chart for 275 Explanation of Error nnne nennen 277 Frequently Asked nennen nnn nnne nnns 286 Obtaining Technical 44 88 1 nennen nn 293 Remote Commands for 295 nifi p MA R 295 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 4 11 2 11 3 1
18. SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat cett ttt SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADROOp ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt 383 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel cett ttt ttt otis 383 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERTor ettet ttt ttti 383 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize lQIMbalance ettet 384 5 ttt ttt 384 5 5 44 384 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue 5 222111 5 2 02 454400 SENSe DDEMod PRESetRLEVel ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod PRESetRLEVel ctt ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMatL ttt ttt ttt ttt tto 02d SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate ttt SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat
19. lt gt lt gt 5 1 5 432 lt gt lt gt 5 2 376 DISPlay WINDow n lt gt lt 5 389 DISPlayEWINBDowsns TRACest S innsinn 398 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt gt lt 2 gt 416 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt ZOOM gt STAT EC 2 417 DISPlayEWINDow ns ZOOM S FATO oct cte rtt ees Pd tette sete deb d s evene dora nd FORMatDEXPort DSEParaltoF iiie ee trcs pit a la FORMatDEXPont HEADET ie NM tette ee tv Ed s e cT o Re need dpt eti sales lInuHee us AN INI Tiate REFMOaS entente e nnt usa cda rte rp erbe ae INMthiate RE PRES iiti t E entes dee Der Rt EE dene INITiate SEQuencer ABORt INITiate SEQuericet IMMeadiate
20. 159 External Mixer B21 remote control 325 326 Order External Mixer B21 Type External Mixer B21 High pass filter REMO TR 319 52 22 ER 150 Hysteresis Lower Auto level 0 215 Trigger Upper Auto level 215 bandwidth 58 182 correlation threshold PPattermiSeal6l qe ETEEN 194 data Export file binary data description 503 Export file parameter description 500 EXPONINO RAE 133 235 Exporting remote seeeeene 450 rare teret 236 Importing 251339 235 Importing remote eene 450 Importing EXportingi econtra orent raiz 234 Maximum bandwidth SatmpleTale coepto Htec p LO Metal os 65 imbalance coser eaaet ere ei Rata d ek ERR INE Ra S 204 Definition Formula offset Origin Offset Definition 110 Compensating tti Ene tals 110 204 Formula Me 488 pattern search see PattertiSearoli scuto eec erp ta ere nete Ea nahen 98 Power Trigger softkey esee 186 Trigger level remote
21. 140 Signal SUCUS 144 9 147 5 4 1 Modulation The Modulation settings contain modulation and transmit filter settings A live preview of the Constellation trace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box to visualize the changes to the settings The preview area is not editable directly The modulation settings vary depending on the selected modulation type in particular FSK modulation provides some additional settings The Modulation settings are displayed when you select the Signal Description but ton in the Overview or the Signal Description softkey in the main menu R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Modulation Settings Mapping FSK Ref Deviation 1 0 SR Symbol Rate Transmit Filter Alpha BT Preview Preview Constellation Freq Meas amp Ref Start 30 758 MHz Stop 30 758 MHz Fig 5 1 Signal modulation settings for FSK modulation Modulation Type Defines the modulation type of the vector signal The following types are available e PSK e MSK e QAM User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 141 Signal Description FSK ASK APSK User Modulation Uses the selected user defined modulation loaded from a file For more information on these modulation types
22. gt lt gt nennt 376 015 lt gt lt gt 5 376 ISENSeDDEMOod tdeo err oe 376 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEFault Alignment This command defines where the reference point is to appear in the result range Suffix lt gt 1 6 Setting parameters Alignment LEFT CENTer RIGHt LEFT The reference point is at the start of the result range CENTer The reference point is in the middle of the result range RIGHt The reference point is displayed at the end of the result range RST LEFT Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Alignment on page 202 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet FitOffset This command shifts the display range relative to the reference time by the number of given symbols The resolution is 1 symbol A value gt 0 results in a shift towards the right and a value lt 0 results in a shift towards the left Suffix lt gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt FitOffset gt numeric value Range 8000 to 8000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 2
23. lt gt 461 5 lt lt gt 459 STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDIOf 2 2 2 tie tiae 459 STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition STAT s QUEStionable POWer EVENI rro rtr rere rn eren reni nes 460 STATUS QUEStionable SYNC CONDIIO ierit pem oreet dec eae t pear eee t ee adn 459 STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABIO catia uetus ee Oan ea De 460 STATus QUEStionable SYNC N TRarisitiOh 2 1 rrt rrr rre nr er 461 STATus QUEStionable SYNG P TRahisitloh 1 rrt rrr rene rh rentrer te nn ne En ed 462 STATus QUEStionable SYNCEEVENI oce ties te 460 SYXSTemiPRESSECEHANrnel EXEGuUle xc erotico der kr ry 304 ib EXT nRsjsialU ei M TRACe IQ APCon A TRACE IQ APCON C M TRAGe IQ APGCOD RESUlI cct treten t pterea ttp eb use erg b rr rv 343 342 TRAGe IQ WBANG MBWIDTE
24. vanes deco 461 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition eeeeesseessseseseee 461 5 5 461 STATUs QUEStionable FREQuency PT RANSON eaae enixe 461 5 5 lt gt 461 5 1 lt gt 5 461 5 5 lt gt 461 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency PTRansition 461 lt gt 461 lt gt 461 lt gt 1 461 lt gt 461 lt gt
25. 2 e Je ie Se Uo Ue ile Ge Ce ke scc S de Je de de Be Be Be Ue De o Se Se Se 8 de de de Be De be ke be 1 S Fig 4 41 Constellation diagram for 1024QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only 4 3 9 ASK 2ASK OOK ASK stands for Amplitude Shift Keying 2ASK binary is often also referred to as On Off Keying OOK With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Fig 4 42 Constellation diagram for 2ASK 4ASK 4ASK is a 4 ary Amplitude Shift Keying mapping type With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Fig 4 43 Constellation diagram for 4AASK 4 3 10 APSK With Amplitude Phase Shift Keying APSK modulation the information is represented by the signal amplitude and the signal phase 16APSK Fig 4 44 Constellation diagram for 16APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB S2 For DVB S2 16APSK mappings the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y R2 R1 depends on the utilized code rate and complies with figure 4 44 4 3 11 Symbol
26. 393 RF attenuation AUTO SONKEY gerer itt eb eee cs Man al SoftKey 2 m re tete RF input eres Overload protection remote ISGITIOLO edicit e eec dag RF overrange External Mixer B21 mit RHO FORMU ENES 488 RMS average Formula seven titan atte ee 491 Roll off factor Alpha 6 ore 212 Transmit eateries 144 Rotating Differential PSK Symibol mapping rrr erc hee 80 Rotating PSK Symbol MAPPING tnr rcr 76 RRG filler rem rn rr recens 59 RUN CONT 189 RUN SINGLE aom 189 190 Run in m 146 S Sample rate aossen TI Basics RR ETC Digital IO ccn meen rr eet eer nee Serie Digital remote x Digital data eet hei Max usable bandwidth MAXIMUM Relationship to bandwidth Relationship to symbol rate REMOTE DM ER one fum M H Saving 137 Scaling Automatically essen 177 215 Diagrams changing T 252 X axis automatically nene 178 X axis y axis default see 178 cR 176 252 253
27. 459 5 5 lt gt 459 lt gt 459 lt gt 459 lt gt 459 lt gt 1 459 lt gt 459 lt gt 459 Status Reporting System 5 5 459 STATus QUESHonable S YNC CONDJAOTT cani nee ee deci ente one di a cr did 459 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVEN iiinn pui 459 STATus QUEStonabls BIOL EVENTI atro ren 459 STATus QUEStionable FREQuencyL EVENI ital ie etate x ei et nenne das 459 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt EVENIJ 22 1 reed ne
28. 22 2 1 1 1 22 419 e VSA Window Configuration aa 424 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 304 DISPlay FORMAl EL n 418 MAIS IZ E ettet 418 DISPlay FORMat Format This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters Format SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 422 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG Configuring the
29. 354 GALOulatesg 2CUNIT TIME sanae nn eno pne ea orn 354 GAECulateemsY UNITITIME seditione pnma itn hh t nhe tia 354 lt gt lt gt 5 een 354 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RPOSition sse 355 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RVALue esses 355 bISPlay WINDowensTRAOS YE auae ttt pte vr td tee cerne 355 lt gt 355 9 lt gt 356 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue essen nnn 356 DISPlay WINDewens uicti rne te e ea Renten 356 CALCulate n STATistics PRESet This command sets the x and y axis of the statistics measurement to measurement dependent default values Usage Event Manual operation See Default Settings on page 178 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command initiates an automatic scaling of the diagram x and y axis Configuring To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as function of the measured spacing between pe
30. cd panenedeccdatedcacenegeucssberpuenerers 308 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe eccett tette ett 309 SENS amp IDDEMGd FORMIal 2 4 2 or eroe e suede E ed eo vase t odio En ropa 309 SENSeIDBEMod FSK 310 SENSeTDDEMod MAPPIROICATal9Q ioca utebare trato patentes ee 310 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue eccentric 310 SENSe IDDEMOd IMSKIFORMIALE Rolex e ae ERE et 311 SENSe IDDEMadi P SK FORMA nep x al e Ur 311 SBNSeTDDEMod PSK NS Tale tue cp eroe ete tnter tcn eee tain 312 SENSe DDEMOd QAM FORMMBI ENS Y RR RR wa 312 7 312 I SENSe IDDEMGOG GPSKCFORMAL ia reda Dennis o cent en ned eR vad ieee 313 ER 313 SENSeJDDEMeod TPILier AUPIa 2 aie tuo tr etn ER Rer ai e qe EXER E 314 5 0 cea snnt tente sns nnn nnns 314 SENSe DDEMod TFILter S TATe eccentric tni 314 ISENSeJDDEMeog TFIEIBEUSEI irr nC RR 315
31. 408 lt gt 11 410 lt gt 11 5 2 448 CALCulate n LIMitMACCuracy DEFault 5 tte enr treni ttai inn 408 lt gt 11 5 408 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue 410 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent RESult essere 448 lt gt 11 5 408 lt gt 11 410 CALC late lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan RESU 448 lt gt 11 5 408 lt gt 11 eren aeaa 410 lt gt 11 5 2 448 lt gt 1 408 lt gt 11 22 410 lt gt 11
32. Peta Ex Fue epe ro ERANT ERR D dans 401 GALCulate n EEINsstartstop S iei rer ci rere rn rire e the 387 GALCulate n ELINsstartstop VALUS rtr e tret rre ren e tres 388 s Ee VI i d iF BED e 425 CALCulatesn gt FORM C E 426 Culate n FSK DEViation COMPensatil h com rte eee rtp re cte e pe earns 462 lt gt 01 estne entren 307 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue 1 tnit rtr eret reri noe 308 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType STATe sese 409 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType RESUII esee 449 lt gt 11 5 408 lt gt 11 1 410 lt gt 11 5 2 448 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN RESult eese 448 lt gt 11 5 2
33. kieres 129 Pattern symbols aans 200 Modulation type ge J 116 MSK Error model Modulation type MSRA Analysis Interval cci reiten 181 357 Operating mode rer menie 130 B M 184 360 MSRA applications Capture OSE rrr rrt eras 188 Capture offset remote 413 MSRT Analysis interval Operating mode El M applications Capture offset n 188 Capture offset remote 415 Multiple Measurement channels Multiple ZOOM o rtt re n rrt ert t N Next Minimum Marker positioning eere 225 je 225 Next Peak Marker case cir ceptis et 224 fed A 224 Noise 22 116 Normalization ses 207 Offset Analysis interval 188 EVM 210 Frequency 169 MM T 146 a ic SENE TCR 81 symbol MAPPING 5225 2 errore rrr rennes 81 Reference level dece ceo 171 174 Result range tetris 202 On Off Keying OOK Constellation diagram 91 OOK
34. se the Offset and Result Length parameters in the Result Range dialog to move your result range to the desired point in the capture buffer Make sure the burst search is switched on in the Burst Search dialog Make sure the pattern search is switched on yes Is Burst Not Found displayed in the status bar you see a Pattern Not Found Message se an external trigger and ai appropriate trigger offset Go back to Make sure your Make sure your Result Range Alignment Result Range Alignment reference is Burst reference is Pattern Waveform Range Settings dialog Range Setting Dialog Go back to 10 2 Explanation of Error Messages The following section describes error messages and possible causes Message Burst Not Found metet Message Pattern Not 2 2 rennen tentent kn tenen Message Result Alignment Failed Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might 222 2 22 2 2 Message Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols ener Message Sync Prefers Longer 2 1 10
35. Bias 55 00000000000 GHz 75 00000000000 GHz WERE n E eden A en OR ERES LAN 159 MX S N so 159 TYPE 160 E EAE AE 160 Insert Value enr deterrere eei le a d vec 160 MONI HIMEN RI 160 ic NE RET a 160 I TES attenti oi tid eats tuted 160 cp CERRAR 160 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 Input Output and Frontend Settings Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 329 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 Remote command
36. 321 e Configuring Digital VQ Input and decisis 334 e Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 339 e Setting Up Probes cte cor d dei deze E ee RR Id td De 343 e iicet de Coe itn di he ERE 346 i e cinis Pm 346 e Amn ent ndr oce edle cei Mans 348 LEN uirum P 350 Scaling 352 11 5 2 1 Configuring RF Input 319 PUIG m 319 INPutFIEbTerHPASSESTATe ies ee ep uai 319 INPUtFICTerYVIGESTA TO me 320 lecci n S 320 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared For details on the status register see the R amp S FSW User Manual The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input The command is not available for measurements with
37. 373 SENSe DDEMod SEARch S YNC PATTem ADD ce 374 44 nennen 374 5 ne erar ie nor RR Ren 374 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent Comment This command defines a comment to a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on 373 Setting parameters Comment string Configuring VSA Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Edit on page 197 See New on page 197 See Comment on page 200 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY Pattern This command copies a pattern file The pattern to be copied must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 373 Tip In manual operation a pattern can be copied in the editor by storing it under a new name Setting parameters Pattern string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC COPY GSM PATT Copies GSM TSCO to GSM PATT Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save As on page 197 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete This command deletes a sync sequence The sync sequence to
38. 4 4 1 4 8p 1 2 80 100 14 16 18 1 2 04 06 08 0 2 Frequency in feymbol ISI Filters Low The following frequency responses are obtained when using a low ISI measurment fil ter and the Transmit filter indicated in the title of each diagram Formulae APCO25 CAFM 4 4 20 D 4 1 1 D E 1 1 1 4 D 4 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 D i 4 D 4 4 1 4 20 gp deber lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 41 lt lt lt lt lt lt dore boere dor 40 Pessac mmm mmm umm 80 100 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 f Frequency in D8P SK Narrow APCO25 H 4 4 20 8p 4 0 dieses Bl leo ese 80 04 06 08 0 2 100 Frequency in APCO25 H DEPSK Wide
39. ee Duca 345 oc dre ceni 415 5 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent SENSe SWEep COUNI VALUe rrt rh i ee CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT GALCulate MARKerX SLIMits RIGHEL s entr nth rre repite ea enne ete ei a tp ER 406 CALCulate MARKERX SLIMItSES TANG hs sitio tae trea ex teeth habente reiecta 407 GALCulate MSRA ALIN amp SEIQW aoo ora eint tret reote ra era ro b n rir en 413 GALCulate MSRA ALINe MALUg rtr tont pe Eee 413 CALGulate MSRACWINDOWSn MAL ceteri ti ta mte rte etae pa back rex ki ni a 413 GALCulate RTMS ALIN6G SBOW ront e re e ri catia Ee Peau GALCulate RTMS AUINe VALbue ci ten rrr note rrr n ren ee CALCulate RTMS WINDow lt n gt IVAL CALGulatesns BERGIG iie erri anae ree eic tee PLU eek e Es enter GALCulate n DDEM SPECtrumESTATe cao rtr enar kin e 425 CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarkern AQF F siisii ere itas 40
40. ttt SENSe DDEMod RLENGth AUTO ttt ttt o 2d SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue 5 5 2 ttt ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSEtAUTO ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt 368 5 2 368 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSEGLENGth MlNimum cct 368 _ 2 24 316 SENSe DDEMod SEARCch BURSELENGth MlNimum cette 316 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSESKIP FALLing ect 316 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSESKIP RISing ettet 316 5 5 5 8 58 369 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance e 369 5 00 366 8 5 5 20 434 5 369 5
41. DU SERINANIE eterne ana deca 315 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence RELative FSKRefDev This command defines the deviation to the reference frequency for FSK modulation as a multiple of the symbol rate Configuring For details see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 143 Setting parameters lt FSKRefDev gt numeric value Range 0 1 to 15 RST 1 Default unit NONE Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 143 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue lt FSKRefDevAbsRes gt This command defines the deviation to the reference frequency for FSK modulation as an absolute value in Hz Setting parameters lt FSKRefDevAbsRes gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 64e9 RST 100e3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 143 SENSe DDEMod APSK NSTate lt APSKNstate gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for APSK The following APSK demodulation modes are possible DDEMod APSK NSTate 16 16APSK 32 32APSK Setting parameters lt APSKNstate gt numeric value RST 16 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 142 SENSe DDEMod ASK NSTate lt ASKNstate gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for ASK The following ASK demodulation modes are possible DDEMod ASK NSTate 2 OOK 4 4ASK Setting parameters lt ASKNstate gt numeric value
42. in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode DECT P32 SR 1 152 MHz Att 1048 Freq 13 25 GHz Cap Len YIG Bypass BURST PATTERN 1 Freq Error Rel Analysis Interval 230 902778 us 616 319444 us Analysis Interval oe mm for P nn 1 rw t iid Y mdi nz eBuffer mmi i lu Date 15 0CT 2012 16140129 For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual 9 Configuration Using the VSA application you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using predefined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the mea surement settings to your specific requirements e Configuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings in a file VSA application When you switch the application of a measurement channel to the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active
43. 8p 4 4 4 04 06 08 12 14 16 18 Frequency in 0 2 100 EDGE Wide Pulse Shape ap D 1 1 1 D 4 4 4 20 4 gp eee ee D 14 4 4 4 BD 4 4 80 1 8 Frequency in 0 6 0 4 0 2 100 f ymbol Data File Format iq tar Half Sine Magnitude dB D 4 D D J 1 D 1 i ES D 1 D J 1 D i E 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 18 18 2 Frequency in fsymbol Linearized GMSK F E mmm 2 4 1 Magnitude dB 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 16 18 2 Frequency in f 7 VQ Data File Format iq tar data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar ig tar file contains I Q data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the data in a web browser and allows you to inc
44. gt numeric value RST 2 083 ms Default unit s not symbols as in manual operation Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Capture Length Settings on page 181 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded IQ pairs should be swapped I lt gt before being processed Swapping and inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Parameters State ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap 1 0 page 183 TRACe lt n gt 1Q BWIDth This command queries the bandwidth in Hz of the resampling filter Usable Band width Configuring VSA Usage Query only Manual operation See Usable Bandwidth on page 182 TRACe IQ WBANd STATe State This command determines whether the wideband provided by bandwidth extension options is used or not if installed Parameters State OFF ON If enabled installed bandwidth extension options can be used They are activated for bandwidths gt 80 MHz if the bandwidth is not restricted by the TRACe WBANd MBWIDTH command Otherwise the currently available ma
45. gt This command defines the length of the rising burst edge which was not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Configuring VSA Setting parameters Runin numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Run In on page 146 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog Patterns This command reads the names of all patterns stored on the hard disk The file names are returned as a comma separated list of strings one for each file name without the file extension Setting parameters Patterns CURRent ALL CURRent Only patterns that belong to the current standard ALL All patterns RST ALL Example DDEM SEAR SYNC CAT CURR Result GSM ABO GSM AB1 GSM AB2 GSM TSC1 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern lt PatternedSignal gt This command specifies whether the signal contains a pattern or not Setting parameters PatternedSignal 110 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See on page 146 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue lt SignalType gt This command specifies whether the signal is bursted or continuous Setting parameters lt Signal
46. symbols displayed in the status yez bar his can be problematic If you have a pattern you can try to use it for synchronization i e use the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern Demodulations Advanced dialog you increase the length of your Result Range Is your burst possibly larger Coarse Synchr Increase the Result Range to at least 8xModulation Order Go back to Do you transmit uncor related random bits on the physical level s your Result Range large than 8xModulation Order e g 8 4 32 for QPSK no Hard to find the origin of the problem It might be that Your DUT suffers from massive impairments Your DUT suffers from a severe symbol rate error The adjacent channel power is very high Explanation of Error Messages no From 1 no Is your signal bursted yes Does your signal contain pattern S this pattern relevant e g to align your result to the pattern or to check whether the pattern is transmitted correctly Does your signal consist of ranges with different modulation types no omm EDGE MSR arsi pattern coni 0 05 Make sure your Signal Type in the Signal Description dialog is a Burst Signal Make sure the pattern is indicated in the Signal Description dialog
47. GLEQE Z 0 Jsung 99 90 ASNS ZHN YSZ ujoojenig 2 eseud oDueiJ Sc O9dY MSdOQ H eue ende 081 E E 3NON ZH 9 MSdv Zd OOdV 2 eseud Ndo 92 2 5 89 H S ZH 9 MSdv Zd OOdV W479 80024 002 SzOOdV Zp ev 4 Scoodv 191 ANON GcOOdV _ 5 40 joanndeg 002 20 8 7 MSdOd v 1 2 ScOOdV Je See ISI x SdO XL 008 0002 VINGO 2 8822 19SJO 0002VINGO X SeeiN ISI 01 _ a913 XL 3 MeVWOD 008 0002 VINGO ZHW 882271 540 J93J Seo N waved ysung Joy ayes Budde 1425 10 u2ue9S 104 YOIeaS joquiAg puepuejs Japjo4 Predefined Standards and Settings s ous e Jo pJepueis sJeyllp si 10 425 x 006 11898 SuoN
48. Signal Capture nnn terra Signal Description Single SWEEP rt a eere here recie Trace 1 2 3 4 Trace Config Trigger Offset Trigger Gate Config Upper Level Hysteresis tse 215 Window configuration 5 nir ttti ene 228 Specifics for Configuration ioo rtr rta t enean 139 Spectrum Result type transformation 229 SR see Symbolifate 13 Standards see Digital standards 135 Statistic count 190 BIEN 13 Statistics Fortmiulae cr ern het rr ras 490 Oversamlpling rer n 230 Result type transformation 229 Status registers Description Querying 457 STAT QUES POW 919 Status reporting system eene 451 StdDev F ormulai t ener 490 Storage location Secure user mode Iur Suffixes COMMON zrenia aie E Ta EERENS 300 Remote commlatids 297 Support Swap IQ No e HR 358 Sweep ADONG ict rper t rrr tenet Configuration remote Count see Statistic count DOMINOS be f nre trn Symbol check PQ OMNI n eerte tene Demodulation T PPaltertis nuin oe tend aH Rr E Eua Symbol decisio
49. n 148 Configuration remote 318 FSK Calculating EOTS i ere 486 rere terr ie 486 Deviation error formula 489 tete Regi 118 Estimation sis cn rt rrr rre he 119 Measurement deviation formula 489 Modulation type inrer rns 141 Reference deviation nre 143 Signal model pere ther ra 116 FSK deviation error Compensation ei eene Eo cre FSK reference deviation Formula a RN 489 Full scale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 340 Analog Baseband B71 175 Digital ee tre retta or 162 Digital I G remote 1 tette 336 Unit digital remote 337 G Gain distortion EMSC 114 Gain imbalance oS 111 111 Er e Preconditions for measurement se GATING GSM Programming example 465 H Handover frequency External Mixer B21 remote control 323 External Mixer B21 sss 152 Hardware settings Em 13 Harmonics Conversion loss table B21
50. 399 e Marker Search and Positioning Settings 402 Individual Marker Settings In VSA evaluations up to 5 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time lt gt lt gt 399 CAL gt MARKETS iacit oot dec enda 399 CALCulate n MARKer me STATe 2 2 averse 400 lt gt lt gt 400 GALCGulatesmsMARKeECSISSQK r N PARI dM D 400 CAL Gulatesne DEL TamiatkerA OPP 5 aac tere eo cue ee eode es Te tese de enses ven dae duse 400 GALCulate n DEL Tamarker m STATe ni tret reet n eaae Renee nui Ru has 401 lt gt lt gt 401 Culatespn DELTamalkersmysX taies tere enacted avra 401 CAL Culate n DEL Tamarker q Y 401 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 222 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LIN
51. Setting parameters lt PSKNstate gt 218 RST 2 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 142 SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat lt QAMformat gt This command defines the specific demodulation order for QAM Setting parameters lt QAMformat gt NORMal DIFFerential 4 MNPI4 NORMal Demodulation order QAM is used DIFFerential Demodulation order DQAM is used NPI4 Demodulation order rr 4 16QAM is used MNPIA Demodulation order 11 4 32QAM is used RST NORMal Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 142 SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate lt QAMNState gt This command defines the demodulation order for QAM lt QAMNSTate gt Order 16 16QAM 16 Pi 4 16QAM 32 32QAM 32 Pi 4 32QAM 64 64QAM 128 128QAM 256 256QAM 512 512QAM 1024 1024QAM Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt QAMNState gt numeric value RST 16 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 142 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat lt QPSKformat gt This command defines the demodulation order for QPSK Setting parameters lt QPSKformat gt NORMal DIFFerential 4 OFFSet NORMal Demodulation order QPSK is used DIFFerential Demodulation order DQPSK is used NPI4 Demodulation order 1 4 QPSK is used DPI4 Demodulation order 11 4 DQPSK is used OFFSet Demodulation order OQPSK is used 4 Demodulation order 31 4 QPSK is used RST NORMal E
52. to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 419 CALC FORM COMP to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 436 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA Depending on the modulation type you are using different signal parameters are deter mined during vector signal analysis Details concerning the calculation of individual parameters can be found in chapter 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 106 and chapter A 6 For mulae on page 485 Table 3 4 Parameters for PSK QAM and MSK modulation Parameter Description SCPI Parameter EVM RMS Peak Error Vector Magnitude EVM MER RMS Peak Modulation Error Ratio SNR Phase Error RMS The phase difference between the measurement vector and PERR Peak the reference vector User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 55 Common Parameters in VSA Parameter Description SCPI Parameter Magnitude Error The average RMS and peak magnitude error in The MERRor RMS Peak magnitude error is the difference of the measured magnitude to the magnitude of the reference signal The magnitude error is normalized to the mean magnitude of the reference signal Carrier Frequency The mean carrier frequency offset in Hz CFERror Error
53. CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent STATe esses CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue essent CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent RESUIt essen 448 lt gt 11 6 408 lt gt 11 410 lt gt 11 0 448 lt gt 1 5 408 lt gt 11 410 lt gt 11 5 448 lt gt 11 5 408 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue lt gt 11 lt gt 11 5 lt gt 11 2 eene
54. sad 33g usng 0001 OL OM ZH 00 217 339912 is 25 _ 06 S 0 ZHIN 02 zs ve ASdY 25 sdvz eunde 0 2 S 0 Wvoesn zs ve ASdY 9L 25 n eunde 08L S 0 OMM zHWOZ Wwvosesn 25 8 m dg 25 06 S 0 ZHIN 02 5 8 25 285 2 euo eJnje Hed m d ad Load N jeanyen egeuod ende ver dd 103a 90 ZHI 291 8 ced 1088 _ dd 1980 51 Old dd 1030 dpoxa 9 667 0 ver dd 1988 90 MSWO ZHI 291 Saz eed 1 1030 KBjou3 Jojuoj 9UON S 1v 09 0j1sung gle 0 ASNO ZHIN 5 2 enig Joy J seopN ysung Budden 1899 ynsey 10 youeas 10 yoseas 1g eudiv Joqu Ags _ Jopjo4 Predefined Standards and Settings s WIO ous e Jo pJepueis SJOYIP si 10 425 991 x WL ogre yis Jejueo 0 338
55. 0 0 D 7 lt 4 ee 4 20 D 1 1 4 D 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 D 1 1 1 D D 4 1 D L 4 gp 4 4 Eri 80 04 06 08 0 2 100 f ymbol Frequency in Formulae 25 H CPM 4 4 20 1 lt ee 1 1 4 4 gp de shades dodi acci eet 80 100 12 14 18 18 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in APCO25 H DQPSK 4 4 20 i 4 eee pR 4 R D D D 4 D 1 1 D 4 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 D 1 1 4 1 1 D 1 1 D 1 1 1 4 D 1 1 1 1 4 1 D D D 4 D D 4 D 1 3 1 2 4 4 D D AD ae
56. 2 2 crea o ta Ya d v d v 367 SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC lt SelResRangeNr gt Sets the result range to be displayed after a single sweep e g a burst number Setting parameters lt SelResRangeNr gt numeric value Range 1 to 1000000 RST 1 Default unit NONE Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Select Result Rng on page 191 SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue lt SweepCount gt This command sets the statistics count For more information see Statistic Count on page 190 11 5 6 11 5 6 1 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt SweepCount gt numeric value 0 activates Auto mode numeric value gt 0 Activates Manual mode and sets the statistics count to the cor responding number Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Default unit NONE Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Statistic Count on page 190 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent lt Counter gt This command queries the current statistics counter value which indicates how many result ranges have been evaluated For results that use the capture buffer as a source the number of used capture buffers can be queried Setting parameters lt Counter gt CAPTure STATistics STATistics Returns the number of result ranges that have been evaluated CAPTure Returns the number of used capture buffers e
57. 392 E IMMegdale cda 393 reo reset 393 INI REFRES 393 INiTiate SEQuencer cuite det ente erste 394 INITiate SEQUenber ABORI ionis sete eio roe Erbe sect Fed ede Rd 394 5 2 0000 00 394 Nimate 22 2 rasa foetus a ken tane tm Oa DA YN 395 reete n erp ducta eorr anite Aa dap cc i 396 ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 394 command Note on blocked remote control programs Performing a Measurement If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further c
58. 449 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK VALue CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK RESult seen 449 lt gt 11 5 409 lt gt 11 411 lt gt 11 449 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan STATe CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan RESuUlt esee 449 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak STATe sse nennen enne 409 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue essent 411 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak RESult eese 449 lt gt 11 409 lt gt 11 neret 412 lt gt 11 5 449 lt gt 11 5 409 lt gt 11
59. of symbol periods Magnitude Mag vas IMEAS Magner REF Phase Z MEAS Phases t Z REF t Formulae Test parameter Formula Frequency 1 d FREQ ug sf l d FREQpsr sg O Magnitude error MAG _ERR t uras MAG PHASE _ ERR t PHASE PHASE per FREQ _ ERR t FREQ FSK Modulation The trace based results for FSK signals are the same as those available for linear modulation types However as the signal processing for FSK signals is performed on the magnitude and instantaneous frequency the based results first require a recon struction of the reference and measured waveforms as illustrated Reconstruc tion of the reference and measured waveforms for FSK modulation The dashed outline of the compensate blocks indicate that these operations are optionally de activated depending on the corresponding user settings With respect to FSK measurements the optional compensation parameters are e FSK Reference deviation e Carrier frequency drift Formulae Figure 3 Compensate Reference deviation Frequency n Compensate Frequency Reference Ref deviation Modulator Measured Frequency fugas Q1 P Compensate Frequency Measured iming EE Carrier drift Modul
60. 22 412 lt gt 11 449 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue lt gt 5 2 449 lt gt 1 5 409 lt gt 1 412 lt gt 4 449 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN STATe lt gt 5 2 449 CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK STATe 409 lt gt 412 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAKT RESUIt essen s 449 CALCulatesn gt EIMiIt MAC Curacy S TAT 6 iic eee teret enne set et cert ect ce 408 CAECulatesnz MARKer SEARCG cti eat esee ue deese eue D Madden enu RR CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF lt gt l
61. 9 371 SENSe IBDEMOG SEARGI SYNG TEXT decise eap LENS NEE 374 SENSe DDBEMOG SIGNaEPAT T Ft cec eR ecc eterno E REPE 317 SENS DDEMod S IGNalEVALUG scents avec t t raa et ER sae 317 I RT B pIpjS Bii 313 SENSe DDEMOd S FANdard COMMBriE ccc rere reiten annie EE Lx 305 SENSe DDEMod STANdatd DELete certe crt re tpe vec eM de tpe eap ve a e ace 306 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALUC c cescseceeceseeceeceseeeeeeaesenecaeceeessecaeesaeeseesaesaeeeaeeeeeaseaeenae 306 SENSe DDEMod S SAVE iai coa etr keane tained 306 5 nnne nnne nne nennen 318 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue esses eese nennen nennen 318 SENSe DBEMOGQTFIEter APPEIG EL Ve aaa BEER ES SENSe DBEMOQ TFIEtet NAME rtt oce et ee b te etd bts ee dle veo ed SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe SENSe BDEMOQ TIME c peccet e rh t EAE d e cue SENSE T USER NAME oe tie datis He re
62. Denning LIMIE oerte rerit rr er ier er re i d 408 General Commands The following commands determine the general behaviour of the limit line check GALCulate lt n LIMit MACCuracy DEFault 1 necnon return trn itte 408 lt gt _1 408 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 7 3 2 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy DEFault Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks in all windows Usage Event Manual operation See Set to Default on page 227 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe lt LimitState gt Limits checks for all evaluations based on modulation accuracy e g Result Summary are enabled or disabled Setting parameters lt LimitState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Checking Modulation Accuracy Limits on page 226 Defining Limits The following commands are required to define limits for specific results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy CFERror MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit
63. Span 25 0 MHz CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt 2 gt lt 2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 232 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters State OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 232 See Restore Original Display on page 232 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 232 11 7 6 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA c eese nnne nnns 416 lt gt 200 lt gt 417 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 2 gt This command defines the zoom area for multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on E User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 416 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands
64. pr Eod 460 STATus QUEStionable LIMit amp m N TRansitiOn aot pneter erre ente 461 STATus QUEStionable LIMitsm P TRADSIUOR 2i ooi etri rents Perret ier arma e e 461 STATus QUEStionabl LMARgin lt m gt CONDILION 2s se 2 ricercati a 459 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m ENABle nort tenere re need ten re ud 460 STATus QUEStionable lt gt 461 STATus QUEStionable lt gt 461 STATUs QUEStionable EMARginsm EVENI J raton c c pre b e e 459 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency CONDition essen 459 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency ENABle essent 460 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency NTRansition esses 461 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency PTRansition esee 461 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CFRequency EVENt eese 459 STATus QUEStionable MODulationsri C ONDION cu aser or rt perpe encarta 459 5 lt gt 4 444440 00 00 nennen nett 460 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVM CONDition essessssssses
65. 125 Capture buffer bEicEsq 16 BI eit Navigating Reference for result range enne 201 Result type Sh raean T 16 Capture Buffer D 127 Capture length eurer terere er ener 181 DIS PIA EP 13 Capture offset 5 cocinar 188 MSRT applicatiolis eret pore t rerit 188 catzcandds 413 415 188 Capture oversampling see Sample rater enirn 64 Carrier frequency drift Re uera DER erede 205 6 121 Formulae PD NE 489 Carrier frequency error Center frequency Analog Baseband B71 164 168 SUED PR 169 Channel bandwidth MSRA MSRT mode 130 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay 23 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude FRESUIE TY BG m T 23 Clock rate T n ROTER 71 Closing Channels remote eese 302 Windows remote 421 424 Coarse Synchronization reri tret nore e ene 209 Compatible EIS 197 Compensation Demodulation 203
66. E Removing assigned patterns 197 Selecting nre eer herein ved 136 Softkey VSA measurements oreet erc 135 Display Gorifig ratiori SOftKOy erre 228 Information Points per symbol 127 230 485 487 Drop out time T M M 188 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 301 E EDGE Filters frequency response 493 Measurement example Electronic input attenuation Enhanced mode Digitall mE Equalizer BASICS p 103 Le RE 18 Loading MSRA MSRT mode 131 lisa 18 Storing 2 ijo glo Error messages 277 p EE 118 PSK QAM 106 Error vector Data source Definition Formula Result types Error Vector Magnitude EVM RR ROT S 108 Formula Result eoe wel RMS peak 488 Errors enr CUR VEA 170 174 Estimation etur e aee etin eer de ERE 106 E toL LM 119 Points per symbol ahs PSKHQAM cnet 107 C
67. IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt lt IQ gt lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt 7 2 Q Data Binary File The data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved Data File Format iq tar pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 010 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 QI 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 1 2 0121 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 1 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel index 01101
68. Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Mele uw EA 22 mua ong t Logs 1 P gj Imaginary Fig 4 61 Additive noise A 64QAM signal with additive noise is shown in figure 4 61 only the first quadrant is shown The symbol decision thresholds are also shown The noise signal forms a cloud around the ideal symbol point in the constellation dia gram Exceeding the symbol decision boundaries leads to wrong symbol decisions and increases the bit error rate Similar displays are obtained in case of incorrect transmitter filter settings When an incorrect filter is selected crosstalk occurs between neighbouring symbol decision points instead of the ISI free points The effect increases the more the filtering deviates from actual requirements The two effects described cannot be distinguished in the Constellation I Q diagram but in statistical and spectral analyses of the error signal Channel transmission distortion During transmission disturbances in the transmission channel may cause distortions in the input signal at the R amp S FSW Such influences are included in the EVM calculation However if the ideal reference signal can be estimated with sufficent accuracy by the R amp S FSW e g using the equalizer the channel distortions can be compensated for and deducted from the EVM 4 5 2 FSK Modulation Signal Model Frequency shift
69. 402 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 404 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 403 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 404 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 403 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt on page 405 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 403 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 405 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on 403 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 405 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 404 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 405 6 3 3 Markers Real Imag Plot Defines whether marker search functions are performed on the real or imaginary trace of the Real Imag measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer SEARch on page 406 Search Limits Left Right If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are considered Remote command CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe on page 407 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT on page 406 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT on page 406 Marker Positioning Functions The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search These functions are available as softkeys in the Marker To menu which is displa
70. 6 Demodulation Settings See chapter 5 9 Demodulation Settings on page 202 7 Measurement Filter Settings See chapter 5 10 Measurement Filter Settings on page 210 Configuration Overview 8 Evaluation Range Definition See chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 212 9 Display Configuration The Display Config button is only available in the general overview not in the window specific overview see Specifics for on page 139 See chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 228 10 Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 216 To configure settings Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting For step by step instructions on configuring measurements see chapter 8 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis on page 239 Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key on the front panel restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel See chapter 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis on page 134 for details Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel
71. CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits RIGHT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the right limit of the marker search range If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed 11 7 3 11 7 3 1 Analysis Parameters Limit The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST right diagram border Limit Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 800 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 224 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters State RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM Switches on search limitation Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 224 Configuring Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically Manual configuration of limit lines is described in chapter 6 4 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines on page 225 e General Commands n nde t o ete ee eese ve ae 407
72. Constellation diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a rr 4 DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interference has been removed In case the measurement filter does not remove the inter symbol interference the win dows show measurements that are significantly different Problem The Constellation measurement result display has a different num ber of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSW K70 Reason User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 288 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement G M PU rss In the FSQ K70 the Constellation measurement displays the symbol instants of the Vector measurement Hence this is a rotated constellation e g for a 1 4 DQPSK 8 points are displayed In the R amp S FSW K70 the Constellation diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for rr A DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interfer ence has been removed Note The result display I Q Constellation Rotated displays the rotated constella tion as the FSQ K70 does For details on the Constellation diagram the R amp S FSW K70 see chapter 3 2 5 Constellation 1 0 on page 25 Table 10 1 Constellation and Vector I Q for pi 4 DQPSK modulation Std TETRA C ik SR 18 0 kHz Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 5 lation 1 Q Meas amp Ref Start 5 13 D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref R amp S
73. DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 374 Save As Saves a copy of an existing pattern under a new name Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY on page 372 New Opens the Pattern dialog box to create a new pattern definition See chapter 5 7 4 Pattern Definition on page 198 Burst and Pattern Configuration For details on defining a pattern see chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern on page 244 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 373 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 371 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 372 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 374 Delete Deletes the selected patterns Any existing assignments to other standards are removed Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete on page 372 Pattern details Pattern details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed at the upper right hand side of the dialog box You can refer to these details for example when you want to add a new pattern to the standard and want to make sure you have selected the cor rect one Pattern Search On If enabled the VSA application searches for the selected pattern This setting is identi cal to the setting in the Pattern Search dialog box see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 194 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 371 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct If enabled me
74. Error mal Minimize Optimizes calculation such that EVM is minimal EVM Remote command SENSe DDEMod OPTimization on page 384 Estimation Points Sym During synchronization the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal and various signal parameters are calculated You can define how many sample points are used for this calculation at each symbol For more information on estimation points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 126 You can set the estimation points manually or let the VSA application decide how many estimation points to use If automatic mode is enabled the VSA application uses the following settings depend ing on the modulation type Modulation Est Points PSK QAM 1 Offset QPSK 2 FSK MSK Capture Oversampling For manual mode the following settings are available 1 the estimation algorithm takes only symbol time instants into account 2 two points per symbol instant are used required for Offset QPSK Capture Oversampling the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture set tings is used see Sample Rate on page 182 i e all sample time instants are weighted equally Remote command SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO on page 378 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue on page 379 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Coarse Synchronization It is not only possible to check whether th
75. For PSK QAM and MSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in chapter chapter 4 5 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 106 The parame ters of the PSK QAM and MSK specific result summary table can be related to the dis tortion model parameters as follows Table 1 7 Evaluation of results in the PSK QAM and MSK result summary EVM RMS 1 y Xen Jy N Peak max EVM n T Modulation RMS 1 n T y VN 20 log LV IREF E T Peak min MER n T 1 y with MER n T 20 Magnitude error RMS 1 Ly MAG ERR Q T Y _ ERR n z RMS 1 bo ERR n Tp Peak max PHASE ERR n T RHO correla tion coeffi cient 2 2 REF n IKKF MEAS padao MM Y REF GY AKF REF AKF MEAS Formulae IQ Offset C 27 ral REF TY 10 Chin IQ Imbalance B 8 80 lin e 8 B 20 logio Brin dB Gain Imbal ance G _ 59 Z G 20 log Gim dB Quadrature Error 180 a deg Amplitude Droop A m 20 logo 45 1 J4B Sym A 6 2 2 FSK Modulation For FSK modulatio
76. INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain signal via 2 simple ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Simple ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Manual operation See Input configuration on page 164 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to 1NPut I0 FULLscale LEVel on page 340 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 175 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see 1NPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 340 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 175 Configuring INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the format of the input signal Parameters l
77. Input Output and Frontend Settings L X Axis Reference Value ener enne 178 L X Axis Reference Position eerte tnn tesa 178 L Range per 178 Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window If enabled both the x axis and y axis are automatically adapted to the current mea surement results only once not dynamically in the selected window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Auto Scale All function Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 389 Defining Min and Max Values Indicates the current range borders according to the current settings for information only For statistical evaluations only defines the displayed range using minimum and maximum values Values in the range 1e value 0 1 are allowed The y axis unit is defined via the Y Axis Unit on page 180 setting The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 353 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on 353 Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the displayed range using a reference point and the size of the divisions Y Axis Reference Value Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines a reference value on the y axis in the current unit The y axis is adapted so that the reference v
78. NvsaNMPattern If you copy this file to another location you can restore the pattern at a later time e g after deletion Example Defining a pattern Name TETRA SA Symbols Format Binary Hex Decimal eee comment Fig 8 1 Pattern definition How to Perform Customized Measurements 8 2 2 3 How to Manage Patterns To change the display for the list of patterns 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 To display all available patterns select Show All To display all patterns that are compatible to the defined standard select Show Compatible To display only patterns that contain a specific prefix enter the Prefix in the edit field To edit a predefined pattern 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns Press Edit Pattern Change the settings as required described in chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define New Pattern on page 244 To delete a predefined pattern 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dia
79. Parameters Mode SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements 11 7 11 7 1 Analysis SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer IN
80. RST 2 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 142 SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt Configuring VSA numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe lt MeasFilterState gt This command defines whether the input signal that is evaluated is filtered by the mea surement filter This command has no effect on the transmit filter Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 ON SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is activated OFF The input signal is not filtered SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is deactivated RST 1 SENSe DDEMod FORMat lt Group gt This command selects the digital demodulation mode Setting parameters lt Group gt Example MSK PSK QAM QPSK FSK ASK APSK UQAM QPSK Quad Phase Shift Key PSK Phase Shift Key MSK Minimum Shift Key QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation FSK Frequency Shift Key ASK Amplitude Shift Keying APSK Amplitude Phase Shift Keying UQAM User defined modulation loaded from file see SENSe DDEMod USER NAME on page 315 RST PSK SENS DDEM FORM QAM Configuring VSA Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 464 Exa
81. Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent on page 305 Load Standard Digital Standards Loads the selected measurement settings file Note When you load a standard the usage of a known data file if available is auto matically deactivated Remote command 5 5 DDEMod PRESet STANdard on 305 Save Standard Digital Standards Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE on page 306 Delete Standard Digital Standards Deletes the selected standard Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stand ard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards softkey See Restore Standard Files on page 135 Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete on page 306 Restore Standard Files Digital Standards Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 304 gt Ca Overview Configuration Overview Throughout the measure
82. SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth lt gt This command defines the length of the equalizer in terms of symbols Setting parameters lt FilterLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 256 RST 10 Default unit SYM Example DDEM EQU LENG 101 Sets the equalizer length to 101 symbols Configuring Manual operation See Filter Length on page 206 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LOAD Name This command selects a user defined equalizer The equalizer mode is automatically switched to USER see SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 380 Setting parameters Name string Path and file name without extension Example DDEM EQU LOAD D MMyEqualizer Selects equalizer named MyEqualizer in directory D Manual operation See Store Load Current Equalizer on page 206 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE Mode Switches between the equalizer modes For details see chapter 4 4 5 The Equalizer on page 103 Setting parameters Mode NORMal Switches the equalizer on for the next sweep TRACking Switches the equalizer on the results of the equalizer in the pre vious sweep are considered to calculate the new filter FREeze The filter is no longer changed the current equalizer values are used for subsequent sweeps USER A user defined equalizer loaded from a file is used AVERaging Switches the equalizer on the results of the equalizer in all pre vious sweeps since t
83. Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 405 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 403 6 4 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically see Modulation Accuracy on page 18 Limits and the limit check are configured in the Limits dialog box that is displayed when you press the ModAcc Limits Config softkey in the Lines menu Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines Limit Checking On Off Set to Default Current Mean Peak Limit Value Check Magnitude Error Peak Carrier Frequency Error Rho 0 999 Offset 40 0 dB Note Limits for Current and Peak are always equal For details on working with limits see chapter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modula tion Accuracy on page 254 Checking Modulation Accuracy Limits eene 226 Set to ter rere Peta ra 227 Curren Mean Peak u iit novice d toe dad eve bna eter ed 227 ME Rr TNR 227 MMC MEER 228 Checking Modulation Accuracy Limits Activates or deactivates evaluation of modulation accuracy limits in the result sum mary Remote command CALCulate
84. Start 5 sym Stop 5 sym Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM IMP to define the impulse response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 425 CALC FORM MAGN to define the magnitude result type see CAL Culatecn FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 437 Lum umor eec gt EE uode eru aa User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 38 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 19 3 2 20 Impulse Response Phase The Impulse Response Phase is the derivation of the Impulse Response Magnitude 4 ImpRespPhas Equalizer Start 5 sym Stop 5 sym Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 419 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM IMP to define the impulse response result type See CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 425 CALC FORM UPH to define the phase result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on 434 and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 437 Impulse Response Real Im
85. TAR 429 DISPlayEWINDowsSri PRATS VALtie ibo te i nette pde 430 DISPIayEWINDOWHSES IZE tt ettet eate cioe pra ac suse 418 pISPlayEWINBowsns TrRAC O SYMBOI 2 rrr cit cereo eret o rr 430 DISPlayEWINDowsr TRAC Y r eu rtp eorr terrere 356 DISPlay WINDow ns TRACe Y SCALe cutis rai creme rp esr etie tends 355 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO 389 DISPlayEWINDow r TRAGe Y SCALEe F MODE iare ctt rettet ettet i t dex DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINBDowsn TRAGCe Y SCAL6e RLEVel DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet sess 348 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition essent DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe RVALue sees DISPlayEWINDowsrn TRAGest z MODE rtt tr rhe prn tht tr eile eerte DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st X SCALe PDlVision essent DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RVALue eseeseeseeeeeseee nennen nennen nnne lt gt lt gt 5 1 5 12 1 1 432
86. VSA Amplitude Scale Unit Reference Leve Value 10 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Impedance RF Attenuation lectronic Attenuation Mode Auto 20 0 dB Note that amplitude settings are not window specific as opposed to the scaling and unit settings Relerence Level e deme x E d PME M EE ME 170 L Shifting ihe Display uuo eta tix ad te atf rae Rn 171 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 171 uo LE 171 L Preamplifier option 24 171 L 1 Pec e i MONIO Mr 172 RF E M 172 L Attenuation Mode 172 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B5 rtt re t te tr hee tea 173 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good s
87. lt gt 11 5 2 448 lt gt 11 5 408 lt gt 11 rennen 411 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak RESult 448 lt gt 11 6 408 lt gt 11 2 411 lt gt 11 448 lt gt 11 5 408 lt gt 11 2 411 lt gt 11 448 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak RESUult esent 448 lt gt 11 408 lt gt 11 1 2
88. lt Name gt string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Edit on page 197 See New on page 197 See Name on page 199 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate lt NState gt This command selects the degree of modulation number of permitted states The pat tern must have been selected before using using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 373 The number of permitted states depends on the modulation mode Setting parameters lt NState gt numeric value Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Mod order on page 200 11 5 7 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD lt AddPattern gt This command adds a pattern to the current standard Using the DDEM SEAR SYNC SEL command only those patterns can be selected which belong to the current standard see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 371 Setting parameters lt AddPattern gt string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Adding patterns to a standard on page 197 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove This command deletes one or all patterns from the current standard Usage Set
89. 1 Fig 4 3 Modulator with Transmit filter in detail As the measurement filters of the VSA application have low pass characteristics they suppress high frequency distortion components in the Meas Ref Error signal The errors are weighted spectrally Thus turning off the measurement filter can have an influence on the numeric and graphical error values However the measurement filter should be switched off if non linear distortions have to be measured they usually pro duce high frequency components Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Predefined measurement filters The most frequently required measurement filters are provided by the VSA application see chapter A 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 480 The frequency response of the available standard specific measurement filters is shown in chapter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 493 4 1 5 Customized Filters The analytical filter types RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and GAUS SIAN as well as the most important standard specific filters are already integrated in the VSA application In addition it is possible to use user defined measurement and transmit filters Customized filters may be useful for the following purposes e Development of new networks and modulation methods for which no filters are defined yet e Measurements of transmitter characteristics with slightly modified e g shortened transmitter filters An external program
90. 363 IF frequency OUTPUT Y 166 IF Out Output IF Out Frequency M IF Power Trigger softkey sese 186 Trigger level remote 363 IF WIDE OUTPUT COMMOCION 182 Importing JG dala rp ec tee data remote Impulse response Magnitude result type ne 38 Phase result type result type Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 163 Configuration Configuration remote 318 COUPLING tarn rer nr erret 149 172 Coupling EMOTE isinska eec certes 319 Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings 161 remote rn eere 319 RE Ae E 149 SCHINGS s rete 148 171 Source Configuration softkey 148 Source Configuration Softkey 148 Source Analog Baseband Soturce digitall Q uote eee ertet een Input sample rate ISR BI RE 65 71 Digital VQ cioe itr epo meo deer 161 Input sources Radio rrr ccn 149 Input Frontend M 148 IristallatiOEli 11 Intersymbol interference ISI 99 09
91. 411 lt gt 11 5 2 448 lt gt 11 5 2 408 lt gt 11 2 411 lt gt 11 5 448 lt gt 11 5 2 408 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak 411 lt gt 11 5 448 lt gt 11 5 408 lt gt 11 411 lt gt 11 2 449 lt gt 11 5 409 lt gt 11 411 lt gt 11
92. 491 Aene M 485 Measurement filters 493 Parameters eei rr e 485 Result Summary parameters 488 Result Summary parameters FSK 489 Standard specific filters 492 Statistics cnn rent rer nee 490 Trace averagilhg rrr tr tree 491 492 Trigger SoftKey 3 scat ie cr teet 185 Frequency Absolute result type ai retten ets 30 Configuration remote 5 Configuration softkey 168 485 IF Out Relative result type Frequency error Absol te result type 33 Formula is Relative iter 34 RMS peak formillae crt te 489 Frequency offset ren ro erre nee pere 169 Frequency response Channel result type EDGE filters Low ISI filters Magnitude result type Phase result type orion d caet mee Frequency Response Group Delay Channel type n eee 23 Result type 35 Frequency shift keying FSK Symbol mapping innere 83 Frontend Config ratiOn
93. 55 80 or deactivated A 20 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Fig 4 6 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate with and with out bandwidth extensions Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth 4 2 1 1 Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option B320 U320 Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz to 400 MHz proportional up to maximum 320 MHz 400 MHz to 10 GHz 320 MHz Digital Baseband output If Digital Baseband output is active see Digital Baseband Output on page 167 the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz usable bandwidth Usable bandwidth bandwidths for RF input Activated option A ner at LLL y 240 d __ dee _ __ __ _ 11 Ca ETT TTT TTT 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 10000 fa MHz Fig 4 7 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B320 4 2 1 2 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated Bandwidth Extension Option B500 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 provides measurement bandwidths up to 500 MHz Sample Rate Symbol Rate and
94. EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglIConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital data input and output lezunasi edaiD 14 335 INPut BIQ RANGe UPPer AUTQO iier eec aaua aaa a aT 336 INPutbIOXJRANOGSGODP Ig reor th rore oen ERR FERA RENE S ORAN en E 336 2 336 INPutDIO RANGSEUPPerEUNET ot rope rete o ette oot a e eter ze 337 c M 337 Configuring VSA INPUt DIGES RAT EAU TO esce de yo Pad aao RE Ae ch aote dare rn 337 e o 338 ONES mU TTE MO 338 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q input from the optional Digital Baseband
95. Equalizer Settings Deletes the data of the currently selected equalizer After deletion averaging and tracking starts anew This is useful in the rare case that calculation takes a wrong symbol decision into con sideration and distorts the signal such that the original signal can no longer be deter mined Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet on page 381 Store Load Current Equalizer Equalizer Settings Saves the current equalizer results to a file or loads a user defined equalizer The equalizer Mode must be set to USER in order to load a file Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE on page 381 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LOAD on page 380 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization You can influence the synchronization process and calculation of error values during demodulation R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Advanced demodulation settings are displayed when you select the Demodulation button in the Overview or the Demod Meas Filter softkey in the main VSA menu and then switch to the Demodulation Advanced tab A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Advanced Normalize EVM to Mean Ref Power Optimization Minimize RMS Error Estimation Points Sym Auto Coarse Synchronization Fine
96. Importing and Exporting Data and Results Return values lt LimitResult gt NONE PASS FAIL MARGIN NONE No limit check result available yet PASS All values have passed the limit check FAIL At least one value has exceeded the limit MARGIN currently not used RST NONE 11 10 Importing and Exporting Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the VSA application can not only be measured by the VSA application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated data from the VSA application can be exported for further analysis in external applications For details on importing and exporting I Q data see chapter 7 Data Import and Export on page 234 8 enne ibunt ete gn ER Er Rea ea a cba Rein io AERE n n 450 MMEMory STORE IO2COMMEN en nate ee e en re ee ede a 450 MMEMory STORGIG STA Vee occidi ote PERLE REEF XY EY a e Te TT N ENEK 451 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores data from file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Import on page 235 MMEMory STORe IQ COM
97. Q Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho lt LimitType gt For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value Setting parameters lt LimitState gt ON OFF Activates a limit check for the selected result and limit type RST OFF Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR STAT ON Switch limit check ON Manual operation See Check on page 228 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 409 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the limit for the current peak or mean center frequency error limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1000 0 mean 750 0 Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt
98. Symbol Mapping gt rer tr neris 91 Optimization Bemodulatior 2 rrr eren 208 Options cio 182 Bandwidth extension 66 67 182 Electronic attenuation B25 173 High pass filter B13 19 24 cedere 150 171 16075 Gadus 182 Constellation diagram 82 Output Configuration trennt erre irn Configuration softkey Digital Baseband Interface B17 settings 166 167 Digital Baseband Interface B17 status 338 Digital ertet 338 IF frequency remote rn 346 rt rete 166 Sample rate definition 65 71 SONGS M 165 MID 166 Overload RE inpUt femiolte 2 erret t 319 Oversampling Statistics re reet he eer ee 230 Overview GConfig ratiOn rc inert rrr rn 138 P Parameters codec eec D E PSK QAM Retrieving results remote SCPI parameters cocinero rte eerte Pattern search eco ior cerebri eren Rennen yo nene 193 proCess errem rennes 95 DISPIAY Enabling i MI
99. The time span of the data depends on the evaluation range capture buffer Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM FEYE User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 28 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 9 to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 Eye Diagram Imag Q The eye pattern of the quadrature channel the x axis range is from 1 to 1 sym bols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 2 Eye O Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 3 6 Result display Eye Diagram Imag Q Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM QEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 29 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 10 Eye Diagram Real I 3 2 11 The eye pattern of the inphase 1 channel the x axis value range is
100. This command defines whether the deviation error is compensated for when calculat ing the frequency error for FSK modulation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For newer remote programs use SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror on page 383 Setting parameters lt RefDevComp gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Scales the reference signal to the actual deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the entered nominal deviation for the reference signal RST 1 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue lt Normalize gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset and the compensation of amplitude droop on or off Programming Examples Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the more specific SENSe DDEMod NORMalize commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 5 8 Demodulation Settings on page 377 Setting parameters lt Normalize gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF No compensation for amplitude droop nor offset ON Compensation for amplitude droop and offset enabled RST 1 SENSe DDEMod SBANd lt SidebandPos gt This command selects the sideband for the demodulation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the SENS SWAP IQ command for new remote control programs see SENSe SWAPig on page 358 Setting parameters lt SidebandPos gt NORMal INVerse NORMal Normal non inverted po
101. Y axis remote control Y axis statistics Search Direction Real or Imag 224 Tolerance Burst Search 193 Search limits Activating 224 Secure user mode Storage lo6allOn err er eer encres 136 Select Result Rng led M 191 Sequencer Aborting remote 2 394 Activating 394 Mode remote e EEEN FA Spe Ren Settings piece cet sate Restoring files Storage location Settings files PIGS 137 LOA QING r 137 Er Me E 137 Signal capture Remote Control crine teer qr tienen oe cde pen 357 Softkey Signal description COMMUNAL o REC 140 Configuration remote sss 307 Patern TT M 146 cli Em 140 Signal ID External Mixer B21 remote control 322 External Mixer 821 tros 155 Signal model 5 3 9 em tert 106 nc 116 Signal source REMOTE 320 Signal structure Burst SONGS rcr ni rti en 145 Configuration REMOTE M Signal type Contin ous Burst Signal rrt 145 Single sweep Kiel
102. component and one that corresponds to the Q component RST 1 See Offset EVM on page 210 SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO lt LinkMode gt Defines how many sample points are used at each symbol to calculate modulation accuracy results automatically If enabled the VSA application uses the following settings depending on the modula tion type Configuring Modulation Est Points PSK QAM 1 Offset QPSK 2 FSK MSK Sample rate see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 357 Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on page 208 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue lt EstOverSmplg gt Defines how many sample points are used at each symbol to calculate modulation accuracy results For more information see Estimation points per symbol on page 126 You can also let the VSA application decide how many estimation points to use see SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO on 378 Setting parameters lt EstOverSmplg gt 1 the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account 2 two points per symbol instant are used required for Offset QPSk 4 8 16 32 the number of samples symbol defined the signal capture settings is used see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 357 i e all sample time instants are weighted equally RST 1 Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on 208
103. lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName STATus QUEStionable DIQ PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo PTRansition lt Bit
104. rex oett Rar 195 correlation threshold 194 Ix unnm 243 Process 98 linc 369 Selected terim reor Rente tege 195 xu fM e 146 Adding to standald 5 rr terrere krios nans 197 Assigning to 243 PV AMADIS a A 197 Coarse synchronization 209 Compatible p ra roce o terti mro 197 Configuration 146 195 COD WING ee TD 197 Creating 197 198 Definition remote esses 371 ETE 198 198 Displaying au 197 197 Enabling 195 198 Fine Synchronizatiori seserian 209 D 246 146 199 eur 146 PreK 197 Reference for result range 201 Removing from standard we NOL Restoring unies a 135 Selected 196 Standard 196 DYMBOI CHECK tnr encre 102 Symbol check demodulation process 96 Symbol format ene 200 Symbols 200 Workin
105. you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted automatically Parameters Threshold Range dB to 200 dB RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Performing Measurement Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 215 SENSe ADJust LEVel SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates a measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current measurement This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Usage Event 11 6 Performing a Measurement When the application is activated a continuous sweep is performed automatically However you can stop and start a new measurement any time Furthermore you can perform a sequence of measurements using the Sequencer see Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function on page 12 A 391 CON MGS Sis TETUR 392 INUTIate CONTINUOUS phat haare dendo ht
106. 0101101 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 11101 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 21 0 0121101 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 01111 0101111 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 11 1 911111 Channel 1 Complex sample 1 21111 0121111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01121 0101121 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11121 0111121 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 21 2 0121121 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB Save vector of complex cartesian 1 0 data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq Data File Format iq tar fwrite fid single real iq k f10at32 fwrite fid single imag iq k f10at32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands VSA SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURaltiOn 2 2 tri rnit 389 SENSe JADJust CONFigure DURAation MODE toco rendi rper terere eorr nen 389 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis EOWer oer rre erp eene t ir e n 390 SENSe JAD Just CONFiguresHYS T eresis UPB er 5 ert reet ren rne tni iR E Rennen 390 SENSE LEVET d 391 5 CVE BAND citri rhe rr nnne 328 SENS
107. 11 5 3 Signal Capture The signal capture commands define how much how and when data is captured from the input signal MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the VSA application in MSRA MSRT mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 180 ISENSe DDEMOSPISATB iiie o Ene ER atn eram een RI seARR 357 I SENSe J DDEMod REENgitbAD TO iiri ordered epe ate pae tree ne ama nre a iiaiai 357 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue eeeeeen eret 358 SENSES WAP IG recti 358 REP Ernie 358 ruat rua cd rund rana x conati n aude 359 TRAGeIQWBANGQMBNWID TH 2 arai ciere ra ena ne rau mau a aora SY FEY ape Ta 359 SENSe DDEMod PRATe lt CaptOverSmplg gt Defines the number of samples that are captured per symbol i e the factor by which the symbol rate is multiplied to obtain the sample rate
108. 189 Single rrt n bn 232 Slope Trigger o Jede Softkeys Amplitude Config 169 Auto Level seirer 171 175 214 coron eerie re 186 Capture OSet inisesin narnii 188 168 Continue Single Sweep Continuous Sweep BiglGOHBf i cet cr ene trennen Digital VQ trente tim ree Display configuration 01 rione erat t itd e pa ee ae Free Run nnn Frequency Config Power IF Power Import oon Lower Level Hysteresis 215 Marker rnnt rnnt 220 Marker to Gave 222 Alo ttc ead 214 etc e edes 215 M M 225 oce ete nete 226 Next MI re reet det ite 225 Next deiecit nde t eon 224 Norm Delta rre e recs 222 Outputs Confiesa nanay 165 a cete tinus p s iet 224 Preamp sa 190 171 Ref Level sa 170 174 Ref Level Offset 171 174 Refresh RF Atten Auto RF Mariilal ooo irte cete
109. 21 155 Loading Settings erret enne 137 Low ISI filters Frequency resporse nap reete 495 Lower Level Hysteresis 215 M Magnitude 485 Magnitude absolute 40 Magnitude Absolute ETEak 40 128 Magnitude error IBI oie EE TER 108 ogni c 485 sesult ty DO 43 44 RMS peak formulae 488 489 Magnitude Overview Absolute FRESUIE TY DO cis 41 128 Magnitude Relative Usque 43 Mapping see Symbol MAPPING 73 Mapping wizard 2 93 Marker to Trace 222 Absolute peak rra oriri tra Porc 224 Assigned MACE Sue 222 ES 220 Configuring softkey s Loo Ufo eei oerte bene E mare faster ci opener 222 Delta markers 222 General settings remote 402 225 Next minimum 225 Next peak 224 224 umeris eec 224 Querying position remote Retrieving values remote 431 Search settings 222 Settings remote 399 Slate
110. 7 wened LL 3633 9 09 3903 271081 YSH 3904 asina 7 3903 esindepiM _ 0051754 adeys esind 3903 9222 7 wened 24 O NSH epmaoas gt 3903 271 981 Sd MOJEN 3903 7 edeus 0051754 8908 NSH JS 9222 7 wened 24 O NSH dO 3003 _ 451 7 YSN 3903 49189 00517 XSWo 3903 Wy wened 240 072 26 026 3003 soy ysung Budden 1899 uonenjeag Jojuojeeg jg eudiv JopjoJ Predefined Standards and Settings s WIO ous e Jo pJepuejs OU sJeyllp si 104 425 991 x V 9 9 v 008 220 ZHN 8 ASdO 9 dd9 vaL y
111. Aborting SWO OD e t dtd 189 190 AC DC COUPIING Dep ene 149 172 Activating VSA remote ee edes 300 Active probe TR 165 Alignment rarige ettet rentes 202 Alpha BT x t cet ert egentes 144 212 Amplitude Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 173 Configuration remote n Configuration softkey Distortion effect T ue d Amplitude droop rrr rir neret en 204 Definition Formula Analog Baseband Amplitude settings tremere 173 ten t ene 163 Analog Baseband B71 Full scale l vel teh etri tet 175 mode Input type remote control Analog Baseband Interface B71 Amplitude settings ottenere 173 settings ceo rro 163 Analysis Bandwidth definition 65 71 ie p aa 216 Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote 412 414 MSRA MSRT 181 357 Analysis erre 131 Config ratiOhi rrr 233 Configuration remote 412 414 Analyzing Measured data nete denen 250 APSK Modulation type tie eterna 141 Symbol mapping i ius cuiii nez Cep ca a 92 ASCII Trace export 481 ASK Modulation type ee retener 141 Symbol MAP
112. CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance type This command queries the results of the imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation Retrieving Results Query parameters type none imbalance error for current sweep Average imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of I Q imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of imbalance error Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor type This command queries the results of the magnitude error measurement of digital demodulation Query parameters type none RMS magnitude error of display points of current sweep Average of RMS magnitude errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum magnitude errors over several sweeps PCTL 9596 percentile of RMS magnitude error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum magnitude errors over several Sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum magnitude errors over several Sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of magnitude errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer type This command queries the
113. DDEMod FILTer ALPHa on page 308 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe on page 309 Configuring VSA Remote commands exclusive to configuring measurement filters ISENS amp DDEMod MFIbler AEPHg uncta o nep eta e xh tr e Sene eo romero ure eni 386 SENS amp T DDEMogSMFIEIeE NUT ai npa c Reto Lauree doen 386 t rari eoa tao 386 ISENSe JDDEModIMFILter STAT un ei inna a er x eoru pu SEE FR S e eo 386 SENS J DDEMod MEIEte DS ER uen aba pane tik pim nbn tio n eie 387 SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa lt MeasFiltAlphaBT gt This command sets the alpha value of the measurement filter Setting parameters MeasFiltAlphaBT numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 212 SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO lt MeasFilterAuto gt If this command is set to ON the measurement filter is defined automatically depend ing on the transmit filter see SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 314 Setting parameters lt MeasFilterAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST ON Manual operation See Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 211 SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME Name This command selects a measurement filter and automatically sets it
114. DEM SEAR SYNC CAT CURR Query the names of all defined patterns assigned to the current standard DEM SEAR SYNC SEL EDGE TSC CUST DEM STAN SYNC OFFS 10 Ignore the first 10 symbols of the signal before comparing pattern DEM STAN SYNC OFFS STAT ON D D Select a pattern D D D DEM SEAR SYNC STAT ON DDEM STAN SAVE C TEMP CustomizedBurstMeas INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until it has finished Retrieving Results TRAC3 DATA 1 Query the trace results of the capture buffer display Results TRAC2 DATA 1 Query the results of the result summary Results Abbreviations The following sections are provided for reference purposes and include detailed infor mation such as formulae and abbreviations A 1 Abbreviations AbbreViatiOnte iecit peine te EE FERRI Ide e ES onte ERE nnda Predefined Standards and Settings Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters ASCII File Export Format for Data Known Data File Syntax Description eg m ents Data File Format iq tar The following abbreviations are commonly used in the description of the R amp S FSW K70 option Abbreviation Meaning See section FSK Frequency Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted in the fre
115. DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following e complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and values interleaved and Q are unitless e real Real number unitless e polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 7 2 Data Binary File on page 503 The following data types are allowed e int8 8bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 Data File Format iq tar Element Description ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary data itself has no unit To get an sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan Optional specifies the number of channels
116. E 0 1sung 0001 E euis ZHN 3esyo 912 009 INSL6 Jejueg SUON ISMEN edd 0115418 0001 7 OL Ou ZH 009 5 912 u6ue sang 19114 Budde 1895 ulayed 10 10 YOILAS l1g eudiv 5 JoquiAs uone npo N 4 Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters A 3 Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters A 3 1 The most frequently required measurement and TX filters required for vector signal analysis according to digital standards are provided by the R amp S FSW VSA application For general information on the use of these filters see chapter 4 1 Filters and Band widths During Signal Processing on page 57 Transmit Filters The transmit filters required for common standards are predefined in the VSA applica tion Table 1 2 Overview of predefined Transmit filters RC Raised cosine RRC Root raised cosine Gauss Gauss filter GMSK Gauss filter convolved with a rectangular filter typically used for MSK Linearized GMSK Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE 3GPP TS 45 004 normal symbol rate EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol rate EDGE Wide Pulse Shape Standard specific filter GSM EDGE higher symbol rate Half Sine Half Sine filt
117. Example If you want to analyze the probabilities of occurrence for errors greater than 95 enter the reference value 95 Start 95 0 Stop 100 0 Fig 8 4 Defining the x axis scaling using a reference point To define the x axis scaling automatically 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt XScale Config gt Auto Scale The x axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynamically To define the y axis range manually With this method you define the upper and lower limits of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 If the y axis has logarithmic scale the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Min Value 3 Enter the lower limit in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Max Value 5 Enter the upper limit in the current unit The y axis is adapted to display the specified range Probabilities of occurrence located outside the display area are applied to the bars at the left or right borders of the display 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modulation Accuracy The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the r
118. For the Magnitude Absolute result display the trace modes Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual result ranges and thus may not provide useful results eee SS eH User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 217 Trace Settings Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistic Count determines the number of averaging procedures View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 397 Evaluation Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the refer ence signal if Meas amp Ref Signal is used as the evaluation data source see Signal Source on page 229 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 397 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and ca
119. H i 1 D 1 ee c N 80 100 8p 0 8 04 06 0 2 Frequency in CDMA2000 1X Forward 4 4 20 4 4 14 4 4 4 1 2 1 0 ZO BD ess gp D 4 80 100 Frequency in Formulae CDMA2000 1X Reverse 20 0 4 2 1 4 4 4 4 4 r 4 D 4 D D 1 4 D r 4 4 4 D i 4 4 4 4 4 L D 4 D r 4 DL 4 1 D ot 0 4 2 4 4 42 20 40 gp Pessac 14 4 80 4 4 100 f ymbol Frequency in EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape D 4 1 D 1 1 D 423 4 4 20 T b 4 zzzl 2 20 F 40 Bii
120. LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy EVM PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy EVM RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean EVM peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FDERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FDERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean center frequency deviation error Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1 kHz Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue l
121. Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Offset on page 202 Configuring VSA CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust VALue Reference This command defines the reference point for the display Suffix lt gt 1 6 Setting parameters Reference TRIGger BURSt PATTern TRIGger The reference point is defined by the start of the capture buffer BURSt The reference point is defined by the start center end of the burst PATTern The instrument selects the reference point and the alignment RST TRIGger Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Reference on page 201 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset lt VOffset gt This command defines an offset to numbering of the symbols Except capture buffer Setting parameters lt VOffset gt numeric value Range 100000 to 100000 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Symbol Number at Reference Start on page 202 SENSe DDEMod TIME lt ResultLength gt The command determines the number of displayed symbols result length Setting parameters lt gt numeric value Range 10 to 64000 RST 800 Defa
122. Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 370 Selected Pattern for Search Indicates which of the patterns that are assigned to the current standard is selected and will be searched for The selected pattern is indicated for information only and cannot be edited here only in the Signal Structure settings see Name on page 146 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 371 Pattern Found Indicates whether a pattern was found in the currently captured data 5 7 3 Pattern Configuration For common signal standards the patterns to be searched for in the captured signal are predefined in the VSA application In addition new patterns can be defined and assigned to a signal standard manually Patterns are configured in the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box which is dis played when you do one of the following e Select the Pattern Config softkey the main VSA menu e Inthe Signal Description dialog box switch to the Signal Structure tab and select the Pattern Config button Burst and Pattern Configuration Advanced Pattern Settin 52 3 x Standard Patterns Pattern Details Name V EDGE TSCO MR SEA Description EDGE Norma Comment raining Sequence Code Modulation Order 8 All Patterns Prefix Show Compatible Show EDGE_TSCO Pattern Search On Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Standard Patterns selecting an assigned
123. Result display for individual value in Result Summary In addition to the current measurement value the statistical results see chap ter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 and the peak limit value see Limit Value on page 227 for the selected parameter are displayed For details on the displayed results see chapter 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA on page 55 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ITEM LINE VALue on 428 3 2 30 Symbol Table Symbol numbers are displayed as a table Each symbol is represented by an entry in the table The symbols can be displayed in binary octal hexadecimal or decimal for mat Selected symbols using markers are highlighted by a blue frame Example 4 Symbols Hexadecimal T S EP O uU 4 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 31 1 fi G9 lt yi i IO 2 N olu C O GJ C IC WIW lO I 10 jc 1 IC war fje GJ w m C Fig 3 22 Result display for Symbols in hexadecimal mode um EP EE NN UU User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 52 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays If a pattern search is active a found p
124. SENSe DDEMod FAC Tory e E Litres a 304 SENSe DDEMed PRESat STANdgard roit eb et RR RR ARR 305 5 5 1 5 305 SENSe DDEMed S TANdard DELele etica iter ttr i tet io rk 306 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALUS 306 ISENSe DDEMod S TAldard SAVE ira nore eter pen een ote eur 306 SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue Factory This command restores the factory settings of standards or patterns for the VSA appli cation Digital Standards Setting parameters Factory ALL STANdard PATTern ALL Restores both standards and patterns RST ALL Usage Setting only Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 135 See Restore Pattern Files on page 135 SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard Standard This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standardized transmission method or a user defined transmission method The standardized transmission methods are available in the instrument as predefined standards Setting parameters Standard string Specifies the file name that contains the transmission method without the extension For user defined standards the file path must be included Default standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz do not require a path definition A list of prede fined stand
125. Source Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute MAGNItude Real Imag RIMag Frequency Absolute FREQuency Vector I Q COMP Magnitude Overview Absolute MOVerview Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Magnitude Relative MAGNitude Phase Wrap PHASe Phase Unwrap UPHase Frequency Absolute FREQuency Frequency Relative FREQuency Real Imag 1 RIMag Eye Diagram Real 1 Eye Diagram Eye Diagram Frequency FEYE Constellation CONS Constellation Rotated RCON Vector I Q COMP Constellation Frequency CONF Vector Frequency COVF Symbols Binary Octal Decimal 2 Hexadecimal Error Vector EVM MAGNItude Real Imag RIMag Result Types in Evaluation Data Result Type SCPI Parameter Source Vector I Q COMP Modulation Errors Magnitude Error MAGNItude Phase Error PHASe Frequency Error Absolute FREQuency Delay Frequency Error Relative FREQuency Modulation Accuracy Bit Error Rate BERate Result Summary RSUM Equalizer Impulse Response Magnitude MAGNItude Impulse Response Phase UPHase Impulse Response Real Image RIMag Frequency Response Magnitude MAGNItude Frequency Response Phase UPHase Frequency Response Group Delay GDELay Channel Frquency Response Magni MAGNitude tude Channel Frequency Response Group GDELay For details on selecting the data source and result types for evaluation see chapter 6 5 Disp
126. To improve these calculations the reference signal can be estimated from a smaller area that includes a known symbol sequence in the input signal In this case the results for the limited reference area are more precise at the cost of less accurate results outside this area Thus the result range should be set to the length of the refer ence area The reference area can be defined either using a pattern or using a known data sequence from a Known Data file If no predefined data sequences are available for the signal the detected data is used by default If Auto mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use the known data sequences are used Otherwise the detected data is used Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in refer ence to the evaluated data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Known Data reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data Pattern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 209 5 10 Measurement Filter Settings Detected Default The reference signal is estimated from the detected data Data Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO on page 381 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE on page 382 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESu
127. Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 394 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 396 Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the 11171 command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 396 Performing a Measurement Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 396 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual
128. cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on 389 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 214 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 215 SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 391 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 215 SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 391 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal
129. non compensated offset Offset compensated for Offset NOT compensated for 170 Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 170 Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Stop 2 52 1 Clrw Stop 2 52 Start 0 sym Stop 300 sym Start Osym Stop 300 sym Gain Imbalance Quadrature ee ee R 1 D 5 0 2 5 1 Inphase Fig 4 58 Effect of gain imbalance The gain difference in the and Q channels during signal generation in the transmitter is referred to as gain imbalance The effect of this error on the constellation diagram and the unit circle are shown in figure 4 58 In the example the gain in the channel is slightly reduced which causes a distortion of coordinates in the direction The unit cir cle of the ideal constellation points has an elliptic shape User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 111 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The gain imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the imbalance does not affect the EVM Note that the gain imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal The distortions gain imbalance and quadrature error can only be measured without ambiguity if the following two conditions are fullfilled o Preconditions for Gain Imbalance and Quadrature Error measurements e a pattern is detected e the modulation is a non differential non rotating QAM or PS
130. on page 150 Attenuation ONUA ON 350 IN Put ATTenaalon AUTO oat eret nn tere een bene de E EAE 350 INPUCEA TT a 351 INPUTEA TT 351 aa ee ned tee antes 351 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 351 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 172 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command couples or decouples the attenuati
131. pattern is generated inter nally based on the specified symbol number of the pattern and the signal description R amp S FSW K70 200Measurement Basics i e modulation scheme and transmit filter The pattern search can also be refer red to as the I Q waveform An 1 pattern is considered detected if the correlation met ric i e the correlation value between the ideal pattern and capture buffer exceeds a specified I Q Correlation Threshold see Correlation Threshold on page 194 If the burst search is switched on the pattern search only searches the pattern in bursts previously detected by the burst search Furthermore it only finds the first I Q pattern within each burst If the burst search is switched off the pattern search searches for the pattern in the entire capture buffer The first detected pattern in the capture buffer for the current pattern search settings is indicated by a green line in the preview area of the Pattern Search configuration dia log box see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 193 Information Selected pattern for Search GSM TSCO Pattern Found X Preview Preview Mag CapBuf 1 Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Predefined Patterns Common standards usually have predefined pattern lists with standard specific pat terns Patterns required for the current measurement can be selected from this list This list can be extended by patterns that
132. the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe EVENt lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 459 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName STA
133. 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 LAYout WINDow n ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow 2 for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by th
134. 1 6 SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e Values eec tec dto 298 e 299 e Character Da a ree na nre ate e Rr RR S abr R aa Ra iia 299 AERE 300 coe 300 11 1 6 1 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value 11 1 6 2 11 1 6 3 Introduction UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the settin
135. 100 00 Carrier Frequency Frror 445021 50 Rho 0 000 008 1 0 Offset 36 57 1 0 Tmbalance 0 08 balane 46 60 o rror 159 53 Start 3 135 5 Stop 3 0 000 000 3 Mag Capture Buffer wid Symbols Hexadecimal zm pg 0 16 32 18 64 80 96 112 128 160 176 192 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on measurement application 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA and MSRT operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored background of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA MSRT operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Channel bar information In VSA application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in VSA application Ref Level Reference level Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Mod Modulation type if no standard is active or default standard is changed Res Len Result Length SR Symbo
136. 1173 9292 02 10 16 Evaluation Data Sources in chapter 3 2 9 Eye Diagram Imag Q on page 29 chapter 3 2 8 Eye Diagram Frequency on page 28 chapter 3 2 5 Constellation 1 0 on page 25 chapter 3 2 32 Vector on page 54 chapter 3 2 4 Constellation Frequency on page 24 chapter 3 2 31 Vector Frequency on page 53 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL REF see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 Symbols The detected symbols i e the detected bits displayed in a table The default result type is a hexadecimal symbol table Other formats for the symbol table are available but no other result types see chap ter 3 2 30 Symbol Table on page 52 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL SYMB see LAYout ADD WINDow page 419 Error Vector The modulated difference between the complex measurement signal and the complex reference signal Modulation measurement signal reference signal For example EVM Mag meas ref The default result type is EVM The following result types are available e chapter 3 2 7 Error Vector Magnitude EVM on page 27 e chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag on page 47 e chapter 3 2 32 Vector on page 54 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL EVEC see LAYout ADD WINDow 419 Modulation Errors The difference between the modulated complex samples in the measurement and the modulated reference signal
137. 187 TOJO 187 ac I 188 Drop OUt oe 2 Rcx undc ea nece IEEE 188 loo p 188 Tigger 188 Capture OR OE ea 188 Trigger Source Defines the trigger source a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 364 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 364 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 187 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Note in VSA trigger output is not supported thu
138. 1mA SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO CVL MIX FS 260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 JA HA Go A Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 Configuring VSA SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA 1 11 5 2 3 Configuring Digital Input and Output Useful commands for digital data described elsewhere INP SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 320 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 362 Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce
139. 28 1 Phase Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 18 Result display Phase Unwrap Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM UPHase to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 Real Imag I Q Real and imaginary part of the measurement or reference signal in separate measure ment diagrams the x axis scaled in time units or symbols is identical for both dia grams Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal e Error Vector Capture buffer display Note that this result display is based on an individual capture buffer range If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping ranges with a size of 256 000 each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Real Imag result display For details see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 eT User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 47 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source e Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale level for I Q input 4 Real RealImag CaptureBuffer 4 Imag RealImag CaptureBuffer ei Clrw 800
140. 426 TRAC DATA to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results on page 435 Magnitude Overview Absolute Magnitude of the source signal in the entire capture buffer the actual signal amplitude is displayed Mag uas IMEAS with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 41 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Prem po D SEES SSF Note that for very large numbers of samples 225 000 the samples are mapped to 25 000 trace points using an autopeak detector for display Thus this result display is not suitable to detect transient effects or analyze individual symbols closely For these purposes use the Magnitude Absolute result display instead The Magnitude Overview Absolute is only available for the source type e Capture Buffer 1 Mag Overview CaptureBuffer 1 Clrw 0 220000 Fig 3 13 Result display Magnitude Overview Absolute for capture buffer data Restrictions Note the following restrictions that apply to this result display e Only one trace is available e Only the trace modes Clear Write and View are available See also chapter 6 1 Trace Settings on page 216 Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL CBUF to define the required source type see LA
141. 460 460 5 5 lt gt 461 lt gt 1 1 4044 4 40 461 5 5 lt gt 461 lt gt 461 lt gt 461 lt gt 461 lt gt 1 461 lt gt 461 lt gt 461 5 5 461 STATUus QUEStonable SYNG NTRAnsillon 2
142. 64 4 3 2 2 0 14 inna etui bead ne media nnne mapa adn 73 44 Overview of the Demodulation Process eene nnnm 94 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation 106 4 6 Measurement Rangges cecinere cutie cue innie anco inan 122 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per 126 48 Capture Buffer Display ont eren eren reu ERE ua 128 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and 129 410 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode eene nennen 130 SEE II DIM E 133 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis eee 134 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards eene 135 5 3 Configuration Overview creer ER eR I ERR REIHE RR Ee HERE 138 544 Signal Description Eee EIE DE Tar ate UNE SERE 140 5 5 Input Output and Frontend 5 148 5 6 Signal Capture onere 180 5 7 Burst and Pattern
143. Bandwidth Digital Baseband output Digital Baseband output see Digital Baseband Output on page 167 is not available for an active R amp S FSW B500 bandwidth extension Realtime measurements and MSRT operating mode Realtime measurements and thus the entire MSRT operating mode are not available if the R amp S FSW B500 bandwidth extension option is installed Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz to 600 MHz proportional up to maximum 500 MHz 600 MHz to 10 GHz 500 MHz bandwidths for RF input Usable bandwidth MHz Activated option M LTLLLLJ B500 Output sample 10000 rate fout MHz Fig 4 8 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B500 MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode with active B500 bandwidth extension the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth 4 2 2 Sample Rates Bandwidths for Digital Data Definitions Clock rate the rate at which data is physically transmitted between the R amp S FSW and the connected instrument both instruments must be able to process data at this rate the clock rate of the R amp S FSW at the output connector is 142 9 MHz using the Digital enhanced mode a data transfer rate of up to 200 Msps is pos sible e Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the con nected instrument to the
144. DATA TRACE lt n gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation data source and result type are provided here Capture Buffer FSesultls eee tre Coen ee ne Pug ao unn beue Rex RN 435 e Cartesian Dlagraifis teer R TEE E EE E 436 e Polar Diagrams 436 RECTE IUE 436 e Result SUMMAN itt t ieee 436 ET mem 437 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results For the result displays based on the capture buffer the command returns the y axis values of the data that is stored in the capture buffer The number of returned values depends on the size of the capture buffer and the sample rate For example a capture buffer size of 500 symbols in combination with a sample rate of 4 would return 2000 level values The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source e Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale level for input The unit is dBm Retrieving Results Note that the trace results return only the values for the currently displayed capture buffer range see also chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display this command returns a maximum of 25 000 values corresponding to the displayed trace points You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis u
145. Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Configuring Manual operation See Defining Min and Max Values on page 177 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis Parameters Unit PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 180 CALCulate n UNIT ANGLe Unit This command selects the global unit for phase results Setting parameters Unit DEG RAD RST RAD Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 180 CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME Unit This command selects the unit symbols or seconds for the x axis Setting parameters Unit S SYM RST SYM Manual operation X Axis Unit on page 179 CALCulate lt n gt Y UNIT TIME Unit This command selects the unit symbols or seconds for the y axis of equalizer group delay measurements Setting parameters Unit S SYM RST SYM Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision lt PDiv gt This command defines the scaling of the x axis for statistical result displays For all other result displays this command is only available as a query Configuring Setting parameters lt PDiv gt numeric value Defines the range per division total range 10 lt PDiv gt Manual operation See Range per Division on page 178 DISPlay
146. FSQ K70 R amp S FSW K70 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSW K70 or Why do have to choose different transmit filters the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSW K70 When generating an MSK FSK reference signal the R amp S FSQ K70 automatically replaces the Dirac pulses generated by the frequency mapper with square pulses with the length of one symbol In the R amp S FSW K70 however this replacement is part of the transmit filter routine Thus the R amp S FSQ and the R amp S FSW require different transmit filters for measuring the same FSK MSK signal Example e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was NONE you need to choose Rec tangular as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSW e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was GAUSS you need to choose GMSK as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSW Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is signif icantly different Solution e Make sure that the position of the Evaluation Lines is reasonable The Result Summary only evaluates sample instants that are within the evaluation lines Hence in the case the Result Range covers the burst ramps it is important to adjust the Evaluation Range appropriately User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 289 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm
147. IDBEMod EQlJalizer MODE ert ier E eir eve yat ERE SENSe DDEMod EQUalizet RESET erreren tore bevor pene e cep eee OR UN IE ea COR eeu SENSe DDEMod EQUAlizer SAVE siir tete Rt eg tette e estoy de pla cede Mice SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer S TATe SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue eese nennen enne nnne nnne retenti EES tnnt enses nns SENSe DBEMOQq FIETOr AUPEa iac cote et ttg ed EA tp caravan SENSe IDDBEMOG FIETer STATO ciet e rr icu ERES eC SENSe DBEMOQ ESKNS Fate concret te eet tec hp ED c pdt ng ce SENSe IDDBEMOQESYNGCIAU TQ Vane theirs SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel SENSe DDEMod FSYNG MODE ettet ttt 382 SENSe DDEMod KDATAa STATe ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt otto pss 382 SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME ettet 9 383 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog cette 310 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue cette ttt ttt ttt totis 310 SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO ttt ttt ttt ttt tts osi 5 SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER
148. Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 in the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device 10 of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Configuring lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 9 97637 is returned Example INP DIQ CDEV Result SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Manual oper
149. J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 159 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring VSA Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Write to CVL table gt on page 156 See Bias on page 159 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss ta
150. Magnitude Overview Absolute result display these trace modes are not available at all Furthermore only one trace can be configured in the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display Remote commands Remote commands are provided to determine which result range is currently being dis played User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 128 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst STARt on page 434 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t X SCALe STOP on 432 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions For various vector signal analysis functions the measured signal is compared to a defined ideal reference signal The more precise the reference signal the more precise the results become In the best case the possible data sequences within the signal to analyze are known in advance and can be used to compare the measured data to This is similar to defining a pattern for the entire result range Thus a falsely estimated reference signal due to false symbol decisions is avoided and does not influence the error calculation You can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the VSA application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions e Fine synchronization during the demodulation process see figure 4 45 and Fine Synchronization on page 209 e Calculation of the Bit Error Rate BER
151. Modulation measurement signal Modulation reference signal For example Magnitude Error Mag meas Mag ref The default result type is Magnitude Error The following result types are available e chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 40 e chapter 3 2 25 Phase Error on page 44 e chapter 3 2 13 Frequency Error Absolute on page 33 e chapter 3 2 14 Frequency Error Relative on page 34 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays e a Modulation Accuracy Paraeters that characterize the accuracy of modulation The default result type is Result Summary The following result types are available e chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 e chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green 1 Result Summary Current EVM RMS Peak MER RMS 18 00 Peak 0 28 Phase Error RMS 6 62 Peak 44 67 Magnitude Error RMS Peak 48 74 Carrier Frequency Error 201 04 Rho 0 984 404 I Q Offset 40 15 170 Imbalance 57 56 Gain Im
152. No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 6 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Carrier Frequency evalua tion It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current value 1 Error in mean value 2 Error in peak value 3 15 These bits are not used 11 11 7 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO Register This register comprises information about limit violations in offset or RHO evalua tion It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulationcn IQRHO EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RHO value 1 Error in mean RHO value 2 Error in peak RHO value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current 1 offset value 6 Error in mean 1 offset value Status Reporting System Bit No Meaning 7 Error in peak offset value 8 15 These bits are not used 11 11 8 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FS
153. OOFFset CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the upper limit for the current peak or mean offset Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 200 0 to 0 0 RST 40 0 mean 45 0 Default unit DB CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy PERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy PERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 411 11 7 4 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean phase error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept iden tical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 360 RST 3 5 RMS 1 5 Default unit deg CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy RHO MEAN VALue lt LimitVal
154. Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA or MSRT operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time off Set between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data 5 6 3 Signal Capture In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 In MSRT mode the offset may be negative if a pretrigger time is defined Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 413 SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet on page 415 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated They are configured via the SWEEP key Continuous Sweep RUN DONT io cerro er ee n eae eee a bn e deeem ets 189 single Sweep RUN SINGLE ari tes Leser Lu REP pred 189 GOMINUG Single e M rien Der der udi 190 Refresh non Multistandard IO dee er en ce tre ert end daa 190 Se oeda M 190 Selectsesult Bg teresa 191 il e cm 191 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the measurement and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key aga
155. Overview of the Demodulation Process K70 Kernel Settings IQ Capture Buffer Burst Search optional Burst Search Settings ata Position Demodulation 82 DOREM bl Symbol Decisions ptional Reference Signal Generation Ref Signal Measurement Measurement Filter Filtering optional Settings Demodulation Settings Display Configuration Fine Estimates Modulation amp Signal Ref Signal Result Display Fig 4 45 Demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option R amp S FSW K70 200Measurement Basics The figure 4 45 provides an overview of the demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option The function blocks of the signal processing kernel can be found at the left in grey and their appropriate settings at the right in blue A more detailed description of the most important stages is given in the following sec tions Burst Search In this stage the capture buffer is searched for bursts that comply with the signal description The search itself can be switched on or off via the Burst Search dialog see Enabling Burst Searches on page 192 A list of the detected bursts is passed on to the next processing stage Pattern Search The I Q Pattern Search is performed on the capture buffer This means the VSA application modulates the selected pattern according to the transmit filter Tx filte
156. Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the reference deviation of FSK modulated signals Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance lt type gt This command queries the results of the Gain Imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Gain imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average gain imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak gain imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of gain imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of gain imbalance error Usage Query only
157. SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 352 Default Settings X Axis Scaling Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values for the current measurement window Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 352 Quantize X Axis Scaling Defines the number of bars to be displayed in the graph i e the granularity of classifi cations Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt on page 353 X Axis Reference Value X Axis Scaling Defines a reference value on the x axis in the current unit Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue on 355 X Axis Reference Position X Axis Scaling Defines the position of the X Axis Reference Value on the x axis The position is defined as a percentage value where 0 refers to the beginning left side 100 96 refers to the end right side of the diagram The x axis is adapted so that the reference value is displayed at the reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition on page 355 Range per Division X Axis Scaling Defines the value range to be displayed per division on the x axis Since the display consists of 10 divisions by default the displayed range is Range 10 lt Range per Division gt Note If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in width the range per division is increased in order to display the same result rang
158. Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym The TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW can only be used for input in the VSA application for use as external triggers No configuration settings are available for trigger input For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the VSA application in MSRA MSRT operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA MSRT Master to the start of the application data for vector signal analysis See Capture Offset For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual aan User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 184 Signal Capture ANI GCE SOURCE 185 185 L External Trigger 1 2 3 cccscsscsccccscssssesessecsssteeesesesecescsssessseseessnenenesenees 185 TP RS 186 186 LQ Powe E 186 Et A 187 1 LOVE m
159. Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m tel Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 76 sym C Mag CapBuf Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m tel Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN Clrw Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Start 76 syr C Mag CapBuf Pattern Start 0 sym Fig 10 13 Solution Result Summary with correct evaluation range setting Make sure that the same samples are evaluated By default the EVM trace dis plays all sample instants e g if the sample rate is 4 the EVM trace shows 4 sam ples per symbol The Result Summary does not automatically evaluate all sample User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 290 R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement instants E g for a PSK modulation by default only symbol instants contribute to the EVM result Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm m tel Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 100 SGL ResRange Count 0 Start 3 C Const I Q Meas amp Ref Start 2 535 Mod Offset QPSK SR 1 0 MHz Settings Overview Cirw Result Summary 2 Unit Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop power Stop 103 sym 1M Clrw D Vector I Q Error 1 Clrw
160. This parameter also affects the demodulation bandwidth and thus the usable bandwidth The sample rate depends on the defined Symbol Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 64 Setting parameters lt gt 418116132 The factor by which the symbol rate is multiplied to obtain the sample rate e g 4 samples per symbol sample rate 4 symbol rate RST 4 Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 182 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO lt RecLengthAuto gt If enabled the capture length is automatically adapted as required according to the current result length burst and pattern search settings and network specific character istics e g burst and frame structures Configuring Setting parameters lt RecLengthAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Capture Length Settings on page 181 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue lt RecordLength gt This command defines the capture length for further processing e g for burst search The record length is defined in time S default or symbols SYM Note that the maximum record length depends on the sample rate for signal capture see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 357 For the default value 4 the maximum is 64000 symbols For larger sample rates the maximum record length in symbols can be calculated as Recordlengthyyax 256000 points per symbol Setting parameters lt
161. Type Determines whether the signal is continuous or contains bursts Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue on page 317 Burst Settings For bursts further settings are available User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 145 Signal Description Min Length Max Length Burst Settings Shortest and longest expected burst length in symbols 15000 The symbols are verted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt LE SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt LI d 2 Q th MAXimum on page 316 th MINimum on page 316 2 Q Run In Burst Settings The number of symbols before the signal is assumed to have valid modulated symbols The symbols are converted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP RISing on 316 Run Out Burst Settings The number of symbols before the falling edge that do not necessarily need to have a valid modulation The symbols are converted to seconds for reference Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP FALLing on page 316 Pattern Settings If the signal is expected to have a specific pattern enable the Pattern option to define the pattern settings Note The pattern search itself must be enabled separately in the Pattern Search Set tings see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 194 By default the pattern search is active if the signal descrip
162. USER on page 387 To use a user defined filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on page 386 To define the name of the measurement filter Load User Filter Type Opens file selection dialog box to select the user defined measurement filter to be used This setting is only available if User is selected as the Filter Type For detailed instructions on working with user defined filters see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters on page 242 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER on page 387 Alpha BT Type Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor or filter bandwidth are available for RC RRC and Gauss filters If the measurement mode is automatically selected according to the transmit filter this setting is identical to the Alpha BT value in the modulation settings see Alpha BT on page 144 Remote command Measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa on page 386 Transmit filter SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa page 314 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration The evaluation range defines which range of the result is to be evaluated either the entire result range or only a specified part of it The calculated length of the specified range is indicated beneath the entries Evaluation Range Configuration A visualization of the evaluation range in relation to the result range with the current settings is displayed at the bo
163. Upper Level Hysteresis sini H 215 Usable bandwidth Definitii 65 71 RRESUIECISDIAY oceano cr 15 183 Useful length SUI 125 User filters Loading User manuals User QAM ore terreno epe NOAE nin 141 User sample rate DG TIMIMIOM er 65 71 V Vector frequency da RARE 53 Vector PRESUIE PEE 54 Video V DDR TEM 166 Window configuration Data SOUEGO ctt obe iege Result type e Result type transformation SOfIKGy ertet Window title bar information 4 Windows Adding remote in e rte noms 419 Closing remote 421 424 Configuring iori rerit Pre eren re 139 layout remote eire te 422 Maximizing remote cn ttti 418 Queryitrig remote ir etr tes 420 421 Replacing remote eet 421 Splitting remote Types remote tacere bn X X axis RUE lacs c Ee Reference position E 524 orta eterne te rni Scaling default Scaling automatically Scaling auto softkey Scaling auto all windows softkey 215 Bcc HM 179 X value lul aH 221 Y Y axis Mix max value
164. WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition lt RPos gt This command defines the position of the reference value for the X axis Setting the position of the reference value is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Setting parameters lt RPos gt numeric value lt numeric_value gt Example DISP TRAC X RPOS 30 PCT The reference value is shifted by 30 towards the left Manual operation See X Axis Reference Position on page 178 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue lt RVal gt This command defines the reference value for the x axis for statistical result displays For all other result displays this command is only available as a query Setting parameters lt RVal gt numeric value Reference value for the x axis Manual operation See X Axis Reference Value on page 178 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Parameters lt Value gt numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Configuring Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets t
165. Y plot only the de rotated symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 25 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 6 1 Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 3 3 Constellation diagram for QPSK modulated signal Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM CONS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 436 Constellation Rotated The complex source signal as an X Y plot As opposed to the common Constellation display the symbol decision instants including the rotated ones are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal This result type is only available for signals with a rotating modulation User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 26 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 1 ConstRot 1 Q Meas amp Ref IMG 2 Const I Q Meas amp Ref Fig 3 4 Result display Constellation Rotated vs common Constellation for 377 4 QPSK modulation Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM RCON to defi
166. ZH WSS ysungss 98 8 weed 88 08v WSS 0 0 YSNA SO 84 WS9 jsung 191002 L0g4 WSS 3NON zii 59 Found vvL Srl 084 WSO 0 0 ASWA 4 WSS as 159 jsunguon 7 ANON ZH 221001 2 8v4 085 59 0 MSND 22228 022 MSING UAS WS9 2051 WSS INSO 7 ANON ZH WSO 9227 90 0051 WSS 0 0 2 ASNA oN WS9 59 J93J Seo N ujBue ysung mm oe Budden 1425 10 Joquis puepuejs Japjo4 pue 5 Jo 3517 L L Predefined Standards and Settings s e Jo pJepueis OU SJOYIP pepi oJd si 425 x 71061 9 TET 7 3903 esindepiM 0081 vO9 adeys esind 3903 usu wv 9222 7 wened LL 3633 epmaoas 24922 WVO9I v L 091 3903 _ 4 asing 7961 WVOS MOJJEN 39d3 peg edeus 0081 WvO9 3903 usu wv 9222
167. adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 215 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on 391 Full Scale Level Mode Value The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal The full scale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or manually For manual input the following values can be selected e 0 25V e 05V e 1V e 2V If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see the R amp S FSW 1 0 Analyzer and Input User Manual Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 340 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 340 Input Output and Frontend Settings 5 5 5 3 Scaling Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling func tions are available to adapt the result display to the current data 5 Note that scaling settings window specific as opposed
168. application see chapter 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis on page 134 After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate a measurement channel for the VSA application a measure ment for the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The VSA menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions Automatic refresh of preview and visualization in dialog boxes after configura tion changes The R amp S FSW supports you in finding the correct measurement settings quickly and easily after each change in settings in dialog boxes the preview and visualization areas are updated immediately and automatically to reflect the changes Thus you can see if the setting is appropriate or not before accepting the changes Importing and Exporting Data The data to be evaluated VSA can not only be measured by the VSA application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Fur thermore the evaluated data from the VSA application can be exported for further analysis in external applications The import and export functions are available in the Save Recall menu which is dis played when you select the Save or aj Open icon in the toolbar For det
169. box is displayed 4 Define the following pattern settings Setting Description Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Modulation order Number of values each symbol can represent e g 8 for 8 PSK Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ 5 Define the format used to define the individual symbols of the pattern 6 Define the symbols of the pattern How to Perform Customized Measurements Select the symbol field you want to define If necessary add a new symbol field by selecting Add b Enter a value using the keyboard Depending on the Modulation Order lt gt the value can be in the range 0 to n 1 Select the next symbol field or insert a new one and continue to define the other symbols To scroll through the fields for long patterns use the scrollbar beneath the input area The number beneath the scrollbar at the right end indi cates the sequential number of the last symbol field the number in the center indicates the sequential number of the currently selected symbol field To remove a symbol field select it and press Remove 7 Select Save to save the pattern under the specified name The pattern is stored on the instrument as an xml file named Name xm1 under Installation directory
170. channel distortions For details on these effects see chapter 4 5 1 3 Modulation Errors on page 108 Remote command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset on page 384 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance on page 384 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop on page 383 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror on page 384 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel on page 383 Compensate for FSK If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Thus these distortions are not shown in the calculated error values e Carrier Frequency Drift e FSK Deviation Error e Symbol Rate Error For details on these effects see chapter 4 5 2 3 Modulation Errors on page 120 Remote command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift on page 383 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror on page 383 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror on page 384 Equalizer Settings The equalizer can compensate for a distorted transmission of the input signal or improve accuracy in estimating the reference signal For details see chapter 4 4 5 The Equalizer on page 103 State Equalizer Settings Activates or deactivates the equalizer to compensate for a distorted channel Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer STATe on page 381 Mode Equalizer Settings Defines the operating mode of the equalizer Normal Determines the filter values from the difference between the ideal reference signal an
171. chapter 5 6 1 Data Acquisition D The sample rate and the usable bandwidth achieved for the current settings is dis on page 180 R amp S9FSW K70 200Measurement Basics 4 1 2 Demodulation Bandwidth Measurement Bandwidth Some modulation systems do not use a receive filter In these cases special care should be taken that no interference or adjacent channels occur within the demodula tion bandwidth The Sample rate parameter should be set to a low value see ple Rate on page 182 Typical communication systems demand special receive or measurement filters e g root raised cosine receive filter or EDGE measurement filter If no such filtering is performed care should be taken that neither interfering signals nor adjacent channels fall within the demodulation bandwidth 4 1 3 Modulation and Demodulation Filters Sample points are required for demodulation in the analyzer where only information of the current symbol and none of neighbouring symbols is present symbol points These points are also called ISI free points ISI intersymbol interference If the trans mitter does not provide an ISI free signal after the transmit filter TX filter this condi tion can be fulfilled by signal specific filtering of the analyzer input signal receive filter or Rx filter If an RRC root raised cosine filter is used in the transmitter an RRC fil ter is also required in the analyzer to obtain ISI free points In ma
172. chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration on page 263 A clear 8PSK constellation is displayed Const 1 Q Meas amp Ref 1M Cirw D MagAbs MeastRef Stop 2 535 Start 26 sym Stop 174 sym Fig 9 11 Evaluation lines properly adjusted User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 272 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples In order to understand the effect of an incorrectly set evaluation range change the evaluation range to include the entire result range a Inthe Overview select Evaluation Range b Enable the Entire Result Range option The displayed constellation diagram is no longer clear it contains additional points This is due to the fact that the constellation diagram now displays symbol instants that are beyond the burst C Const I Q Meas amp Rof 1M Cir MagAbs Meas amp Ref Stop 174 sym Fig 9 12 Evaluation lines not properly adjusted small red lines in the title bar D All measurement windows that consider the evaluation range are marked with two A Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 9 3 6 Comparing the Measurement Signal to the Reference Signal You have seen that it is possible to add different traces such as maximum hold or aver age to each window When evaluating the measurement signal it is also possible to display the ideal reference signal as an additional trace This can be a significant help when troubleshooting since it allows for an immediate comparison 1 Start fro
173. described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft 1 3 1 3 1 Conventions Used in Documentation ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instru ment function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmwa
174. digital input e User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or sent to the digital output e Usable Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains unchanged by the digital decimation filter and thus remains undistorted this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW Slowl Q measurements When captured data is transferred and further processed with a slower rate than the rate with which the signal was sampled this is referred to as a Slow measurement For example assume an analog signal is sampled by an oscilloscope with a sample rate of 10 GHz This data is stored in a memory temporarily and then transferred to the R amp S FSW via the Digital I Q Interface with a sample rate of 100R amp S FSWMsps Then the input sample rate on the R amp S FSW must be set to 10 GHz so the signal is dis played correctly Digital I Q enhanced mode As of firmware version 1 80 an enhanced mode for processing data from the Digital Baseband Interface is available This enhanced mode enables data transfer via the Digital interface with a data rate of up to 200 Msps 160 MHz bandwidth compared to the previous 100 Msps 80 MHz bandwidth The Digital enhanced mode is automatically used if the following prerequisites are fulfilled e Digital Input The connec
175. displays Data SOUIGeS bras 15 Result length rh ee nre 124 BI rm M 13 Known data 190 QAMumodulatiofi o tens tt eere 86 RANGES 201 Result range eet stet 125 202 Alignment known 130 Configuration 200 Defining 249 Definitioni eni 193 Demodulation process Display 5 rrr rr reet rnc Length Offset Overlapping Reference Remote Run In out E Selecting err ree rm nee ian Result Summary Configuration ceo t te pner 51 Display points per symbol 127 2 o rti er eer a cec Formulae Formulae FSK Result type Result type Bisplay irren rre rn ere rd Transformation 5 Window configuration Result types Biterror rate BER ner ette cens 21 Capture DUET rrr mnn 16 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay 23 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude C Constellation Frequency 24 Constellation 625 Constellation Rotated 26 Eq
176. entering the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily Apart from these settings the following default settings are activated directly after a measurement channel has been set to or after a Preset Channel Table 5 1 Default settings for VSA channels Parameter Value Digital standard 3G_WCDMA Sweep mode CONTINUOUS Trigger settings FREE RUN Trigger offset 0 Modulation QPSK WCDMA mapping Transmit filter RRC a 0 22 Measurement filter Transmit filter Signal type Continuous no pattern Symbol rate 3 84 MHz Sample rate 4 Symbol rate 15 36 MHz Capture length 8000 symbols Usable Bandwidth 12 228 MHz Result length 800 symbols Configuration According to Digital Standards Parameter Value Result Range alignment Left at capture buffer start Evaluation range Entire result range Demodulation Compensation for I Q offset and amplitude droop Estimation points per symbol auto 1 Evaluations Window 1 Constellation Meas amp Ref Window 2 Result Summary Window 3 Magnitude absolute Capture buffer Window 4 Symbol table hexadecimal Display points per symbol Sample rate 4 Apart from the Preset Channel function see Preset Channel on page 139 the fol lowing functions are available to restore factory settings to the VSA application via softkeys in the MEAS menu Restore Factory
177. external application Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer 9 Measurement Examples Some sample measurements for the digital GSM and EDGE standards provide a quick introduction to typical vector analyzer measurements The individual measurements are in logical order and are meant to familiarize you gradually with the measurements required of general vector signal analysis The following equipment is required in addition to the R amp S FSW with option R amp S FSW K70 e 1 test transmitter GSM compatible for Measurement 2 preferably R amp S SMU 1141 2005 02 with the digital standard option GSM EDGE order number 1160 7609 02 e 1 ParData Adapter R amp S SMU Z5 for R amp S SMU 1160 4545 02 e 1 RF cable with 2 male connectors e 2RF cable with 2 male BNC connectors e 2 power cables Transmitter operation is only described as far as required for performing the measure ments For more details on the measurements refer to the test transmitter documenta tion 9 1 Connecting the Transmitter and Analyzer In order to perform measurements with the R amp S FSW K70 you require a test transmit ter to emulate a DUT For Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals the test transmitter needs to be GSM compatible Connect the RF output of the R amp S SMU with the RF input of the R amp S FSW Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal SSH 9 Ems 2 C ama sn ua E m
178. gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error 11 4 Digital Standards Example INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the channel with the name Spectrum2 to Spectrum3 INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt Selects the application channel type for the current channel See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 301 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt VSA VSA R amp S FSW K70 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 139 Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements Manual configuration of digital standards is described in chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 135
179. has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters Position Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See X value on page 221 CALCulate n DELTamarker AOFF This command turns all delta markers off Analysis Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 221 See Marker Type on page 222 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delt
180. information see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 122 A visualization of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visuali zation area at the bottom of the dialog box The result range settings are displayed when you select the Cut Result Ranges but ton in the Overview or the Range Settings softkey in the main menu Result Range Configuration Result Range Evaluation Range Length Result Length 148 sym 546 462 ps Result Range Alignment Reference m Capture Burst Pattern Waveform Alignment Left o Center Right Offset sym Visualization 58 0sym 26 ciuis E 201 zi M 201 TDI TEE TO IO OLLI LL a eed 202 arl E P 202 Symbol Number at Reference Start tente rn teca ance 202 Result Length Defines the number of symbols that are to be demodulated All traces over time are displayed over the result range Remote command SENSe DDEMod TIME on page 376 Reference Defines the reference for the result range alignment The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Capture the capture buffer Burst the detected burst Pattern the detected pattern Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue on 376 Demodulation Settings Alignment Defines the type of alignm
181. invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt 2007 STATe on page 416 single zoom DISPlay WINDow n Z00M MULTiple czoom STATe on 417 for each multiple zoom window Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode 6 7 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The data that was captured by the MSRA MSRT Master can be analyzed in the VSA application The analysis settings and functions available in MSRA MSRT mode are those descri bed for common Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Analysis line settings In addition an analysis line can be positioned The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA MSRT applications To hide or show and position the analysis line a dialog box is available To display the Analysis Line dialog box tap the icon in the toolbar only available in MSRA MSRT mode The current position of the analysis line is indicated on the icon PO SIO 233 233 Position Defines the position of the analysis line in the time domain The position must lie within the measurement time of the multistandard measurement Remote command CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue on page 413 CALCulate RTMS ALINe VALue on page 415 Show Line Hides or displays the analysis line in the time based windows By default the line is displayed Note even if
182. is configured internally depending on the transmit filter The goal is to produce intersymbol interference free points for the demodulation The reference filter synthesizes the ideal transmitted signal after meas filtering It is calculated by the analyzer from the above filters convolution operation Transmit filter Meas Filter Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in table 1 4 they can be set in the VSA application using Meas filter AUTO see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 211 If RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and Gaussian filters are used the Alpha RC RRC filters or BT Gaussian fil ters parameters must be set in addition to the filter characteristic roll off factor Typi cally the Alpha BT value of the measurement filter should be the same as that of the transmission filter 4 1 4 Measurement Filters The measurement filter can be used to filter the following two signals in the same way e the measurement signal after coarse frequency phase and timing synchronization have been achieved e the reference signal i e the symbols that have been determined in the demodu lator and have already been filtered with the Transmit filter For FSK the measurement filter filters the instantaneous frequency of the signal not the signal For MSK PSK QAM and User QAM the measurement filter filters the real part and imaginary part of these signals i
183. is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped It is recommended that you switch the burst search on if the signal is bursted This R amp S FSW K70 200Measurement Basics ensures that all internal estimators are operated in time ranges where the burst power ramping is up In order to eliminate amplitude variations caused by noise or the modulation itself the instantaneous power of the whole capture buffer is computed and then a moving aver age filter is applied The length of this filter is automatically determined with the help of the user settings The filtered power of the capture buffer is subsequently compared to an automatically chosen threshold and the rising and falling edges of bursts are identified With the help of the detected edges and some further processing it is possible to decide whether the burst candidates comply with the user settings All bursts must have a length between Min Burst Length Search Tolerance and Max Burst Length Search Tolerance to be accepted See Burst Settings on page 145 and chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 192 for a more detailed description of these parameters 4 gt Burst Length Min Gap Length Max Burst Length Fig 4 46 Burst Search parameters You can influence the robustness of the burst search directly by entering the correct minimum gap length minimum burst length and maximum burst length see Burst Set tings on page 145 and Min Gap L
184. lance 162 Offset 2 171 174 Offset softkey 171 174 Softkey 170 174 Unit 170 174 DEMEURE UM 170 174 Reference position EE Rc RED 178 WMeaxiSc 177 Reference sigtial norte rrr rant 107 Demodulation process 2 eic 96 Evaluating 218 Generating 96 Reference value KONIG 178 YAKS P 177 Refresh cl SE 190 Refreshing applications rennes 191 MSRA applications remote 4 5299 applications 44191 MSRT applications remote 393 SOfKOV erc da nei t he dud 191 Remote commands Basics on syntax Boolean values 295 299 297 Capitalization Character data 209 Data DIOCKS itii eee ete ene 300 298 Optional keywords 297 Parameters 298 Strings 300 ENIpI m 297 Resetting RF input protectio rris 319 Restoring Channel settings 2 errori 139 Factory Settings softkey 135 Pattern terere 135 Standard fill s ocn tret 135 137 Result display Configuration remote Troubleshooting rrr teens Result
185. listed for RMS averaging E M 1 Xs M M Xs M A 6 5 Analytically Calculated Filters The following filters are calculated during runtime of the unit and as a function of the operating parameter Alpha or BT Formulae Filter Type Setting Parameter Impulse Response Raised cosine RC Alpha a sin T cos T h r 2 Z 1 4 Root raised cosine Alpha i gt RRC oem h r 4a Gaussian filter BT 2 Gauss ETSI TS 100 959 8 3 0 M 2p r 1 pT with _ In2 2 6 6 Standard Specific Filters A 6 6 1 Transmit filter EDGE Tx filter ETSI TS 300 959 V8 1 2 Linearized GMSK 3 aby fr 0 lt 1 lt 5 087 i 0 0 else fo O lt t lt 47 Oe 0 1 4 E for 47 lt 1 687 0 50 0 g t zi 0 3 else Seah a 37 2 0 3 Formulae t 2 C t is the impulse response of the EDGE transmit filter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter EDGE Measurement filters RC filter Alpha 0 25 single side band 6 dB bandwith 90 kHz Windowing by multi plying the impulse response according to the following equation 0 lt lt 1 57 w t 10 Lsry23sr 15 lt lt 375 0 gt 3 75 The following figure shows the frequency response of the standard specific measure ment filters EDGE HSR Narro
186. lt gt lt gt 5 5 enne 432 FORMaEDEXPortDGSEPaLaltor ortae copie exeo err asd 433 FORMSEDEXPoPEHEADOT tien oor ene e tate tte pet ive sett an a nr 433 FORMatDEXPOICMOBE i EYE e ed Van dU os avo vesci vv 433 MMEMbGIRESTORSSDPEETRAGDR ene RF ERR EE SNR RR 433 I SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURSIISTATRI iaiieea ri Lecce eet etre oth re ee rcd ppc eder 434 tI BRUN 434 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X ABSolute This command queries the absolute x value of the selected delta marker in the speci fied window The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary th
187. lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe on page 408 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines Set to Default Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks Remote command CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy DEFault on 408 Current Mean Peak Defines and activates the limits for the currently measured value the mean and the peak value on separate tabs Note that the limits for the current and peak values are always the same Limit Value Current Mean Peak Define the limit with which the currently measured mean or peak value is to be com pared A different limit value can be defined for each result type Depending on the modulation type different result types are available Result type Remote command PSK MSK QAM EVM RMS CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue on page 410 EVM Peak CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue on page 410 Phase Err Rms CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue on page 412 Phase Err Peak CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue on page 411 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 411 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 411 Carr Freq Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 410 Rho CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue on page 412 IQ Offset C
188. of the burst search the determined result range might start up to 2 symbols before or after the actual burst However an offset of only one symbol has the effect that none of the predefined symbol sequences in the Known Data file will be found To avoid this try one of the following Align the result range to a pattern instead of the burst Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again e Continuous signals For continuous signals without a pattern the result range is aligned randomly Thus a very large number of possible sequences must be predefined Use precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incor rect again 4 10 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode The R amp S FSW VSA application can also be used to analyze data MSRA and MSRT operating mode The main difference between the two modes is that in MSRA mode an I Q analyzer performs data acquisition while in MSRT mode a realtime measure ment is performed to capture data In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRA MSRT applications receive an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the application data For the R amp S FSW VSA application in MSRA MSRT operatin
189. of the transmit filter file Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 144 See Load User Filter on page 144 SENSe DDEMod USER NAME lt Name gt Selects the file that contains the user defined modulation to be loaded Setting parameters lt Name gt string Path and file name of the vam file Example SENS DDEM FORM UQAM Define the use of a user defined modulation SENS DDEM USER NAME D MyModulation vam Select the file name to be loaded Manual operation See Load User Modulation on page 142 Signal Structure The signal structure commands describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for configuration You can define a pattern to which the instrument can be synchronized thus adapting the result range 5 316 iiia uoo titres 316 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt SKIP FALLing essere 316 5 316 SENSeJDDEMod SEARGh entia rennen ceat ot 317 SENSe IDBEMod SIGNaEBAT Terbi 2 12 20 a core Lieu Ea 317 Configuring SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue center
190. quency Frequency Shift Keying FSK ISI Inter symbol Interference ISI free demodulation Demodulation structure in which the signal is no longer influenced by adjacent symbols at the deci sion instants after signal adapted filtering System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MEAS filter Measurement Filter Weighting filter for the measure ment System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MSK Minimum Shift Keying Modulation mode Minimum Shift Keying MSK NDA Demodulator Non Data Aided Demodulator Demodulation without any knowl edge of the sent data contents Demodulation and Algorithms PSK Phase Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information lies within the phase or within the phase transitions Phase Shift Keying PSK QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted both in the amplitude and phase Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings Abbreviation Meaning See section RMS Root Mean Square Averaging RMS Quantities RX filter Receive Filter System Theoretical Modulation Baseband filter in analyzer used and Demodulation Filters for signal adapted filtering Transmit filter Transmitter Filter System Theoretical Modulation Digital impulse shaping filter in and Demodulation Filters signal processing unit of tra
191. reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the Analyzer for instance Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 322 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference Sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 155 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values of about 10 dB i e default set ting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 323 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Input Output and Frontend Settings The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select t
192. remote c5 ied nb ei bte eene 363 S OfIKGy irasceris aaa n cess 185 Eye diagram Frequency result type Imag Q result type Real 1 resulttype irte tenes F Factory settings oci error faeere ET NERENS 135 File format l O data ici fec 499 File name SONOS em 136 Files data binary 22 503 parameter XML eese 500 Filter bandwidth BT Measurement filter 212 pee 144 Filters De Modulation Customized Customized creating Customized selecting Ron mr High pass remote m High pass RF Input cc tror de traen Measurement eco Code Measurement formulae 493 Predefined oi 479 59 Reference 09 Signal PROCESSING 57 Standard specific formulae 492 59 479 Transmit formulae 492 Typcial combinations 481 YIG remote 920 eie EET 62 Fine opc ture espera teur Cep eoe 209 Folders Digital Stahidards s s c oerte ee rene tio depen 136 Formulae Analytically calculated filters
193. search It should not be used to explicitly exclude certain bursts from the measurement For example setting the minimum gap length to 100 symbols does not ensure that the burst search does not find bursts that have a very small gap Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt GLENgth MINimum on page 368 Pattern Search The Pattern Search settings define when a pattern is detected in the evaluated sig nal A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Burst and Pattern Configuration The Pattern Search settings are displayed when you select the Burst Pattern button in the Overview or the Burst Pattern Search softkey in the main VSA menu and then Switch to the Pattern Search tab 120 dBmi Start 0 sym Enabling po ox e b gt eR de 194 Correlation enne ennemis 194 Meas only if Pattern Symbols COmech ba iet e i bs 195 Selected Patio rte Cote de dee ddr neis 195 Patten FOUNO cr 195 Enabling Pattern Searches Enables or disables pattern searches If Auto is selected pattern search is enabled only if the signal structure defines a pattern in the signal in the Signal Structure tab of the Mo
194. select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process data such as the Analyzer or optional applications Note that the data in the entire capture buffer is exported For the maximum of 200 000 000 samples you require several Gigabytes of free space on your storage device 7 2 How to Export and Import Data Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 451 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMent on page 450 How to Export and Import Data data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the Analyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the Save icon
195. settings overview and press ENTER Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal C Select Custom Digital Mod 552 Custom Digital State Power Ramp Control Off Cosine 1 005 Trigger Marker Auto gt Clock Internal Fig 9 2 R amp S SMU Custom Digital Modulation Dialog d Under Modulation Type select PSK gt QPSK 5 In the Custom Digital Modulation dialog box a Enter the Symbol Rate 1 MHz b Select the Filter Root Cosine c Enter the Roll Off Factor 0 35 d Toggle the State to On at the top of the dialog box to switch modulation on 6 Press the RF ON OFF key to switch the RF transmission on Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal 9 2 2 Analyzer Settings This section helps you get your first valid measurement It starts with step by step instructions and continues with a more detailed description of further functionality Frequency 1GHz Ref Level 4 dBm Modulation QPSK Symbol Rate 1 MHz Tx Filter Root Raised Cosine with Alpha BT 0 35 To define the settings on the R amp S FSW 1 2 3 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz Press the AMPT key and enter 4 dBm as the reference level This corresponds approximately to the peak envelope power of the signal Start the VSA application by pressing the MODE key and then selecting VSA Select the Overview softke
196. tette tenent teni 317 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe esses eene 318 8 5 5 318 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MAXimum lt gt This command defines the maximum length of a burst Only those bursts will be nized that fall below this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MaxLength gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1600 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Min Length Max Length on page 146 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MINimum lt UsefulLength gt This command defines the minimum length of a burst Only those bursts will be recog nized that exceed this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt UsefulLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 15000 RST 98 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Min Length Max Length on page 146 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP FALLing lt RunOut gt This command defines the length of the falling burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt RunOut gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Run Out on page 146 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP RISing lt
197. the key and enter 4 dBm as the reference level This corresponds approximately to the peak envelope power of the signal Start the VSA application by pressing the MODE key and then selecting VSA Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA Press the MEAS key then select the Digital Standards softkey From the file selection list select the GSM folder and then the file EDGE 8PSK Select Load Predefined settings corresponding to the selected standard are loaded The VSA application should show good measurement results Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Std EDGE_8PSK SR 270 833 kHz m elAtt 20 4 dB Freq 1 0GHz Cap Len 1500 BURST PATTERN 1 Result Summary Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym C 1 Clrw D Symbol Table Start 0 sym Fig 9 7 Default display configuration for GSM 8PSK EDGE In window 3 you see the currently evaluated burst marked with a green bar To include more bursts in the display you need to increase the capture length a Press the MEAS CONFIG key and then the Overview softkey b Select Signal Capture C Increase the Capture Length e g to 10000 symbols In the preview area of the dialog box you see that more bursts are now contained in the capture buffer They are all marked with a green bar meaning that they are all evaluated User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 269
198. the Estimation range see also chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 107 Table 3 3 Results calculated over the estimation range PSK MSK QAM FSK Carrier Frequency Error Symbol Rate Error FSK Deviation Error Symbol Rate Error Offset FSK Measurement Deviation Imbalance Carrier Frequency Error Gain Imbalance Carrier Frequency Drift Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Current value In the Current column the value evaluation for the current evaluation is displayed For example the EVM Peak value in the current sweep corresponds to the peak of the trace values within the evaluation range for the current sweep as indicated by marker 1 in figure 3 20 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Result Summary Current StdDev 950 0 Unit S EVM RMS 0 32 0 32 0 3 5 00 9j Peak 0 84 0 84 0 8 0 00 RMS 49 87 49 87 49 8 5 00 41 54 1 0 00 Phase Error RMS 0 15 y 9 1 0 00 Peak 0 48 8 0 48 0 00 Magnitude Error RMS 0 18 18 0 1 9 00 Peak 0 53 0 53 2 2 00 Carrier Frequency Error 178 54 178 54 8 54 0 00 Symbol Rate Error 0 00 Rho 0 999 990 05 0 Os 90 0 000 000 1 0 Offset 66 07 2 0 170 Tmbalance 65 51 1 5 00 Imbalance 0 01 0 0 0 01 9 00 Quadrature Error 0 01 0 0 0 01 2 0 Amplitude Droop 0 000 000 0 000 000 0 000 000 2 000 000 Power 24 21 24 24 21 6 00 1EVM 349 sym 451 sym Fig 3 20 Example for res
199. the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Remote command CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW on page 413 CALCulate RTMS ALINe SHOW page 414 1 Import Export Functions Q Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase 1 and the quadrature channel Such signals are referred to as signals I Q signals are useful because the specific RF or IF frequencies are not needed The complete modulation information and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be ana lyzed in the baseband Importing and exporting signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving I Q signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture data using the Analyzer application if available and then perform a measurement on that data later using the R amp S FSW VSA application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values data is stor
200. the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range 0 sto 10 05 RST 0s Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep data cap turing Parameters Offset The allowed range is 0 s to 30 s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Configuring Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 187 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range dB to 50 dB RST 3
201. to 10 MHz proportional up to maximum 10 MHz 10 MHz to 10 GHz 10 MHz R amp S FSW with options B28 or U28 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 28 MHz Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 35 MHz proportional up to maximum 28 MHz 35 MHz to 10 GHz 28 MHz R amp S FSW with option B40 or 040 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 40 MHz Sample rate Maximum I Q bandwidth 100 Hz to 50 MHz proportional up to maximum 40 MHz 50 MHz to 10 GHz 40 MHz R amp S FSW with option B80 or U80 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 80 MHz Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz to 100 MHz proportional up to maximum 80 MHz 100 MHz to 10 GHz 80 MHz R amp S FSW with activated option B160 or U160 I Q Bandwidth Extension sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 160 MHz db Option B40 U40 ves 11 Bw extension options Output sample 10000 MHz Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz to 200 MHz proportional up to maximum 160 MHz 200 MHz to 10 GHz 160 MHz Usable bandwidth bandwidths for RF input 160 MHz Activated option Vi B160 0160 T T
202. to the amplitude settings The scaling settings are displayed when you select the AMPT key and then the Scale Config softkey Amplitude Scale Unit YScale XScale Automatic grid scaling Automatic grid scaling Adjust Settings Scaling according to min and max values Automatic grid scaling All Axes Default Settings Scaling according to reference and per div Scaling according to reference and per div Ref Value Ref Value 10 0 dBm Ref Position Ref Position Per Division Per Division 10 0 dB For details on the different methods to configure the scaling see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 252 A visualization of the diagram scaling with the current settings is displayed at the right side of the dialog box Auto Scale Once Auto Scale 177 Defining Mibi and Max tr c titre ee 177 Configuring a Reference Point and 177 L Y Axis Reference 0 08 R 177 L Y Axis Reference Position ccccccsssssssssssesesssescsesssescsessssetersnesessseseeeaes 177 L Range PNA 177 RARIS SCAMMG 178 E dE cocido odds i diro TR 178 ua m o NINE 178 E eI rne NIE TE IR RR 178
203. 0 Fig 3 19 Result display Real Imag Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM RIMag to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 3 2 29 Result Summary The Modulation Accuracy results in a table For details on the parameters see chap ter 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA on page 55 Basis of evaluation The majority of the values that are displayed in the Result Summary are calculated over the Evaluation Range see chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 212 They are evaluated according to the setting of the Display Points Sym parameter For example if Display Points Symbol is 1 only the symbol instants contribute to the result displayed in the result summary Table 3 2 Results calculated over the evaluation range PSK MSK QAM FSK EVM Frequency Error MER Magnitude Error Phase Error Power User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 48 Result Types in PSK MSK QAM Magnitude Error FSK Rho Power The following results that are based on internal estimation algorithms see chapter 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 106 are calculated over
204. 0 45 180 45 4 3 5 Table 4 9 7 4 DQPSK Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 180 45 90 45 90 45 0 45 Table 4 10 4 DQPSK Natural Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 180 45 90 45 Table 4 11 74 DQPSK APCO25 and APCO25Phase2 Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 Offset QPSK Offset QPSK differs from normal QPSK in the fact that the Q component is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain Hence the symbol time instants of the and the Q component do not coincide The concept of Offset QPSK is illustrated in the diagrams below R amp S FSW K70 200Measurement Basics p e r enr Derivation of OQPSK Table 4 12 diagram and constellation diagram QPSK OQPSK delayed Q component Inphase Quadratu re Quadratur e 4 66 symbols symbols PSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 OQPSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 2 a Af 2 Quadratu
205. 0 1 Message Result Ranges R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Message Burst Not Found The Burst Not Found error message can have several causes Burst search is active but the signal is not bursted Start 0 sym 18 03 2016 09 53 45 Fig 10 1 Example for active burst search with continuous signal Solution Select Continuous Signal as the signal type For more information see Signal Type on 145 Signal is bursted but bursts have not been captured completely The burst search can only find bursts that start and end within the capture buffer It ignores bursts that are cut off Mag CapBuf mr 20 dBm4 40 dBm 60 dBm T 80 120 dar Start 0 sym Fig 10 2 Example for incomplete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 180 The current measurement is being performed on a burst that has not been captured completely E User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 278 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Stop 3000 sym EXT 01 04 2010 EC Start 0 sym Fig 10 4 Example for measurement on complete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings or increase the result len
206. 0 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum APEAK eeessssssssssssseseenee nein nnnn enn Ee nennen rennen nnne 402 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEF T 2 12 certet eben ed edo ador CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT sse CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumy PEAK esses 403 CALCu latesn gt DELTamarkersm gt MINIMUM 403 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MINIMUM NEXT 2 12 2 aaia operan 403 lt gt lt gt 404 lt gt lt gt 404 CALCulatesn gt DEL cetero tote ie e eicere et eat 401 CAL lt gt lt gt erret te b epe este vanes epu er gp ea eco 401 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X ABSOlute ais esee inii teta na sip nS EROR dba DR da 431 CALGulatesn DELTamarkerem X RELaltive eiii tere cerne 431 GALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe tno re rt ren ther rn reet terne 401 GALbGulatesn DELTarmirkersq Y
207. 0 U160 320 MHz 8320 U28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B28 U40 U80 U160 U320 or B40 U80 U160 U320 or B80 U160 U320 or B160 U320 500 MHz B500 See data sheet The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B320 U320 requires a reference board revision 3 14 or higher The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 requires a reference board 1312 8075 06 revision 4 06 or higher and a motherboard 1313 4180 02 or 1313 7698 02 As a rule the usable bandwidth is proportional to the output sample rate Yet when the bandwidth reaches the bandwidth of the analog IF filter at very high output sample rates the curve breaks Relationship between sample rate and usable bandwidth Up to the maximum bandwidth the following rule applies Usable bandwidth 0 8 Output sample rate Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth MSRA operating mode In MSRA operating mode the MSRA Master is restricted to a sample rate of 600 MHz Digital Baseband output If Digital Baseband output is active see Digital Baseband Output on page 167 the sample rate is restricted to 200 MHz max 160 MHz usable bandwidth The figure 4 6 shows the maximum usable bandwidths depending on the output sample rates R amp S FSW without additional bandwidth extension options sample rate 100 Hz 10 GHz maximum bandwidth 10 MHz Table 4 2 Maximum bandwidth Sample rate Maximum bandwidth 100 Hz
208. 00000000000003 Y axis range per division Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 96 Y axis reference position Header section for individual trace Trace 1 Meas First trace Result type Meas Signal Meas Data source measurement or reference data Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 800 Number of measurement points Data section for individual trace 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 ern Measured values x value lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 2 gt is only available with detector AUTOPEAK and contains the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Header section for individual trace Trace 2 Meas Next in same window Result type Meas Signal Meas Data source measurement or reference data Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type Known Data File Syntax Description File contents ResultMode Trace Description Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 800 Number of measurement points Data section for individual trace Header section f
209. 1 AverageEVM Save the EVM values window 5 to an ascii file Results 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard The following example describes a scenario similar to the one for manual operation described in chapter 9 3 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals on page 266chapter 9 2 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal on page 258 Programming Examples Note that although this example uses the settings from a predefined digital standard the configuration is changed to demonstrate the possibilities of the VSA application A measurement that is performed strictly according to the standard requires much less programming efforts The rising and falling edges of a GSM burst are analyzed using the following result range settings Result Range Evaluation Range Length 200 sym 738 462 us Reference Pattern Waveform Alignment 4 gt Right Offset Symbol Number at Burst Start 10 sym Visualization RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM VSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named VSA DDEM PRES EDGE NB Loads the GSM EDGE 8PSK standard file and the settings defined there Programming Examples DDEM RLEN 10000 sym a a Definin
210. 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt 5 gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE Mode Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 165 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters Mode RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle Manual operation See Microbutton Action on page 165 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Configuring VSA Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Name gt Name string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect page 320 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseban
211. 1 1 717 177 717 117 111 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 Data Data 77 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 A 6 A 6 1 Formulae 241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 67 Data lt RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE Formulae e Tae based Evaluatio e uccide ec p d eH 485 e Result Summary 02 44 01000 enne tnn nes 487 e Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary sss 490 e Tace ex REM 491 Analytically Calculated Filters mnm 491 Standard Speciie FIEeIS oie e ree TR n s 492 Trace based Evaluations The trace based evaluations all take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Tp equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter Test parameter Formula Error vector EV MEAS t REF t Error Vector Magnitude EVM EV t EVM t ive 4 with the normalization contant C depends on your setting By default C is the mean power of the reference signal C T
212. 1 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 11 12 11 13 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 Common Suffixes tse 300 Activating Vector Signal 1 1 11 nnne nennen 300 Digital Standards iiit tetris uina eee 304 Configuring S 306 Performing a Measurement innen tienen cei cun ne uiae aane iiu 391 Analysis canon 396 Configuring the Result nennen nnn 417 Retrieving Results iieri ria socio Aani 430 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and 450 Status Reporting System 451 Commands for nnns 462 Programming 463 P pl t C D 471 D 471 Predefined Standards and Settings eee 472 Predefined Meas
213. 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Trace settings can be configured via the TRACE key in the Traces dialog box or in the vertical Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see chapter 6 2 Trace Export Settings on page 219 R amp S FSW K70 Analysis Mode Evaluation Clear Write View Blank Quick Config Set Trace Mode Set Trace Mode 275741 l Const I Q Meas amp Ref Trace 1 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 5 Trace 6 217 Tace eI 217 IU iUo MM UM 218 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config nane 218 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Ttace 4 Softkeys sees aa 218 Trace 1 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted orange For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only one trace is available Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 398 Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt t gt commands Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces The available trace modes depend on the selected result display Not all evaluations support all trace modes For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only the trace modes Clear Write and View are available
214. 1173 9292 02 10 284 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement EEE EEE ee see chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 107 Solution e lf the signal contains a pattern set Coarse Synchronization Pattern see Coarse Synchronization on page 209 Example measurement of a GSM EDGE pattern that has a length of 26 symbols Mag CapBuf eiciw D Const I Q Meas amp Ref 20 dBm 40 deBry 60 dBm Stop 200 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 1 08 21 13 e 1M Clrw 20 dBm 40 dEry 60 dBm Start 0 sym Stop 200 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 16 03 2010 CLLLLLLLD Gag 08 21 35 Fig 10 11 User Pattern for Sync On e Choose a longer Result Range e lf the signal is bursted and the bursts are short sure your Result Range comprises the entire burst sure that Run In Out is not chosen too large since the Run In Out ranges are excluded from the synchronization e signal is bursted and contains a pattern Only switch off the burst search if absolutely necessary If you need to switch it off align your Result Range to the pattern make sure it does not exceed the burst ramps and choose Continuous Signal as the Signal Type in the Signal Descrip tion dialog For more information see e chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process on page 94 Message Sync Prefers Longer Pat
215. 2 5 reete np gs ene ted INI Tiate SEQuencer MODE ierit edo i ee ctt iiic aita dades INITiate SEQuencer REFRESHEALL rat err rox tnb he re tree rrr ter eats INI Tiate IMMedlate crt er ee kn tete tere rbi EET M auo NE YO IUE o HAUT OE INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet INPUT COU PII n E INPut DIQ RANGe COUPlitig rtv aere e uvae INPut DIOQ RANGe L innuni Tace atii Do duces detineri mr ner INPut DIQ RANGGEUPPer EAUTO tete crit re orca ret cid o ee ee Ee store EET e UNIT 5 on Fora br e 337 INPut DIQ SRATe INPUt DIO SRATG AUTO 252 e E MERE ERG KU CN v ve V Ed e e EAR INPut FILTer HPASs STATe INPUTFIL Tern YIGESTATe eye tee ve rere m EE niin ree RE aise Pr rere
216. 204 uiuo oai cnt tarea cresta 108 inse 377 Connectors 166 Constellation Frequency result type 2 24 Constellation Result type 55 5 rre rre ree mcer en 25 Rotated Result type nmn 26 Constellation points Symbol mapping nnt trenes 73 Continue single sweep 190 Continuo s Sigrial 145 Continuous sweep em ere cel 189 Conventions SCP commands certes 296 Conversion loss External Mixer B21 remote control 326 327 Conversion loss tables nnt Available remote control E remote control ivi cree Bias remote anta te Configuring B21 iiem nnt Deleting remote control External Mixer B21 remote control External 821 tros Harmonic order remote control Importing External Mixer B21 ss Mixer type remote control Saving External Mixer B21 Selecting remote control Shifting values External Mixer B21 160 Values External Mixer 21 160 Copying Measurement channel remote 301 Couple Scr
217. 22 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC on page 366 Refresh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA or MSRT applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate REFResh on page 393 Burst and Pattern Configuration Information on known patterns and bursts in the captured signal improve the accuracy of the determined ideal reference signal and calculation of the signal parameters becomes quicker For details on burst and patterns see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Proc ess on page 94 R amp S FSW K70 5 7 1 Configuration Burst Search The Burst Search settings define when a burst is detected in the evaluated signal A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The blue lines below the trace indicate the detec ted bursts The preview area is not editable directly The Burst Search settings are displayed when
218. 346 GENTSRSTEP ar 347 SENSe FREQUuency CENTer STEP AUTO i ecoute teh Rn EORR S Re 347 347 SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Configuring Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 164 See Center frequency on page 168 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 346 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax IS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT S
219. 479 WY 144 144 Using as measurement filter 211 Trigger Configuration Softkey 183 DrOD OUEETIG rre rere ec Ea epe revu 188 External remote sese 364 FONG o ERE EE 188 Hysteresis PERS 188 Level Offset softkey Remote COND reet rrr 360 188 364 Trigger level External trigger remote 363 Power remote a 363 IF Power remote s BOD Trigger SOURCE eec rrt hr rrt crees 185 BB Power Digital External Free Run Power IF Power Triggers MSRAIMSRYT recorte rr en 184 360 Troubleshooting B rst Seat ohis sene E ente ad 277 FOW scat ets mello Frequently asked questions 286 Input overload 555919 Pattern Seatlcli auo 277 Isesult display nre reet 286 TERI COS nere is tete i e 286 U Units Reference level 170 174 X axis X axis y axis NAMI ee MR EE Updating Isesult display 191 Result display remote 393
220. 50 200 Time Symbols Fig 4 60 Effect of amplitude droop Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Gain Distortion Table 4 18 Effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions Nonlinear distortions amplitude distortion transmit ter Amplitude distortion analyzer Gain Distortion Transmitter 0 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Real Gain Distortion Analyzer 0 01 02 03 04 Rew 05 06 07 08 The effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions on a 64QAM signal are illustrated in table 4 18 only the first quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is minimized The second column shows the signal after scaling Table 4 19 Amplitude transfer functions Amplitude transfer function transmitter Amplitude transfer function analyzer function Ters mte 1 Output input P ower 009 Pamer lag Iraneter Function Aretyzer b Output Power Input P ower log amp 48 A 1 3436 U 2 3 83 4 4 4 9 heut Power log A logarithmic display of the amplitude transfer functions is shown in table 4 19 The analyzer trace is shifted against the transmitter trace by this scale factor Signal Model E
221. 7 Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel Activating Vector Signal Analysis Application GSM R amp S FSW K10 lt ChannelType gt Parameter GSM Default Channel GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 TD SCDMA UE 2000 BTS R amp S FSW K82 CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE Realtime Spectrum R amp S FSW K160R Realtime Spectrum Note the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2
222. ALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue on page 411 FSK modulation only Freq Err Rms CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue on page 410 Freq Err Peak CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 410 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 411 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 411 6 5 6 5 1 Display and Window Configuration Result type Remote command FSK Dev Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 410 Carr Freq Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 410 Check Current Mean Peak Considers the defined limit value in the limit check if checking is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe on page 409 Display and Window Configuration The captured data can be evaluated using various different methods without having to start a new measurement As opposed to the R amp S FSW Spectrum application or other applications in con figuring the result display requires two steps 1 Display Configuration In the first step you select the data source for the evalua tion and the window placement in the SmartGrid The SmartGrid mode is activated automatically when you select the Display Con fi
223. BURSt TOLerance lt SearchTolerance gt This command controls burst search tolerance Setting parameters lt SearchTolerance gt numeric value Range 0 to 100000 RST 4 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Search Tolerance on page 193 Pattern Searches The pattern search commands define when a pattern is detected in the analyzed sig nal 369 SENSe DDEMod SEARGCKS YNG AUTO tene test iecit desee 370 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold cessere 370 SENSeDDEMad SEARch S o depart Dh 370 SENSe 1DDEMed SEARG S NC aant ur t ceo eta rtl a ie ce arte 371 YINO S TAT Oriri tore eee 371 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold to its default value Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Configuring Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on 194 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO lt AutoPattSearch gt This command links the pattern search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as patterned pattern search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt Au
224. Curacy PERRor PCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy PERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy PERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt RESUIt This command queries whether the limit for the specified result type and limit type was violated For details on result types and limit types see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 Suffix lt ResultType gt CFERror EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor OOFFset PERRor RHO CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only FERRor Frequency error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset Q Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho lt LimitType gt CURRent MEAN PEAK PCURRent PMEan PPEak RCURRent RMEan RPEak For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 449
225. DDEMod STATistic 2 446 lt gt lt gt 447 lt gt lt gt 447 lt gt lt gt 448 CALCulate lt n gt BERate Format Queries the Bit Error Rate results The available results are described in chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 Query parameters Format Specifies a particular BER result to be queried If no parameter is specified the current bit error rate is returned The parameters for these results are listed in table 11 4 Table 11 4 Parameters for BER result values Result Current Min Max Acc Bit Error Rate CURRent MIN MAX TOTal Total of Errors TECurrent TEMIN TEMAX TETotal Total of Bits TCURrent TMIN TMAX TTOTal CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADRoop type This command queries the results of the amplitude droop error measurement per formed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 Retrievi
226. Define the Result Range You can define which part of the source signal is analyzed Result Range with refer ence to the captured data a detected burst or a detected pattern For details on the functions see chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 200 1 In the Overview select Range Settings 2 Select the Result Range tab 3 Define the Result Length i e the number of symbols from the result that are to be analyzed Note that when you use Known Data files as a reference the Result Length specified here must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element See chapter 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions on page 129 4 Define the Reference for the result range i e the source to which the result will be aligned The reference can be the captured data a detected burst or a detected pattern How to Analyze the Measured Data 5 Define the Alignment of the result range to the reference source i e whether the result starts at the beginning of the reference source ends with the reference source or is centered with the reference source 6 Optionally define an offset of the result range to the reference source e g to ignore the first few symbols of the captured data 7 Optionally define the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the ref erence source to change the scaling of the x axis This offset is add
227. Defines the burst as the reference for the screen display CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG CENT Position the burst at the center of the screen DISP TRAC X STOP Queries the stop value of the x axis Usage Query only Retrieving Results FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 220 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt Header gt This command defines if a file header including start frequency sweep time detector etc is created or not A small header with the instrument model the version and the date is always transferred Setting parameters lt Header gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Header on page 220 FORMat DEXPort MODE lt Mode gt This command defines which data are transferred raw data or trace data Setting parameters Mode RAW TRACe RST TRACe Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard o
228. Definition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude PTRansition BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 461 11 12 Commands for Compatibility STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Commands for Compatibility The following commands are maintained for compatibility reasons with previous R amp S analyzers only Use the specified alternative commands for new remote control pro grams CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation COMPensation eee 462 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue eese enne nennen nnns 462 I SENSe DDEMOGd SBANdg atre tout rete exerc de cete Rete den eee 463 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation COMPensation lt RefDevComp gt
229. Display 230 OVERSEA PNG M 230 Signal Source Data source as selected in the Display Configuration see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 If you change the signal source setting here the default result type for the new data source is activated for the current window Remote command LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 Result Type The result type defines the evaluation method used in the current window The available result types in VSA are described in chapter 3 2 Result Types in VSA on page 19 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 Result Type Transformation For certain result types it is not only possible to see the common over time represen tation of the measurement but also the spectrum or the statistics in form of a histo gram These are the transformations of the results These settings are not available for symbol evaluation i e the following signal sources e Symbols e Modulation Accuracy Normal Evaluation in time domain X axis displays time values Spectrum Evaluation in frequency domain X axis displays frequency values The usable bandwidth is indica ted in the display Display and Window Configuration Statistics Statistical evaluation histogram X axis displays former y values Y axis displays statistical informa tion e Trace 1 the probability of occurrence
230. ERAT 53 54 Bit Error Rate A bit error rate BER measurement compares the transmitted bits with the determined symbol decision bits BER error bits number of analyzed bits As a prerequisite for this measurement the VSA application must know which bit sequences are correct i e which bit sequences may occur This knowledge must be provided as a list of possible data sequences in xml format which is loaded in the VSA application see chapter 4 9 Known Data Files Dependencies and Restrictions on page 129 Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge See To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences on page 248 If such a file is loaded in the application the BER result display is available Available for source types e Modulation Accuracy R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays Note that this measurement may take some time as each symbol decision must be compared to the possible data sequences one by one The BER measurement is an indicator for the quality of the demodulated signal High BER values indicate problems such as e inadequate demodulation settings e poor quality in the source data e false or missing sequences in the Known Data file e result range alignment l
231. EXECute on page 304 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes Enable the Specifics for option The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window The indicated data flow is updated for the selected data source If the Specifics for option is not enabled the overview displays the default data flow and the general settings independently of the selected window Note The Display Config button is only available in the general overview not in the window specific overview Signal Description Digital Standards Opens file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement settings for conven tional mobile radio standards See chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 135 5 4 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes burst and pattern detection and allows for the application to calculate an ideal ref erence signal The signal description consists of information on the used modulation and on the signal s structure 5
232. Element gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element RS IQ TAR File Format Description The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Samples Contains the number of samples of the data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e complex number represented as a pair of and values complex number represented as pair of magnitude and phase values e Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the data A signal gen erator typically outputs the data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the data binary file see
233. Estimation and Modulation Errors 4 5 1 3 Modulation Errors Error vector EV Q Fig 4 54 Modulation error error vector The error vector is the difference between the measurement signal vector Meas vec tor and the reference signal vector Ref vector Error Vector Magnitude EVM Fig 4 55 Modulation error EVM magnitude error phase error The magnitude of the error vector in the diagram is specified as the error vector magni tude EVM It is commonly normalized to the mean reference power The EVM should not be confused with the magnitude error see below Magnitude Error The magnitude error is defined as the difference between the measurement vector magnitude and the reference vector magnitude see figure 4 55 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Phase Error Q Fig 4 56 Modulation error Phase error error vector phase The phase error is the phase difference between the measurement vector and the ref erence vector PHASE _ ERR t PHASE yras PHASE pep tr This measurement parameter is of great importance for MSK modulation measure ments The phase error should not be confused with the error vector phase The error vector phase is the absolute phase of the error vector see figure 4 56 The effects of the different modulation errors in the transmitter on the result display of the analyzer are described in the next topics All
234. FILTWIZ is offered to convert user defined filters This pro gram generates filter files vaf which can be transferred to the analyzer with a USB device for example The program can be downloaded together with a detailed descrip tion as a precompiled MATLABO file MATLAB pcode on the Internet at http www rohde schwarz com search term FILTWIZ Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Rohde amp Schwarz Filter Wizard ersion 1 5 xi File operations File name MyFilter vaf Load Save Save as Exit Description File info Juser specitic fitter 0 035 RRC alpha 0 22 L 10 ISI_LSNR 16 5 dB 0 03 0 025 0 02 0 015 hi 0 01 0 005 tin ya Sai Fig 4 4 FILTWIZ filter tool for VSA It is possible to load customized transmit filters and customized measurement filters If a customized transmit filter is selected the internal receive filter coefficients are calcu lated automatically on the fly Note that this is different to the R amp S FSQ K70 where it is necessary to also transfer a user receive filter If you upload a customized transmit filter and leave the measurement filter set to auto matic the internally calculated receive filter will be used as measurement filter Note that this filter is not necessarily suitable for your specific signal The filter is optimized such that the intersymbol interference is low Hence you will probably be able to see a clear eye di
235. G ERR MAG ger 0 with tzn and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 1 Mag Error 1 Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 15 Result display Magnitude Error Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 Phase Error Displays the phase error of the measuremente signal with respect to the reference sig nal as a function of symbols over time PHASE PHASE yras t PHASE pee t with and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 ee User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 44 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 26 1 Phase Error Clrw Fig 3 16 Result display Phase Error Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM PHAS to define the result ty
236. GH 2 See Harmonic Order on page 153 Configuring VSA SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Harmonic Type on page 153 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt gt 2 10 61 USER band for other bands see band definition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 153 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 154 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Configuring Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 154 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This comma
237. IF SBANd on page 346 IF Out Frequency If the IF 2 GHZ OUT output is activated the measured IF value is provided at a fixed frequency of 2 GHz Digital Output Settings The optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 allows you to output I Q data from any R amp S FSW application that processes data to an external device The figuration settings for digital output can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dialog box Digital output is not available if the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is active R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Output Meas Time 31 281 SRate 2 Mo Output Digital IQ Digital Baseband Output Output Settings Max Sample Rate 100 MHz Sample Rate 32 MHz Full Scale Level 0 dBm Instrument Device Name SMBV100A Serial Number 257374 Port Name Dig BB In For details on digital output see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual Digital Baseband eere nn E Fes Y C PRXSE R2 167 Output Set ngsT0TOF is gl xo eo AR KRRKRE FRA ER 167 Connected Instr rmernt u uiui eicere rre Rr rm etn honra nna n ERR VERA RR pe eA 168 Digital Baseband Output Enables or disables a digital output stream to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if available Note If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted t
238. ISI free system 60 K Keys BW not 133 MESES A T Urs ee irre 224 FUNCT not used 133 Peak 56 224 Pr 189 RUN SINGLE 189 190 SPAN not sed uctor 133 Knowmdata ean ate S Creating files Dependencies restrictions 129 Irem Ee 148 File Synta RH 483 FES 247 Fine synchronization 209 210 E 148 Recording tool Em 248 Symbol d cislOriS eco cin riora treo rto tire ETna Re paene 100 WORKIN ONIL riasan oett ta rte cepi Fort trend 247 L Limit lines Current mean peak values 227 Default Enabling rrt n Ree ex TE 226 rr rete eene 225 PeakSearcli uon eret 224 227 Vales Checking 2 3 2 oed Eee 228 Limits GOMMQUIIING 254 Defining remote 408 Modulation Accuracy 254 Retrieving check results remote 448 Linear average nig 491 Lines Limit checking nnn tnr 225 LO Level External Mixer B21 remote control 322 Level External Mixer
239. IT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured FIagBs v esten tt 396 e Working with Markers cerni nn EY EF ese ed 399 e Configuring Modulation Accuracy Limit 407 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode 412 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line mode only 414 e ZOOMING into the DISplay ete oret pne eoo nan ERE n eS ree RR an 415 Configuring Traces The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed on the Screen Depending on the result display between 1 and 6 traces may be displayed Manual configuration of traces is described in chapter 6 1 Trace Settings on page 216 Analysis Commands for storing trace data are described in chapter 11 9 1 Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values on page 431 Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe on page 355 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration gt lt tht nen
240. K Otherwise only the measurement parameter Imbalance which is a combination of the gain imbalance and the quadrature error is significant Quadrature Error Fig 4 59 Effect of Quadrature Error The quadrature error is another modulation error which is shown in figure 4 59 In this diagram the and Q components of the modulated carrier are of identical ampli tude but the phase between the two components deviates from 90 This error also distorts the coordinates In the example in figure 4 59 the Q axis is shif ted Note that the quadrature error is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal Imbalance The effect of quadrature error and gain imbalance are combined to form the error parameter imbalance Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors ie go e Buin le 20 where and are the gain of the inphase and the quadrature component rep resents the quadrature error The imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the imbalance does not affect the EVM Note that the imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter is referred to amplitude droop E Magnitude of Meas Signal relative N 1 0 50 100 1
241. K lt MarkerCoupling gt With this command markers between several screens can be coupled i e use the same x value All screens can be linked with the marker x value scaled in symbols or time except those showing the capture buffer If several capture buffer measurements are visible their markers are coupled too Setting parameters lt MarkerCoupling gt OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Couple Windows on page 222 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 221 See Marker Type on page 222 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 222 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker
242. K Register 11 11 9 This register comprises information about limit violations in FSK evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current Frequency Error RMS value 1 Error in mean Frequency Error RMS value 2 Error in peak Frequency Error RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current Frequency Error peak value 6 Error in mean Frequency Error peak value 7 Error in peak Frequency Error peak value 8 9 These bits are not used 10 Error in current Frequency Deviation value 11 Error in mean Frequency Deviation value 12 Error in peak Frequency Deviation value 13 15 These bits are not used Querying the Status Registers The following commands query the contents of the individual status registers STATuUs QUEStHionable ACPLimitiCON DIVO N 459 STATus QUEStionable DIQ CON DitiOn 222 5 charte E 459 STATus QUEStionableFREQUuency CONDItGr 2 orte cete 459 5 5 lt gt 459 lt gt 1 0 0
243. Length Fig 4 66 Schematic overview of Capture Length Result Range and Evaluation Range The determined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces Result Range The result range defines the symbols from the capture buffer that are to be demodula ted and analyzed together In some cases the data in the capture buffer contains parts that are not relevant for the evaluation task at hand Thus you can exclude them from the result range see chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 200 Result range display The result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis of the capture buffer result diagrams R amp S9FSW K70 200Measurement Basics Mag CapBuf 20 dBm 40 d amp m aiid i all Start 0 sym Fig 4 67 Result ranges for a burst signal Result displays whose source is not the capture buffer are based on a single result range such as the EVM vs Time display or the data in the Current column of the Result Summary In this case you can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges Select Result Rng softkey and analyze the indi vidual result ranges in separate windows The currently displayed result range is indi cated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display You can change the position of the result range quickly and easily by dragging th
244. MACCuracy EVM PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy EVM RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FDERror CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FDERror PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit
245. MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 408 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA M v xTu e CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy PERRor PCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy PERRor RCURrent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy PERRor RPEak STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy RHO CURRent STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy RHO PEAK STATe lt LimitState gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe lt LimitState gt This command switches the limit check for the selected result type and limit type on or off Suffix lt ResultType gt CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FERRor Frequency error FSK only FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset
246. Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion CD ROM delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument func tions are
247. Mapping Table 4 16 Optimum constellation radius ratio y linear channel for 16 Code Rate Modulation coding spectral Y efficiency 2 3 2 66 3 15 3 4 2 99 2 85 4 5 3 19 2 75 5 6 3 32 2 70 8 9 3 55 2 60 9 10 3 59 2 57 32APSK For DVB S2 32APSK mappings the ratio of the middle circle radius to the inner circle radius R2 R1 and the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y2 depend on the utilized code rate and comply with table 4 17 Table 4 17 Optimum constellation radius ratios y and linear channel for 32APSK Code Rate Modulation coding Yi Y2 spectral efficiency 2 3 3 74 2 84 5 27 3 4 3 99 2 72 4 87 4 5 4 15 2 64 4 64 5 6 4 43 2 54 4 33 8 9 4 49 2 53 4 30 User defined Modulation In addition to the modulation types defined by the standards modulation including symbol mappings can also be defined according to user requirements In this case the mapping is defined and stored in a specific format vam file format and then loa ded to the VSA application Modulation files in vam format can be defined using a mapping wizard mapwiz an auxiliary tool provided by R amp S via Internet free of charge This tool is a precompiled MATLABO file MATLAB pcode To download the tool together with a detailed description see http www rohde schwarz com search term mapwiz Overview of the Demodulation Process 4 4
248. Measurement time dot f rec 214 215 Microbutton Dim 165 Min Gap Length nj c 193 Min max values bool e ERE 177 Minimum erre 225 NEXU 225 SOflK6y ii creber n i rr Dern 225 Minimum shift keying MSK Symbol mapping rentre ines 85 Mixer Type External 821 2 rtis 153 gt 224 ModAcc Limits ice rtr re 226 Modulation Config ratiOn rs 140 Display Errors reta vete eee ipae 120 Inverted VQ remote eese 358 Invented WO iecit etn e 183 t ner herren a 143 16 p ETE 142 REMOTE 307 Symbol Rate rr n rr engins 143 2 User defined Modulation accuracy Data SOURCE itte 18 Individual results Limit checking rtr rr rere Limit checking enabling me 226 Limit lines remote 407 Limits 254 Ixesult typES siensia naaa 18 Modulation Error Ratio MER BI M 109 Modulation errors iocur 106 108 Data SOURCE RED HE 17 488 PSK QAM MSK 106 Ixesult TYPES crore re reris 17 Modulation order ala
249. Ment lt Comment gt This command adds a comment to a file that contains data Parameters lt Comment gt String containing the comment Status Reporting System Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 15 Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See 1 Export on page 235 MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured data to a file The file extension is iq tar By default the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured data to the specified file Manual operation See 1 Export on page 235 11 11 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all inform
250. NDition on page 459 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 460 Table 11 5 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for R amp S FSW K70 Bit Definition 0 Burst not found This bit is set if a burst could not be detected 1 Sync not found This bit is set if the sync sequence pattern of the midamble could not be detected 2to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 11 11 2 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register This register comprises information about any limit violations that may occur after demodulation any of the VSA windows It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition on page 459 and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt on page 459 The status of the STATus QUESTionable MODulation register is indicated in bit 7 of the STATus QUESTionable register It can be queried using the STATus QUESTionable EVENt command Bit No Meaning 0 Error in EVM evaluation 1 Error in Phase Error evaluation 2 Error in Magnitude Error evaluation 3 Error in Carrier Frequency evaluation 4 Error in offset or RHO evaluation 5 Error in FSK evaluation 6 15 These bits are not used 11 11 3 STATus QUESTionable MODulation n EVM Register This register comprises information about limit violations in EVM evaluation It can be queried with commands Status Reporting System
251. ODE on page 433 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 6 3 1 Markers Header If enabled a header with scaling information etc is included in the file Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 433 Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 433 Trace ASCII Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the traces of the captured data in ASCII format to the specified file and directory Either the traces for the selected window only see Specifics for on page 139 are exported or the traces of all windows are exported one after the other For details on the file format see chapter A 4 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data on page 481 Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 433 Markers Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker tab e Press the MKR key then select the Marker Config softkey e Individual Marker Settings 220 Sell ijo cit 222 Marker Position
252. PING c rtr tener nts 91 AltentatioR bene t 172 AUTO p 172 Configuration remote sss 350 173 MENTI isni eai eiaeiiai a 172 Option B25 5 re e a ro tede 173 Protective remote sse 319 Audio signals Output remote ctn eed 166 Auto ID External Mixer B21 remote control 322 External Mixer B21 bent 155 Threshold External Mixer B21 remote control 323 Threshold External Mixer 21 155 Auto level FAYSLCTOSIS i 215 Reference level 171 175 214 DONKEY tud 171 175 214 Auto settings Meastime Auto softkey 214 Meastime Manual softkey 215 Automatic Configuration Configuration remote Averaging Band Conversion loss table 21 External Mixer B21 remote control External Mixer 21 Bandwidth Coverage MSRA MSRT mode 130 Demodulation si depending on sample rate 72 Digital I Q data i recette nein dea 71 EXteriSIOI oreet ner orti
253. PRHo 2 RFECurrent CRHa RPEak STAT QUES MOD FSK RMEan IQRHo STAT QUES MOO IOR RCURrent STAT QUES MOO CFR MAGNitude STAT QUES MOO MAGN STAT QUES MOD PHAS STAT QUES MOD EVM STATus QUEStionable MODulation n Fig 11 2 Overview of VSA specific status registers e STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt 454 e STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt 454 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM 454 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe 455 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register 455 e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register 456 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO 456 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK 457 e Querying the Status Registers lien a ee ad 457 Status Reporting System 11 11 1 STATus QUEStionable SYNC n Register This register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection for each window in each VSA channel It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CO
254. Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz 3 Press the LEVEL key and enter 0 dBm 4 To define the standard a Press the DIAGRAM key b Select the first block Baseband A in the settings overview and press ENTER Select GSM EDGE d Highlight the first slot in the frame diagram and press ENTER Fig 9 6 R amp S SMU GSM EDGE Frame Configuration Dialog Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals e Select the Burst Type Normal 8PSK EDGE Slot Level Full Slot Attenuation o o aB A1 Multislot Configuration Number Of Slots 1 Fields 111111111 Data Pres 9 Training Sequence TSC rsco 11 11110 111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 Slot Marker Definition f Close the GSM EDGE Burst Slot0 dialog box 5 Toggle the State to On at the top of the GSM EDGE dialog box to switch the modulation on 6 Press the RF ON OFF key to switch the RF transmission on 9 3 2 Analyzer Settings This section helps you get your first valid measurement with a bursted signal It starts with step by step instructions and continues with a more detailed description of further functionality Frequency 1GHz Ref Level 4 dBm Standard GSM 8PSK EDGE To define the settings on the R amp S FSW 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz R amp S9FSW K70 Measurement Examples N O R Press
255. Q BALanced STATe on page 340 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input 1 or only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 346 5 5 1 5 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Input Source Power Sensor Probes Probe I Name RT ZS30 Serial Number 1410 4309 02 2 Not Present Part Number 101241 Type Single Ended Microbutton Action Run Single For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input the detec ted type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each connected probe e Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Micro DTC TA ACH 165 Microbutton Action Act
256. QAM on page 204 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror lt RefDevComp gt This command defines whether the deviation error is compensated for when calculat ing the frequency error for FSK modulation Configuring Setting parameters lt RefDevComp gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Scales the reference signal to the actual deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the entered nominal deviation for the reference signal RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for FSK on page 205 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance lt ComplQImbalance gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ imbalance on or off Setting parameters lt ComplQImbalance gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 204 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset ComplQOffset This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset on or off Setting parameters lt ComplQOffset gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 204 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERror lt SymbolClockError gt This command switches the compensation for symbol rate error on or off Setting parameters lt SymbolClockError gt OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 204 See Compensate for FSK on page 205 SENSe DDEMod OPTimization lt Criterion gt This command determines the optimization criteria
257. QRHO limit violations in l Q Offset and RHO evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK limit violations in FSK evalua tion e g bit 11 sums up the information for all STATus QUEStionable SYNC registers For some subregisters there may be separate registers for each active channel Thus if a status bit in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific subregisters In this case you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel o The STATus QUEStionable register sums up the information from all subregisters The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 11 11 9 Querying the Status Registers on page 457 Status Reporting System g QD sogea OR of all Lits s g DigtallQ o specific for FSW K70 13 1 One register for each active channel pu ACPLimit SYNC SYNC BURSt 10 UMARgn STATus QUEStionable S YNC n T 5 CALibration s UNCAL MODulation 5 FREQuency FDEPeak TEMPerature FDEMean POWer 2 FDECurrent STATus QUE Stionable PFEPIK PFEMean 7 MIQOfset e ClIQOffset PPEsk RFEPesk PCURrent 9 RFEMean
258. R amp S FSW K70 Vector Signal Analysis User Manual Pea RNS Paak RMS de Pe he Cimier Erg Peak Rhe UO Off 1 0 Tag Gain Tr Magnit i us alanc Qu ETIN th Ampitide Power Clw 5 FeqRespMay Stop 25000 sym 5 7 1173 9292 02 10 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S9FSW models with firmware version 2 00 and higher e R amp S FSW8 1312 8000K08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 e R amp S FSW26 1312 8000 26 e R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 e R amp S FSW50 1312 8000 50 e R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 The following firmware options are described R amp S FSW K70 1313 1416 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2014 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding 2459 is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH 4 Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations
259. R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Mag CapBuf Stop 10000 sym Fig 9 8 Preview of capture buffer 9 3 3 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer This example describes how to navigate through the capture buffer for a continuous signal This navigation feature is especially important for bursted signals Therefore we provide a further navigation example for the GSM EDGE signal 1 In order to see more details in the capture buffer close window 4 a Press the Display Config softkey or the Display Configuration button in the Overview b Select the luj Delete icon for window 4 j Close the SmartGrid mode by selecting the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar 2 Press the RUN SINGLE key 3 Inthe EVM vs Time display window 1 add a maximum hold trace by pressing the TRACE key and then selecting the Trace Config softkey see chapter 9 2 5 Averaging Several Evaluations on page 265 4 Re evaluate the whole capture buffer by pressing the SWEEP key and then the Refresh softkey 5 Use the Select Result Rng softkey to navigate through your capture buffer Thus you can determine which peak was caused by which burst SSS S User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 270 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples spectrum VSA Ref Level 25 00 dBm Std EDGE 6PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 10 GHz ResLen 148 SGL Stat Count BURST PATTERN A EVM 1 Crw 2 B Result Summ
260. R values over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS SNR value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum SNR values over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of SNR values over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Query only R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA 11 9 4 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SRERror lt type gt This command queries the symbol rate error Query parameters lt type gt PEAK AVG SDEV PCTL TPEak RPEak PAVG PSDev PPCTI lt none gt Symbol rate error for current sweep AVG Average symbol rate error over several sweeps RPE Peak symbol rate error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of symbol rate error PCTL 95 percentile value of symbol rate error Usage Query only Retrieving Limit Check Results The modulation accuracy parameters can be checked against defined limits The fol lowing commands are required to query the results of these limit checks CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACC
261. RKer X SLIMits LEFT are BAR 406 5 2 406 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits STATE airnn cene tete 407 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value Analysis The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on 223 See Search Next Peak on page 224 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 224 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operatio
262. RLE SENSE MIXE LOSS ete E reda tt dere p x e SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLE tec cds en tka une S ata lavas eset SENSe MIXerEOSS TABLE LOW iaa errare EA EAE EEES EEEE SENSe MIXer EOSSEI OW tette ee te ctt tte ee tete ped e dg ce E SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe SENSe MIXer SIGNal 3 2 ir ted itte cte ga onec tu ren a t d t ere iru dr e SENSE STATE SENSe MSRA GAP Ture btt enc ep dp e ee Ue e e Td prt aA SENSe PROBeSchis SETUp n etu a SENSe PROBesp IB PARTnUtmbOr correct enn ia eie ERE deta oe dL ere Hive neat 343 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber lt gt alana EE SENS PROBEsp gt SETUP NAME ier tienen enn tire denne voco ae 344 SENS PROB lt p gt SETUP STATE rrt eb cnet ed ana d bsp e veu c t pda Va 345 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETUp tert td Pues
263. RR DD UNI MD Iren eR 329 itane rex ERR ERO e EROR IN EXER ELO 329 6 10 6 329 SENSeTCORReclon CYL DA TA cua tern edt obere ortae opaca adde 330 SENSe CORRectionm C VEIHARMONIGC 22212 ni ete utut hr kan 330 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 330 SENSeTCORRectonm a c petto th hag ep da 331 SENSe CORRection CVI SELeol 2 1 dini 331 SENSeJCORRecliOm GVESSNIDMDRE tuer Rp rte rot one do dex REFERT DERE ERRORRV AR 331 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect page 331 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Band K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y
264. RT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Configuring VSA Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CORR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band SENS CO SENS CO R RR CVL BAND USER R SENS COR R R R CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS
265. Restore Factory Settings Stop 2 535 Start 0 254 Stop 0 254 Tri Ga 12 03 2010 09 44 29 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSW K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR in R amp S FSQ K70 Solution The FSK deviation error in the R amp S FSW K70 is calculated as the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 143 What is referred to as the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is calculated differently see the R amp S FSQ K70 Software Manual and is comparable to the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSW K70 However while the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is given in Hz the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSW K70 is given in percent i e relative to the FSK Meas Devi ation User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 291 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result dis play Spectrum VSA Ref Level 22 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 10 0 dB Freq 1 0 GHz ResLen 200 SGL TRG EXT Freq Error Abs 1 Phase Error Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Stop 5 13 a 09 30 16 Solution These spikes are usually uncritical and are caused by zero transitions in the Plane Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the me
266. Result Display 11 8 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect page 304 LAY QuEADDEWINDONW IY entr eerte xut acutos eheu d eine oreet oet eges yo tine vete dava Red 419 LAY ou oru ter eee XX oce FR 420 IDEN c auda nr pene ehe adde ud 421 M fetis s Hun O 421 LAYoutREPLace WINDOW 2 rauco ou ato torte duree ea eo Rma steeds 421 n 422 T 423 LAY out WINDOW lt A gt IDENY P 22 iuret riore eroe tee Fano douze nct 423 LAYout WIN Dowen er ga Re YER 424 diiit 424 rater Der Ae 424 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Directio
267. Result Summary For the Result Summary the command returns all values listed in the result table from top to bottom i e lt EVM_RMS gt lt EVM_Peak gt lt MER_RMS gt lt MER_Peak gt lt Phase Error RMS gt lt Phase Error Peak gt lt MagError_RMS gt lt MagError_Peak gt lt Carrier Frequency 11 9 2 6 11 9 3 Retrieving Results Error Rho I Q gt lt 1 Imbalance gt lt Gain Imbalance gt lt Quadratue Error Amplitude Droop gt lt Power gt lt Symbol Rate Error Note that the Symbol Rate Error was appended at the end to provide compatibility to previous versions and instruments For each result type both the current and statistical values are provided The order of the results is as follows result1 current result mean result1 peak lt result1_stddev gt result1 95 gt result2 current lt result2_mean gt Empty cells in the table return nothing The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected PSK MSK and QAM modulation returns 85 values FSK modulation returns 55 values The unit of each value depends on the par ticular result For more details on the Result Summary see chapter 3 2 29 Result Summary on page 48 Equalizer For Equalizer diagrams the command returns the y axis values of the equalizer trace The number of returned values depends on the result type For impulse response diagrams filter l
268. SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 328 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 330 Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 155 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 328 Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This set ting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 330 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 331 Input Output and Frontend Settings Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three por
269. STAT m 321 SENSEM Xer BIAS HIGH e em 321 5 1 5 22 22222 322 BENSE IMI etc Esa den av cem cag avs se scd a 322 SENSE tanta Ex extre axi cere 322 SENSe MIXer THReshold esses nnne nnnnnnn eren 2 323 SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 152 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 321 Parameters BiasSetting RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 155 Configuring VSA SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SEN
270. STATistics SCALEe XC BCOUnt iiit teen aio ee tete As CALCulatesn gt STAtistics SCAL 6 LOW Eee gt 5 TATistics SOALe Y UNIT eg eme tpe EEAS CALECulatesn STATistics SCALe Y UPPDOr ite reo lt gt lt gt 5 nennen CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEFault CALCulatesns TRAGest ADJust VALUe nc nare tine ertet rint be ser taret ro CALGulatesns FRAGest cr rer atic vin cr cerrar ee ci rete GAL Culate lt n gt UNITZANG Einusinni epi mec beet ct bp eee Ep esl verus paid cn e C CALEGCulatesnsCUNITZTIME ce tr redit een etri oae te Sexe ce secet iibri end GAL Gulatesns Y UNITZTIME re tee eere i ee re be oec tea CALibration AIQ DCOFPfSetL te oet ri cene epe atacar ttr rie eo puer e fu duse RS 341 CALibration AIQ DCOFfset Q DISPlIay FORMAE te tt tpe ee rc ATENA DISPlayEWINDowsns p TEMEBINE EVAlue aoi ood odia tiene Doe teet eerie 428 DISPlay WINDowsn PRAT6IAUT Ois i crater otra cierto epe ere ci
271. SYNG AU TO reae uaa tau et rto eni eo na etn raa dra ern ora eaa mona 381 SENS amp IDBEMod ES LEVE 3 yeu voc vea aa 381 ISENSe JDDEMod ESYNeRESUll onn euni En Pee neta 382 SENSe DDEMod FSYNG MODE eene tette tette 382 SENS amp IDDEMOCGIKEATR STAT iri rre Eure cosas a oo vua 382 era nana n ex a nore nee aru 383 1 1 2 1 4404 383 SENSe DDEMGd NORMalize CF EML rta ta 383 SENS amp DDEMod NORMalize CHANHel nein 383 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERTor tro a thin 383 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQlIMbalance esee nnne nemen 384 SENS amp e DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfsel terere ier pee eese 384 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize SRERLTOrF 52 onn rn nne rn n nahen kn sari 384 TIIZBOD cs careret aiiai ere re rn m Rod ERR TY 384 SENSe IDDEMod SEARch PAT Tem SYNO AUT Q c crean tue hr nua kh nn nua nnn unu dd 385 SENSe DDEMod SEARCHPAT Temi YNOESTAT iiit ot rura e tr
272. Se MIXer STATe on page 321 Parameters BiasSetting RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 155 SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 155 SENSe MIXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 155 See Auto ID on page 155 Configuring VSA SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 322 Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID T
273. Sets eade recenter Ep eee a Ed d BU ERE Ya Ee 135 L Restore Standard 04000 nas 135 L Restore Pattern 0 0400 135 Restore Factory Settings Opens a submenu that allows you to restore all standards and pattern settings on the instrument to the values predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Restore Standard Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 304 Restore Pattern Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the pattern files predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 304 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements Configuration According to Digital Standards For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 472 For detailed instructions see chapter 8 1 How to Per
274. Symbol Rate Error Difference between the currently measured symbol rate and SRER the defined symbol rate in ppm Only for PSK QAM or UserQAM modulation and only if compensation for SRE is activated see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation on page 203 Rho RHO Offset Offset in the original input OOFFset I Q Imbalance Not for BPSK IQIMbalance Gain Imbalance Not for BPSK GIMBalance Quadrature Error Not for BPSK QERRor Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter ADRoop Power The power of the measured signal MPOWer Table 3 5 Parameters for FSK modulation only Parameter Description SCPI parameter Frequency Error RMS The average RMS and peak frequency error in 96 The FSK DERRor Peak frequency error is thedifference of the measured fre quency and the reference frequency The frequency error is normalized to the estimated FSK deviation FSK Deviation Error The deviation error of FSK modulated signals in Hz The FDERror FSK deviation erroris the difference of the FSK deviation of the measured signal and the FSK referencedeviation you have set FSK Meas Deviation The estimated deviation of FSK modulated signals in Hz FSK MDEViation FSK Ref Deviation The reference deviation you have set in Hz FSK RDEViation Carrier Frequency Drift The mean carrier frequency drift in Hz per symbol FSK CFDRift Remote command CALCulate l
275. Synchronization Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Normalize EVM TO eco eret ree ec ie thc eie 207 e o 208 Estimation amp 208 5 MM Em 209 FING SYMCMPOMIZAUON 209 gt TEN 210 Srl zi M 210 Normalize EVM to Normalizes the EVM to the specified power value This setting is not available for MSK or FSK modulation e MaxRef Power Maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e Mean Ref Power mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e Mean Constellation Power Mean expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants mec 2 ___________________________________________ User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 207 Demodulation Settings e Constellation Power The maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants Remote command SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE on 377 Optimization Determines the method used to calculate the result parameters The required method depends on the used standard and is set according to the selected standard by default Minimize RMS Optimizes calculation such that the RMS of the error vector is mini
276. TEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 169 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt LinkMode gt Defines the step width of the center frequency Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF 1 0 ON Links the step width to the current standard currently 1 MHz for all standards OFF Sets the step width as defined using the FREQ CENT STEP command see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 347 RST 1 Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 169 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines a frequency offset If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application Configuring VSA See also Frequency Offset on page 169 Note MSRA MSRT mode the setting command is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master For MSRA MSRT applications only the query command is available Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 169 11 5 2 8 Amplitude Settings Amplitude and scaling settings allow you to configure the vertical y axis display and for some result displays also the horizontal x axis Usef
277. This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measure ment channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 302 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 302 Example INST CRE SAN Spectrum 2 Adds an additional spectrum display named Spectrum 2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 302 Activating Vector Signal Analysis lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 302 Example INST CRE REPL Spectrum2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel nam
278. This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 162 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 see Input Sample Rate on page 161 Note the final user sample rate of the R amp S FSW may differ and is defined using SENS DEM PRAT see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 357 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 161 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital I Q input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 161 Configuring VSA OUTPut DIQ State This command turns continuous output of I Q data to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 on and off Using the digital input and digital output simultaneously is not possible If digital baseband output is active the sample rate is restricted to 100 MHz 200 MHz if enhance
279. Tus QUEStionable DIQ ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt ENABle lt BitDefinition gt ChannelName STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM ENABle BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe ENABle BitDefinition lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle lt BitDefinition gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt B
280. Type gt CONTinuous BURSted RST CONTinuous 11 5 2 Configuring VSA Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Signal Type on page 145 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe lt PattOffsState gt This command de activates the pattern offset Setting parameters lt PattOffsState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Offset on page 146 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue lt PatternOffset gt This command defines a number of symbols which are ignored before the comparison with the pattern starts Setting parameters lt PatternOffset gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Offset on page 146 Input Output and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup Manual configuration of the input and frontend is described in chapter 5 5 Input Out put and Frontend Settings on page 148 iU RTI EU 319 e Using External
281. UEStionable LIMit m ENABle seeeseesssseee seen 460 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin m ENABle sess 460 lt gt 460 lt gt 460 lt gt 460 lt gt 460 lt gt 1 460 lt gt 460 lt gt 460 5 5 460 STATUus QUESHBonable SYNG ENBABIG t e a set oup Rus 460 5 5 460 5 5
282. VL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 159 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect 331 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt PortType gt 213 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 160 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt lt File name gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Manual operation See New Table on page 157 See Edit Table on page 157 See File Name on page 158 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Configuring VSA Before this command ca
283. WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 348 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 215 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 391 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For information on other input settings see chapter 5 5 1 Input Settings on page 148 Preamplifier option B24 Input Settings If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power Input Output and Frontend Settings This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB
284. YScale Config gt Y Axis Reference Position 5 Enter the position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis The position is a percentage of the entire length where 100 refers to the top edge 6 Select AMPT gt YScale Config gt Y Axis Range Example If you want the to analyze errors greater than 95 you can define the y axis range as 5 and position the y axis to start at 9596 To do so enter the reference value 95 96 and the reference position 096 EVM Error 1 Clrw 2 Clrw Start 151 0 sym Stop 299 0 sym Fig 8 3 Defining the y axis scaling using a reference point To define the scaling automatically 1 Focus the result window User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 252 How to Analyze the Measured Data 2 Select AMPT gt Y Axis Auto Scale The y axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynamically 8 3 1 2 How to Scale Statistics Diagrams Statistic diagrams show the distribution i e probabilities of occurrence of the values as a set of bars You can define the number of bars to be displayed i e the granularity of classifications Additionally you can specify whether absolute or percentage values are displayed For statistics measurements both the x axis and the y axis can be scaled to optimize the display The range of the displayed x axis for statistics diagrams can be defined in the following ways e manually by defining reference values and
285. Yout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM MOV to define the result type see CAL Culatecn FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on 434 and chapter 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results on page 435 22 __________________________________________________ User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 42 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 23 3 2 24 Magnitude Relative Magnitude of the source signal the signal amplitude is scaled to the ideal reference signal Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 2 MagRel Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 14 Result display Magnitude Relative Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 430 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time pru E INC NE X ae User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 43 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 25 MA
286. a marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See X value on page 221 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt q gt Y This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker 11 7 2 2 Analysis Return values Value Usage Query only Marker Search and Positioning Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings Useful commands for positioning markers described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 400 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe on page 401 Remote commands exclusive to positioning markers lt gt gt 402 lt gt lt gt 1 402 lt gt lt gt 403 lt gt lt gt 2 2 1 4 0000 66 403 lt gt lt gt
287. a predefined sync pattern file Setting parameters Select string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Selected Pattern for Search on page 195 See Standard Patterns selecting an assigned pattern on page 196 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe lt PatternSearch gt This command switches the search for a sync sequence on or off Setting parameters lt PatternSearch gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Enabling Pattern Searches on page 194 See Pattern Search On on page 198 Configuring Patterns New patterns can be defined and assigned to a signal standard Useful commands for configuring patterns described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 371 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC CATalog on page 317 Remote commands exclusive to configuring patterns SENSe DDEMod SEARCKS YNC COMMMPBHnI redeo ee enit eu extus eed etae 371 SENSe DDEMod SEARCH 372 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNG DElLl te iaaii 372 I SENSe IDDEMoGd SEARGCh S YNO IDATA Ebo xe aaa 372 SENSe IDBEMod SEARGHES YNGOAJNAME 373 SENSe DDEMod SEARch S YNG NSTate
288. a source see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 419 and table 3 1 Whether the result type shows absolute or relative values is defined using the DISP WIND TRAC MODE command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 430 Configuring the Result Display Setting parameters Format MAGNitude PHASe UPHase RIMag FREQuency COMP CONS IEYE QEYE FEYE CONF RCONStellation RSUMmary BERate GDELay MOVerview NONE MAGNitude Magnitude Absolute MOVerview Magnitude Overview Absolute entire capture buffer PHASe Phase Wrap UPHase Phase Unwrap RIMag Real Imag FREQuency Frequency Absolute COMP Vector CONS Constellation IEYE Eye Diagram Real 1 QEYE Eye Diagram Imag Q FEYE Eye Diagram Frequency CONF Constellation Frequency COVF Vector Frequency RCONstellation Constellation I Q Rotated RSUMmary Result summary BERate Bit error rate GDELay Frequency Response Group Delay Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 464 Manual operation See Result Type on page 229 Configuring the Result Display CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the measurement of the statistical distribution of magnitude phase or frequency values on or off Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 M
289. ag The Real Imag diagram of the impulse response is a stem diagram It displays the filter characteristics in the time domain for both the and the Q branches individually Using this information the equalizer is uniquely characterized and can be recreated by other applications SSS gt gt UU User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 39 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 21 1 Real ImpRespReallmag Equalizer 1 Imag ImpRespReallmag Equalizer Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FEED XTIM DDEM IMP to define the impulse response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 425 CALC FORM RIM to define the real image result type see CAL Culatecn FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 437 Magnitude Absolute Magnitude of the source signal in an individual capture buffer range max 256 000 samples If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping result ranges with a size of 256 000 samples each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Magnitude Absolute result display To scroll through the samples in different ranges use the Sweep gt Select Result Rng function or directly afte
290. agram and an Vector diagram with a recognizable constellation How ever a filter that has low intersymbol interference might lead to noise enhancement which is commonly undesirable for a measurement filter In order to avoid noise enhancement it is recommended that you e a design your own measurement filter and upload it as a user filter e b select a suitable measurement filter from the list R amp S FSW K70 200Measurement Basics Transferring filter files to the R amp S FSW You can transfer the va filter files to the R amp S FSW using a USB memory device 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth The Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings determines how many symbols are captured and demodulated during a certain measurement time However for each symbol more than one sample may be captured so that the sample rate may be higher than the symbol rate The Sample Rate parameter in the Data Acquisition settings defines the number of samples to capture per symbol not to be confused with the estimation points per symbol or display points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 126 The resulting sample rate depending on the Sym bol Rate is indicated behind the parameter The number of samples to capture per symbol was referred to as the Capture Over sampling value in previous R amp S signal and spectrum analyzers The resulting sample
291. ails on importing and exporting I Q data see the R amp S FSW User Manual e Default Settings for Vector Signal 134 e Configuration According to Digital Standards eene 135 e Configuration OVelVvIGW tette oai r ERR 138 Signal eroi P 140 e Input Ouiput dnd Frontend e rre ette ttr ted er ah 148 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis Signal Capture Bettany 180 e Burstand Patten Configuration erect ones ed aan 191 e Result Range Configuration incerti ree E add EE Ra 200 LAORE 202 e Measurement Filter Selllgs ue et on a e ce tran 210 e Evaluation Range Configuration sceoin 212 e Adjusting Settings Automatically cemere 214 5 1 Default Settings for Vector Signal Analysis When you switch the application of a measurement channel to the first time a set of parameters is passed on from the currently active application e center frequency and frequency offset e reference level and reference level offset e attenuation e Signal source and digital input settings e input coupling e filter state After initial setup the parameters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re
292. ak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted To get valid results you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the auto range process This is only possible in single sweep mode Parameters ONCE Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements Usage Event Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 178 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X BCOunt lt StatNofColumns gt This command defines the number of columns for the statistical distribution Setting parameters lt StatNofColumns gt numeric value Range 2 to 1024 RST 101 Default unit NONE Manual operation See Quantize on page 178 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Defining Min and Max Values on page 177 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Magnitude gt This command defines the upper vertical limit of the diagram Parameters lt Magnitude gt The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 5 to 1 0 RST 1 0
293. alue is displayed at the Y Axis Reference Position on page 177 Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RVALue on page 356 Y Axis Reference Position Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the position of the Y Axis Reference Value on the y axis The position is defined as a percentage value where 0 refers to the bottom edge 100 refers to the top edge of the screen The y axis is adapted so that the reference value is dis played at the reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition on page 356 Range per Division Configuring a Reference Point and Divisions Defines the value range to be displayed per division Since the display consists of 10 divisions by default the displayed range is Range 10 Range per Division Note If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the Input Output and Frontend Settings smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision on page 355 X Axis Scaling For statistics a histogram is displayed For these diagrams the x axis can be config ured as well Adjust Settings X Axis Scaling Adjusts the x axis scaling to the occurring statistical values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics
294. andard EDGE HSR Wide Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Wide Pulse standard Gauss Classic Gauss filter with an adjustable BT Low ISI Meas Filter Measurement filter implemented to retain a low intersymbol inferference Best suited for eye diagrams or vector dia grams Not necessarily suited for EVM evaluation due to amplifi cation in the pass band Low Pass Narrow Low Pass Wide Pass band up to Feymbo 2 Stop band starts at Fsymboi 40dB Pass band up to Fsymbol Stop band starts at 1 5 F 40dB Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period integrate and dump effect RRC Root Raised Cosine Filter The roll off parameter Alpha is set according to the Transmit filter if the Auto according to Trans mit filter option is enabled see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 211 Otherwise it must be set manually If the Transmit filter is also a Root Raised Cosine filter with the same roll off parameter the resulting system is inter symbol interference free USER NONE User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter function or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For details see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Fil ters on page 242 No measurement filter is used The frequency response of the available standar
295. anual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 229 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE lt StatisticMode gt This command defines whether only the symbol points or all points are considered for the statistical calculations Setting parameters lt StatisticMode gt SONLy INFinite SONLy Symbol points only are used INFinite All points are used RST SONLy Manual operation See Oversampling on page 230 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ITEM LINE VALue lt SingleValue gt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ITEM LINE VALue lt SingleValue gt This commands switches between the whole Result Summary and the diagram show ing only a single value e g the EVM RMS value as a bargraph The same parameters are available as those for which modulation accuracy limits can be defined see Limit Value on page 227 Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt SingleValue gt ALL EVMP PERM MERM MEP CFER RHO IQOF FERM FEP FDER ALL Complete Result Summary EVMR RMS EVM EVMP Peak EVM PERM RMS Phase error PEP Peak phase error MERM RMS Magnitude error MEP Peak magnitude error CFER Carrier frequency error RHO RHO IQOF offset FERM RMS frequency error FEP Peak frequency error FDER FSK deviation error RST ALL Manual operation See Result Summary Individual Results on page 51 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO lt DisplayPPSMode gt Defines the number
296. ards including short forms is provided in the annex see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 472 Example DDEM PRES TETRA NDDOWN Switches the predefined digital standard TETRA Disconti nuousDownlink on DDEM PRES C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Switches the user defined digital standard USER_GSM on Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Load Standard on page 137 SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent lt Comment gt This command enters the comment for a new standard The comment is stored with the standard and is only displayed in the selection menu manual operation When remote control is used the string is deleted after the standard has been stored allow ing a new comment to be entered for the next standard In this case a blank string is returned when a query is made Setting parameters lt Comment gt string Manual operation See Comment on page 137 Configuring SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete lt FileName gt This command deletes a specified digital standard file in the vector signal analysis The file name includes the path If the file does not exist an error message is displayed Setting parameters lt FileName gt string File name including the path for the digital standard file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Delete Standar
297. are already available in the instrument Newly created patterns can also be added to the list 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the result range and aims to make the correct symbol deci sions The algorithm is illustrated in figure 4 48 using the example of a QPSK modula tion After timing and scaling recovery a frequency offset and phase offset estimator is employed After this coarse synchronization the VSA application makes symbol decisions i e recovers which symbols were transmitted by the device under test DUT Typically the employed estimators are non data aided NDA estimators This means that they operate on an unknown data sequence Since the local oscillators LO of the transmitter device under test and the receiver R amp S FSW are normally not coupled User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 99 Overview of the Demodulation Process their phase offset with respect to each other is unknown The unknown transmission delay between DUT and R amp S FSW adds a further unknown phase offset Due to this unknown phase offset the result of the demodulation can be ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position because of the rotational symmetry of e g a PSK constellation For example in the case of non differential QPSK modulation the measurement signal the reference signal and the decided symbols may have constant phase offset of 0 2 rr or 3rr 2 This offset can only be de
298. are ates 385 SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE lt EvmCalc gt This command defines the calculation formula for EVM Setting parameters lt EvmCalc gt Manual operation Configuring VSA SIGNal SYMBol MECPower MACPower SIGNal Calculation normalized to the mean power of the reference sig nal at the symbol instants SYMBol Calculation normalized to the maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants MECPower Calculation normalized to the mean expected power of the mea surement signal at the symbol instants MACPower Calculation normalized to the maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants RST SIGNal See Normalize EVM to on page 207 SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet lt EVMOffsetState gt ConfigureS the way the VSA application calculates the error vector results for offset QPSK Setting parameters lt EVMOffsetState gt Manual operation ON OFF 1 0 ON VSA application compensates the delay of the Q component with respect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the reference signal before calculating the error vector That means that the error vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period OFF the VSA application substracts the measured signal from the ref erence signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period one that corresponds to the
299. are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S9FSW K70 Contents Contents UL ocn 7 1 4 About this Manual iere RR Rd 7 1 2 Documentation OvervIlew 2 aeneae nre incusat esu tu Irc 8 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation eene nnnm 9 2 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application 11 2 4 Starting the VSA 4 4 nnne nnn nennen nnn 11 2 2 Understanding the Display 12 3 Measurements and Result 15 31 Evaluation Data Sources in 8 enne nennen rnnt 15 3 2 Result Types in 85 2 ii nn uua i ntumsi na usas sinn panum o 19 3 3 Common Parameters in 11 1 2 1 55 4 200Measurement 4 2 57 4 1 Filters Bandwidths During Signal 57 42 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth eee
300. ary Continuous Sweep 0 25 0 67 29 deg Continue 1 Select Result Range eg 9 X Carrier Freq Error Sweep 2 Imbalance k 4 L Quadrature Error 4 Amplitude Droop Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym Mag CapBuf 1 Statistic Count Auta Select Result Rng 2 cem Start 0 sym Stop 10000 sym Fig 9 9 Navigation through the capture buffer 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges The Result Length is the number of symbols that are to be demodulated and ana lyzed together In most common applications only the parts of the capture buffer con taining the bursts need to be analyzed Hence for bursted signals the Result Length usually coincides with the burst length However there are certain scenarios where the rising and falling edge of a burst are also of interest e g checking the power ramping of the device under test For this measurement task it is useful to choose a Result Length that exceeds the burst length 1 In order to include the rising and falling edges of the bursts in the EVM vs Time display window 1 you need to increase the Result Length In the Overview select Cut Result Range and increase the Result Length to 200 symbols 2 To evaluate the rising and falling edges further display the absolute magnitude val ues of the measured signal in window 4 Source Meas amp Ref Signal Result type Magnitud
301. asurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid pattern has been found When measuring signals that contain a pattern and are aver aged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 370 5 7 4 Pattern Definition New patterns can be defined and then assigned to a standard Patterns are defined in the New Pattern dialog box which is displayed when you select the New button in the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box Burst and Pattern Configuration Symbols Format Binary Hex Decimal Remove Size 31 Comment For details on defining a pattern see chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern on page 244 DIAG sisi teer ted tenere 199 tees 199 Mod 200 iners ep PN 200 cit 200 L Adding ics 222 200 L Rermovi g SIN i acc ee 200 ree T 200 Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 373 Descript
302. asurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative to Answer Spectrum Reallmag Meas amp Ref calculates the FFT of the result Reall mag Meas amp Ref Reallmag Meas amp Ref has the unit none In this case none means the measured signal has been scaled such that it matches the ideal corresponding ref erence signal as well as possible The reference signal in turn is scaled such that max abs at symbol instants 1 0 Question How can I get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer in remote control Answer Use the following remote commands SENSel DDEMod PRESet GSM NB Load the GSM standard SENSel1 DDEMod RLENgth 10000 SYM Enlarge the capture buffer length such that all the bursts you want to demodulate can be seen within the capture buffer INITiatel CONTinuous OFF Go to single sweep mode User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 292 10 4 Obtaining Technical Support SENSe1 SWEep COUNCt 0 Set Statistic Count to Auto mode INITiatel IMMediate Do single sweep SENSe1 SWEep COUNt CURRent Query the number of demodulated bursts within the capture buffer For n 1 NumberOfBursts SENSe1 DDEMod SEARCh MBURSt CALC n TRACe4 TRACel Query the result symbols in window D End Step through all bursts and query the demodulated symbols Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong Answer For an FSK mo
303. at corresponds to the Q component If Offset EVM is enabled however the VSA application compensates the delay of the Q component with respect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the reference signal before calculating the error vector That means that the error vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period Remote command SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet on page 378 Measurement Filter Settings The measurement filter can be used to filter both the measured signal and the refer ence signal and thus the error vector You can configure the measurement filter to be used For more information on measurement filters see chapter 4 1 4 Measurement Filters on page 60 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Measurement filter settings are displayed when you select the Meas Filter button in the Overview or the Demod Meas Filter softkey in the main menu and then Switch to the Meas Filter tab A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly m Demodulation amp Meas Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Measurement Filter Auto according to Transmit Filter Type RRC Alpha BT 0 22 P
304. at the end of the data measurement if the TRACe STATe command is set to ON before the measurement is performed Parameters Average numeric value Default unit W Usage Query only 11 5 2 5 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed SENSe PROBesp D PARTDUtDSE cie career tines cox n rni e n 343 SENSE TPROBSSpsHDISRNUIDGE rre nare ertt De Pax made niu an vedas 344 SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE 2 2 i iecit eroe tert eite ya te eo ER aa ac cV RA 344 SENSe PROBesp SETWplNAME orit Lr ent e 344 SENSe PROBesp SETUp S TA TOT rene be er aee d ge 345 ISENS amp PROBesps SE TYP ES ecd iier etti Permet it rere aec ex ehe te Y i 345 SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Configuring VSA Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector
305. ata use the same port 3 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 327 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 152 Harmonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 153 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 326 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second harmonic to cover the band s frequency range For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 325 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which of the available harmonic orders of the LO is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of har monic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable
306. ated from the detected data RST DDATa Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 209 SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe lt KnownDataState gt This command selects the Known Data state The use of known data is a prerequisite for the BER measurement and can also be used for the fine sync Configuring Setting parameters lt KnownDataState gt 11 0 5 0 Manual operation See Known Data page 148 SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME lt FileName gt This command selects the Known Data file Setting parameters lt FileName gt string Manual operation See Load Data File on page 148 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop lt CompAmptDroop gt This command switches the compensation of the amplitude droop on or off Setting parameters lt CompAmptDroop gt OFF 110 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM on page 204 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift lt CarrFreqDrift gt This command defines whether the carrier frequency drift is compensated for FSK modulation Setting parameters lt CarrFreqDrift gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Compensate for FSK on page 205 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CHANnel lt TransmitChannel gt This command switches the channel compensation on or off With equalizer only Setting parameters lt TransmitChannel gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Compensate for PSK MSK ASK
307. ation See Alpha BT on page 144 See Alpha BT on page 212 SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME Name This command selects a transmit filter and automatically switches it on For more information on transmit filters refer to chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 479 Setting parameters Name string Name of the Transmit filter an overview of available transmit fil ters is provided in chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 479 Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 464 Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 144 See Load User Filter on page 144 SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe lt TXFilterState gt Use this command to switch the transmit filter off To switch a transmit filter on use the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command 11 5 1 2 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt TXFilterState gt ON OFF 1 0 OFF Switches the transmit filter off ON Switches the transmit filter specified by SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command automati cally switches the filter on RST 1 Manual operation See Transmit Filter Type on page 144 SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects a user defined transmit filter file Setting parameters lt FilterName gt The name
308. ation See Connected Instrument on page 162 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 162 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 162 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer Level Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is installed Configuring Parameters Level numeric value Range to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 162 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 162 The availa bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using
309. ation on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus In this section only the status registers bits specific to the VSA application are descri bed For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual Status Reporting System o RST does not influence the status registers Description of the Status Registers In addition to the registers provided by the base system the following registers are used in the VSA application e STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt provides information any limit violations that occur after demodulation in one of the 4 windows e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM limit violations in EVM evalua tion e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude limit violations in Mag nitude Error evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency limit violations Car rier Frequency evaluation STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt I
310. ation type Rotating sissies sis Rotating differential issiria 80 Synibol MAPPING innt trees 73 Q QAM Error model Modulation type 3 Symbol mapplhQ zi respeta Continuous 0 ccccccesssssecceeecessscneceeeeesessnenectenerees Measurement example eren 9 LI C Offset symbol mapping m Programming example eere Quadrature Amplitude Modulation See OAM eR 86 Quadrature error NER TT 112 Formula Preconditions for measurement Quick Config MACES NER CCS 218 R R amp S DiglGODf eerte eret retten EO e 162 R amp S EX IQ BOX 162 AST EE ER 178 Range per division nc e TA A n 177 Raw data 219 Real Imag IReSulbtyD8 tror tie Ferner Bri re Fx bene e qe Cete 47 euge EOE 59 Record length CTU ION sii Relationship to sample rate Recording tool Known data 2002 2 000 000000 248 Reference 201 Reference deviation Definition 12 correr ten terae beares reo dne FSK Reference filter Reference level Auto level 171 175 214
311. ator Carrier offset i Compensate Auras Timing Gain Fig 1 1 Reconstruction of the reference and measured waveforms for FSK modulation Note that a reference deviation error is corrected in the reference frequency trace This ensures that the frequency deviation in the measured frequency trace corresponds to that of the originally measured signal With respect to the reconstruction the mea sured magnitude is timing compensated using the timing offset estimated from the measured instantaneous frequency This ensures that the measured magnitude and frequency remain synchronized in the reconstructed waveform A 6 2 Result Summary Evaluations The evaluations for the result summary take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 This value can be one of the following e 1 only the symbol instant contributes to the result e 2 two samples per symbol instant contribute to the result required for offset QPSK e the Sample rate defined for data acquisition see Sample Rate on page 182 all samples contribute to the result equally The results are determined by the evaluation range The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Tp equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter 6 2 1 Formulae PSK QAM and MSK Modulation
312. atter Symbol Check ME 1213 0 0 1 32 213101011312 101313127911 61211111312 0 270 Fig 4 49 Pattern Symbol Check algorithm The Equalizer A possible source of high modulation errors of the DUT with PSK and QAM signals is a non flat frequency response or ripple in frequency response within the modulation bandwidth This could be caused by the DUT s e Analog filter sections e Digital filter sections if a shortened filter length is used e Digital arithmetic sections if a shortened bit length is used R amp S FSW K70 200Measurement Basics Analyzer Meas Demodulation MEAS IQ Meas Filter Filter Signal Error of Transfer Function Fig 4 50 General processing in the modulation and demodulation stages An equalizer filter with a reverse frequency response characteristic is able to compen sate less distorted frequency responses in order to improve the modulation analysis results see figure 4 51 Analyzer Meas Demodulation IQ Meas Filter Filter Signal Compensation Function Error of Transfer Function Fig 4 51 Compensation of the transfer function s error by inserting an equalizer in the receive path For small distortions the reference signal can be determined correctly without pre equalization The equalizer can be calculated by comparing the reference signal and the measured signal and is only applied to the measured signal This is referred to as normal equalizer mode Note that the r
313. attern is indicated by a green background in the symbol table If during demodulation individual symbols do not match the pattern after all these symbols are indicated by a red frame 4 Symbols Hexadecimal i anla aniar alas iha o m e gt O O O O 0 0 0 gt O O e ph Ld Ld O O 10 10 m m k O m S S P ph m m IH m I I HP I IC I m I OOl Ole O Pattern Not Found Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL XTIM DDEM SYMB to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on 419 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on 434 and chapter 11 9 2 4 Symbols on page 436 3 2 31 Vector Frequency The instantenous frequency of the source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 are drawn and connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 53 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 32 Vector Freq Meas amp Ref 1M CIW Fig 3 23 Resul
314. available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V Suffix lt ch gt 1 4 Selects the input channel Parameters lt CMOffset gt Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V TRACe IQ APCon STATe State If enabled the average power consumption is calculated at the end of the data measurement This command must be set before the measurement is performed The conversion factors A and B for the calculation are defined using TRACe 10 APCon A and TRACe IQ APCon B The results can be queried using TRACe APCon RESu1t on 343 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example RST TRAC STAT ON Q Q SRAT 1MHZ TRAC IQ RLEN 1000000 Q APC STAT ON Q APC A 3 0 TRAC IQ APC B 0 6 NIT WAI TRAC IQ APC RES Configuring VSA TRACe IQ APCon A lt ConvFact gt Defines the conversion factor A for the calculation of the average power consumption Parameters lt gt numeric value RST 1 0 TRACe IQ APCon B lt gt Defines the conversion factor B for the calculation of the average power consumption Parameters lt gt numeric value RST 0 0 TRACe IQ APCon RESulIt Queries the average power consumption for an analog baseband input This value is only calculated
315. balance 0 01 Quadrature Error 0 14 0 000 53 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 Equalizer Filter characteristics of the equalizer used to compensate for channel distortion and parameters of the distortion itself The default result type is Frequency Response Magnitude The following result types are available chapter 3 2 18 Impulse Response Magnitude on page 38 chapter 3 2 19 Impulse Response Phase on page 39 chapter 3 2 20 Impulse Response Real Imag on page 39 chapter 3 2 16 Frequency Response Magnitude on page 36 chapter 3 2 17 Frequency Response Phase on page 37 chapter 3 2 15 Frequency Response Group Delay on page 35 chapter 3 2 3 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude on page 23 chapter 3 2 2 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay on page 23 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU see LAYout ADD WINDow on 419 Lum moo eec woe a User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 18 Result Types in 3 2 Result Types in VSA The available result types for a window depend on the selected evaluation data source The SCPI parameters in the following table refer to the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 Table 3 1 Available result types depending on data source Evaluation Data Result Type SCPI Parameter
316. be deleted must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 373 Usage Event Manual operation See Delete on page 198 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA lt Data gt This command defines the sync sequence of a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 373 Important The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation e g for an 8PSK modulation the value range is from 0 to 7 The degree of modulation belongs to the pattern and is set using the DDEM SEAR SYNC NST command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on 373 Configuring VSA Setting parameters Data string Four values represent a symbol hexadecimal format The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation With a degree of modulation of 4 all symbols have a value range of 0000 0001 0002 0003 With a degree of modulation of 8 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Example DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00010000FFFF Defines the pattern data Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Edit on page 197 See New on page 197 See Symbols on page 200 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME lt Name gt This command selects a sync pattern for editing or for a new entry Setting parameters
317. ble Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 157 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS 260 Manual operation See Comment on page 159 Configuring SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascendi
318. bol mapping hexadecimal and binary the figure shows the upper right sections of the diagram only Fig 4 39 Constellation diagram for 256QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only 5 5 5 D S 55 Be Ze Be Ee Re 55 Be ge ge e Ze Ze ze de Je Fe Ye B Ge fe Eo Ee Be Se ge ge Ge Le Ze te Se Yo Se Ue Uo ie ge ee es 28 Be Be So e ge 2e e So ge ge Je e ge Be Ze Ge Be Be Be 8 Ee 25 de Be be de de Go Yo te e Be e Be Se 5e 39 Se pe Se Ge je e fe Ge e Xe de Se Ee De 2e S 5 3 3 3 gt 5 i di 2 Ss Ze Je Fo Ce Se Be Be ge Ge Se Se Se Se ge Be Ne be ge Be Ne be de Be He be Ze Be Be Se Se Se Se Se 5 Se 5 2 8 ge Je Ze pe fe Se Se Se Be EG Bege gege ge ge ge pe Ue Ue Ge Ge Be He Be o EE ge Ee Bo De De De De De Be Be Se S 5 de Yo be be be r Be Se Se Se Se Se de de de de Be Ue 0
319. by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as int16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt Data File Format iq tar lt PowerVsTime gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 134 lt float gt lt float gt 142 lt float gt lt float gt 140 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 71 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt PowerVsTime gt lt Spectrum gt lt Min gt lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 133 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt float 69 float float 70 float lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt
320. cation pro vides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product F SW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the VSA Application The application adds a new application to the R amp S FSW To activate the VSA application 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel of the R amp S FSW A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the VSA item Understanding the Display Information An VSA The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the VSA application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the VSA Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 3 Configuration Overview on page 138 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same a
321. ce 286 Obtaining Technical SUDDO dieci nee 293 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting If you experience a concrete measurement problem you might want to try solving it with the help of the flow chart Troubleshooting Overview Flow Chart for Troubleshooting Press Preset in order to start from a known state Y Check the following parameters at the DUT and the K70 Center frequency Reference Level overload Symbol rate Transmit filter Modulation Type Demodulation Failed dications are e g Sync Failed Unstable Message in the Status Bar The measurement Constellation does not look at all like constellation Check the Input RF Baseband Sideband inversion Swap IQ Sus Y To make sure you realize once the problem is fixed Switch on the EVM trace and keep an eye on it Ve Y Press the SWEEP Hardkey and set the statistic count to 1 Then press Single Sweep The analyzer will stop capturing IQ data which makes it easier for you to debug measurement Mag CapBuffer e colored bar Result Range in a range where you expect the signal to have the set modulation no See part 2 yes Try to increase Run In and Run Out in the Signal Description gt Signal Structure dialog Is your signal bursted Is Sync prefers more valid
322. ce aa vues 459 lt gt 459 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVENIt J eese 459 lt gt 459 lt gt 459 lt gt 459 lt gt 1 459 lt gt 459 lt gt 459 460 STATus QUEStGtabls S YNODEVENIP ext ab the tate ax rena aa 460 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle eeeesesssssese ense 460 STATus QUESEonable DIQ ENABIe 12 der x 460 STATus QUEStIanable FREQuency ENABle 2 1 cee coe eet eet eod enean eee 460 STATus Q
323. ce types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FEED XFR DDEM RAT to define the frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 425 CALC FORM MAGN to define the magnitude result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on 434 and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 437 Frequency Response Phase The frequency response phase of the equalizer is derived from the Frequency Response Magnitude Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FEED XFR DDEM RAT User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 37 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 18 to define the frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 425 CALC FORM UPH to define the unwrapped phase result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 437 Impulse Response Magnitude The impulse response magnitude of the equalizer shows the filter in the time domain 3 ImpRespMag Equalizer
324. ch BURSt CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the search tolerance and the min gap length to their default values Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Burst Configuration on page 193 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt GLENgth MINimum lt MinGapLength gt This command defines the minimum time between two bursts A minimum time with decreased level must occur between two bursts The default unit is symbol The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MinGapLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Manual operation See Min Gap Length on page 193 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that a measurement is performed only if a burst is found The command is available only if the burst search is activated see SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe on page 369 11 5 6 2 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt MEAS BURS MEAS Measurement is always performed BURS Measurement is performed only if a burst is found RST MEAS Manual operation See Measuring only if burst was found on page 193 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe lt SearchState gt This command switches the search for a signal burst on or off Setting parameters lt SearchState gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 SENSe DDEMod SEARch
325. ch a burst is detected in the captured data can be configured either manually or automatically according to the defined signal structure settings see Burst Settings on page 145 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO on page 368 Search Tolerance Burst Configuration Defines the number of symbols that may differ from the burst length without influencing the burst detection A search tolerance of 5 for example with a minimum and maxi mum burst length of 100 will detect bursts that are 95 to 100 symbols long The mini mum and maximum burst length is defined in the Signal Structuresettings Note Due to the fact that the VSA does not have knowledge of the ramp length there is an uncertainty in the burst search algorithm Thus setting this parameter to O will result in a failed burst search for most signals Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance on page 369 Min Gap Length Burst Configuration Represents the minimum distance in symbols between adjacent bursts The default value is 1 symbol in order to make sure that the burst search finds bursts that are very close to each other However in case the capture buffer does not contain very close bursts it is recommended that you increase the value This makes the burst search faster and also more robust for highly distorted signals Note that this parameter only influences the robustness of the burst
326. cluding the logical symbol mapping hexadeci mal and binary 1011 1001 0001 0011 1010 1000 0000 0010 1110 1100 0100 0110 1111 1101 0101 0111 Fig 4 34 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for EDGE hexa decimal and binary 1011 1001 0010 0011 1010 1000 0000 0001 1101 1100 0100 0110 1111 1110 0101 0111 Fig 4 35 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary 11010 11110 01011 01111 Fig 4 36 Constellation diagram for 32QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexa decimal and binary 001000 001001 001101 001100 e e e 001010 001011 001111 001110 000010 000011 000111 000110 000000 000001 000101 000100 Fig 4 37 Constellation diagram 64QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C decimal and binary the binary form shows the upper right section of the diagram only 0011010 0011011 0001011 0001010 0011000 0011001 0001001 0001000 0010000 0010001 0010101 0010100 0011100 0011101 0010010 0010011 0010111 0010110 0011110 0011111 0000010 0000011 0000111 0000110 0001110 0001111 0000000 0000001 0000101 0000100 0001100 0001101 Fig 4 38 Constellation diagram 128QAM including the logical sym
327. costeras 221 TIVO 222 ROC T 221 Matched Peers toner 59 Max Peak leui A HR 224 Maximizing Windows remote e 418 FORMU ERE 490 Meas 4 Ref Eel or ResultityD8S erem mereri MEAS TINGE a ciao tenti inet dee RUNS Meas only if burst was found E Measurement bandwidth Measurement channel Creating remote ior rec 301 Deleting remote Duplicating remote nec tette Querying remote ie nia eec te Renaming remote Replacing remote tr erem Measurement example Burst GSM EDGE Signals 266 CONTINUOUS QPSK nis 258 Measurement examples Burst GSM EDGE signal remote 465 Continuous QPSK signal remote 464 Measurement filter 60 Alphial inr e eerie 212 Configuration ntt rrt rn 210 Configuration remote 385 BDemodulation process rre 96 Eriabling 211 Loading crt ien 212 480 TYDE 212 User defined 2 rmn 212 Measurement ranges Comparison E Measurement signal treten 218
328. d on page 137 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue This command restores the default settings of the currently selected standard Usage Event SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE lt gt This command stores the current settings of the vector signal analysis as a new defined digital standard If the name of the digital standard is already in use an error message is output and a new name has to be selected It is recommended that you define a comment before storing the standard Setting parameters lt FileName gt string The path and file name to which the settings are stored Example DDEM STAN COMM GSM AccessBurst with Pattern Defines a comment for the settings DDEM STAN SAVE C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Stores the settings in the user defined digital standard USER_GSM Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Usage Setting only Manual operation See Save Standard on page 137 11 5 Configuring VSA e Signal Description reciente vies deed Re eene e Epor e ERR EROR ERRARE 307 Input Output dnd Frontend Setllis odere eter tet Rte errans 318 e Signal taces de ce 357 e Triggertg co ed re reri ue 360 e Gotnfiguring SWOG S ecce ctr ttn dn ved E aeu gd td d i d d a cn 366 11 5 1 11 5 1 1 Configuring VSA e Confi
329. d Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values State DETected NDETected RST NDETected Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input I 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values Type String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only 11 5 2 6 11 5 2 7 Configuring Output Settings The following command is required only if output is provided to the IF OUT connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW OUTPut IF SBANd This command queries the sideband provided at the IF OUT connector compared to the sideband of the RF signal The sideband depends on the current center frequency Return values lt SideBand gt NORMal The sideband at the output is identical to the RF signal INVerted The sideband at the output is the inverted RF signal sideband Example OUTP IF IF2 Activates output at the IF OUTPUT 2 GHZ connector OUTP IF SBAN Queries the sideband provided at the connector Usage Query only Manual operation See IF Video Output on page 166 Frequency SENSe FREQUGNGy CENTE 2 ette edt dodi tet eyed daa ead anu
330. d VSA standard are available for the pattern search To add a predefined pattern to a standard 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab How to Perform Customized Measurements 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 In the list of All Patterns select the required pattern If the required pattern is not displayed see To change the display for the list of patterns on page 246 4 Select Add to Standard The selected pattern is inserted in the list of Standard Patterns 5 Select the pattern to be used for the pattern search from the list of Standard Pat terns To remove a predefined pattern from a standard 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the pattern from the list of Standard Patterns 4 Select Remove from Standard The pattern is removed from the list of Standard Patterns and is no longer assigned to the current standard but is still available for assignment from the list of All Patterns 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pattern 1 In the Overview select Signal Description and switch to the Signal Structure tab 2 Select Pattern Config to display the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box 3 Select the New button The pattern definition dialog
331. d mode is possible max 160 MHz bandwidth Parameters State OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Manual operation See Digital Baseband Output on page 167 OUTPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q data output to the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device 10 of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt NotUsed gt to be ignored lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done 11 5 2 4 Configuring VSA PRBSTestState State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt NotUsed gt to be ignored lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example OUTP DIQ CDEV Result SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Manual operation See Output Settings Information on page 167 See Connected Instrument on page 168 Configuring Input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 The following com
332. d specific measurement filters is shown in chapter A 6 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 493 R amp S FSW K70 Annex A 3 3 Typical Combinations of Tx and Measurement Filters Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in table 1 4 they can be set in the VSA application using Meas filter AUTO see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 211 Table 1 4 Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters Transmit filter Measurement filter Remarks analyzer RC raised cosine filter combination without intersymbol interfer ence 151 RRC root raised cosine RRC filter combination without ISI GMSK filter combination with low ISI Linearized GMSK EDGE NSR standard specific filter filter combination with ISI Gauss filter combination with low ISI Rectangular filter combination without ISI Half Sine filter combination without 151 CDMA2000 1X FORWARD Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X REVERSE Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H CPM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H DQPSK Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Narrow standard s
333. d the measured signal Normal mode is sufficient for small distortions and performance remains high 5 9 2 Demodulation Settings Tracking The results of the equalizer in the previous sweep are considered to calculate the new filter until adaquate results are obtained This learning effect allows for powerful removement of larger distortions within a minimum of sweeps During the tracking phase calculation of the equalizer requires additional processing time Freeze The filter is no longer changed the current equalizer values are used for subsequent sweeps User A user defined equalizer loaded from a file is used Averaging The results of the equalizer in all previous sweeps since the instru ment was switched on or the equalizer was reset are considered to calculate the new filter To start a new averaging process select the Reset Equalizer button Calculation of the equalizer requires addi tional processing time Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 380 Filter Length Equalizer Settings Defines the length of the equalizer in symbols The longer the equalizer the more accurate the filter becomes and the more distortion can be compensated However this requires extended calculation time The shorter the filter length the less calculation time is required during the equalizer s tracking or averaging phase Remote command SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth on page 379 Reset Equalizer
334. d to the FSK reference deviation 1 3 1 3 Fig 4 27 Constellation diagram 4AFSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers 1 3 Fig 4 28 Constellation diagram for GRAY including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers 1 3 Fig 4 29 Constellation diagram for for APCO C4FM and APCO Phase 2 including the logical symbol mapping 8FSK NATURAL Symbol 3 Numbers Fig 4 30 Constellation diagram for 8FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 4 3 7 Minimum Shift Keying MSK MSK modulation causes modulation dependent phase shifts of 90 which can be shown in an Constellation diagram As with PSK demodulation is performed by evaluation of the phase positions Table 4 13 MSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 Table 4 14 MSK GSM Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 4 3 8 Fig 4 31 MSK for GSM and NATURAL and DMSK Constellation Diagram including the symbol ping Similar to PSK differential coding can also be used with MSK In this case too the information is repre
335. d when Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB also using the rotary knob Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed Input Output and Frontend Settings NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 350 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 350 Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 If option R amp S FSW B25 is installed you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span 213 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the elec
336. dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Configuring TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 187 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered For compatibility reasons this command is also availab
337. da nn rna nr nua aan 391 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window on page 177 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once in all windows then switched off again Usage Event Manual operation See Auto Scale All on page 215 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 215 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Configuring Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automati
338. de a satisfactory sol ution In this case do the following Increase the Correlation Threshold Specify the expected position of the pattern within the burst by adjusting the Offset parameter Message Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols Note Note that this message does not necessarily indicate a problem Its purpose is to inform you that you might have the opportunity to get a more stable demodulation and or better measurement results by improving your setup Synchronization in the VSA application is performed in two stages coarse synchroni zation that precedes the reference signal generation and fine synchronization based on the reference signal coarse synchronization stage can work data aided i e based on a known pat tern or non data aided i e based on the unknown data symbols The default is a non data aided coarse synchronization In the case that a pattern is part of signal the user can switch to data aided synchronization e The fine synchronization stage always works data aided Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols indicates that one of the synchronization stages has too few symbols to ensure that the synchronization is robust The message is given if e Coarse Synchronization Non Data Aided User Pattern for Sync Off Estimation range shorter than 40 symbols see chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 107 e Fine Synchronization Estimation range shorter than 10 symbols User Manual
339. details on the estimation range see Estimation ranges on page 107 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Compute Reference Waveform Estimate Timing Ref deviation Compute Meas Frequency Filter Carrier offset Carrier drift Signal Estimate Gain Amp droop Compute Magnitude Fig 4 63 FSK Estimation Strategy In figure 4 68 MEAS n denotes the sampled complex baseband measured signal waveform The magnitude samples are denoted Aye s n while the instantaneous fre quency samples of the measured and reference signals are denoted by fugas n and fre n respectively The dashed outline of the Meas Filter block indicates that this operation is optionally de activated based on the corresponding user settings see Type on page 212 For the estimation of the magnitude parameters the following least squares criterion is minimized 2 Ea Auzas n Ke n with respect to the model parameters K and where Tg denotes the sampling period used for estimation see Estimation Points Sym on page 208 For estimation of the frequency parameters the following least squares criterion is minimized 2 uzasQ i 1 7 Jot farn Tr with respect to the model parameters B fo f and 7 The term denotes the reference instantaneous frequency with a possibly fractional delay of samples For FSK modulation the default sampling p
340. diagrams show the equivalent com plex baseband signal Modulation Error Ratio MER The modulation error ratio MER is closely related to EVM MER 20 where the EVM is normalized to the mean reference power Symbol Rate Error SRE The symbol rate error SRE describes the difference between the defined reference symbol rate and the currently measured symbol rate in relation to the reference symbol rate The value is given in parts per million ppm SR meas 5 SRret SRE Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Currently the SRE is only calculated for PSK QAM and User QAM modulation and only if compensation for SRE is activated see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Com pensation on page 203 Example For a defined symbol rate of SRge 1 MHz and a measured symbol rate of SRweas 999 9 kHz the symbol rate error is SRE 999 9 1000 1000 1 1 000 000 ppm 100 ppm Offset Origin Offset Quadrature Fig 4 57 Effect of an or origin offset after demodulation and error compensation The effect of an offset in the transmitter is shown in figure 4 57 The offset be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the offset does not affect the EVM R amp S9FSW K70 200Measurement Basics Example The following figures compare the results for a compensated offset of 2 596 and a
341. dow settings are available for some result types Manual configuration of VSA windows is described in chapter 6 5 1 Window Configu ration on page 228 Useful commands for configuring the window described elsewhere LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 Configuring the Result Display Remote commands exclusive to configuring VSA windows GALCulatesn DDEM SPEGtrum STAT ome ere 425 e Nei ilz 425 M 426 GAL Culatesns STATistics CODP STAT amp unitaire 428 lt gt 5 428 DISPlayEWINDowens HTEMELINE EVAL e aterert etat tee nee cule ctn 428 BISPlay WINDowsns 429 bISPlayPWINDowensPRATe VAlue titer petente Mete 430 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe SYMBJOl sesenta 430 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MODE sesenta 430 CALCulate lt n gt DDEM SPECtrum STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the result type transformation to spectrum mode Spectral evaluation is available for the following result types e MAGNitude e PHASe UPHase e FREQuency e Real Imag RIMAG The result types are defined using the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat
342. dulated signal the signal processing differs to an PSK QAM MSK modulated signal The estimation model does not minimize the EVM but the error of the instantaneous frequency see chapter 4 5 2 1 Error Model on page 118 There fore the measurement value that corresponds to the EVM value for FSK is the the Fre quency Error Absolute Relative Source Type Modulation Error Result Type Fre quency Error Absolute Relative Obtaining Technical Support If problems occur the instrument generates error messages which in most cases will be sufficient for you to detect the cause of an error and find a remedy Error messages are described in chapter 10 2 Explanation of Error Messages on page 277 In addition our customer support centers are there to assist you in solving any prob lems that you may encounter with your R amp S FSW We will find solutions more quickly and efficiently if you provide us with the information listed below System Configuration The System Configuration dialog box in the Setup menu provides information on Hardware Info hardware assemblies Versions and Options the status of all software and hardware options instal led on your instrument System Messages messages on any errors that may have occurred An xml file with information on the system configuration device footprint can be created automatically using the DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo command or as described in To collect th
343. dulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Pattern Settings on page 146 Remote command 5 5 DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 371 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO on page 370 Correlation Threshold The I Q correlation threshold decides whether a match is accepted or not during a pat tern search see also chapter 4 4 2 I Q Pattern Search on page 98 If the parameter is set to 10096 only patterns that match totally with the input signal are found This is only the case for infinite SNR Burst and Pattern Configuration If the threshold Auto option is enabled the default value of 9096 is used As long as the pattern is found there is no need to change this parameter However if the pattern is very short approximately 10 symbols or if the signal is highly distorted tuning this parameter helps the pattern search to succeed To define a threshold manually disa ble the Auto option Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold on page 370 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO on page 369 Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid pattern has been found When measuring signals that contain a pattern and are aver aged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging
344. e DDEMod APSK NSTate on page 308 FSK Ref Deviation FSK only The FSK Reference Deviation sets the deviation to the reference frequency In case of 2FSK it indicates the distance from the reference frequency to the positive negative deviation frequency and in case of 4FSK the distance to the outer positive negative deviation frequency To set the deviation as a multiple of the symbol rate x SR select Relative mode set the deviation as an absolute value in Hz select Absolute mode Note that this parameter is available only for FSK modulated signals Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue on page 308 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence RELative on page 307 Modulation Mapping The available mapping types depend on the Modulation Type and Modulation Order For more information on the modulation mapping refer to chapter 4 3 Symbol Map ping on page 73 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue on page 310 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog on page 310 Symbol Rate The symbol rate also determines the bandwidth of the data recording and demodu lation You can change the default rate by entering a value in Hz The minimum symbol rate is 25 Hz The maximum symbol rate depends on the defined Sample Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 64 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SRATe on page 313 Sig
345. e CORR6 ction CVL B AS i iato err he Exe errata tnt Ey EXER TS NI 328 SENSe GORREction CVIEIGATAIOG 25 eun ione rt O e tensions xg Bex XE EY OOo 329 SENSe CORR6ection VI CLEATr enceinte re ee n E ERG SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent SENSe GOIRection CVI DAN secre oec teo rere Sonar th b RE Rb iy ee ve ER SENSe CORRection CVI HATMOTIIG 52i corr retener rendre nte en reor SENSe CORR6 ction CVE MIX6r eain cnr enr ra enn tk irte e th he pee Rer rh E REY EET RENE SENSE GCORRECHON C Ilo SENSe CORR6ection SEL CCH rnt rtp nett re ere a en RE FE eh 5 SNUMABALF 2 cocos c tun ecc SENSe DDEMod APSK NSTate SENSe DDEMOG ASK NST le tectorio rtp t y adc nete eH ee e SENSe IDDBEMOG EGALC OFESOEL iic erp tri derer yea caet e eere va E terea b creto Ea SENSe DDEMOG EGALGEMOBDB SENSe DDEMod EPRate AU TO octets ee ce eee SENSe DBEMod EPRate VAL it to erint cere Renten Te nere E dei nn SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LENGth SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer LOAD SENSe
346. e lt n gt suffix Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtifyl WINDow 2 command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index 11 8 3 Configuring the Result Display Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 for a list of availa ble window types LAY out WINDow lt n gt TYPe Queries the window type of the window specified by the index lt n gt For a list of possi ble window types see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 Example LAY WIND2 TYPE Response MACC Modulation accuracy Usage Query only VSA Window Configuration For each window you can select a different evaluation method result type based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration Further win
347. e not the instantaneous frequency or magnitude of the signal The VSA application defines the error signal as the difference between the reference signal and the measurement signal Thus the measurement filter also shapes the spectrum of the error signal which is used to calculate the EVM for example In many applications the measurement filter is the same as the RX filter However unlike the measurement filter the RX filter is not relevant for the measurement but is only required to create the reference signal optimally The RX filter and the transmit filter are usually chosen such that their combination results in an Inter Symbol Interference ISI free system see figure 4 2 and figure 4 3 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Set by user Auto Auto Function Auto Function of TX Filter fct CaptureOV of TX Filter symbol rate 7777 4 Symbols bits Demodulation filter of IQ capture 8 symbol with Dp decision Symbols IQ Signal REF Signal HW 5 5 Correction S Parameters z Signal 2 I processing a DUT correction of p Analyzer estimated Transmitter mu 2 5 n Fig 4 2 Measurement filter the block diagram PSK QAM UserQAM k TX Filter Any QAM Any PSK 6 ped Map bits to TX Filter e Polar to instantaneous frequency cartesian frequency pulse f Magnitude
348. e Absolute see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration on page 263 3 Press RUN SINGLE The rising and falling edges of the burst in the selected result range are displayed in window 4 You could now add an average trace to evaluate the rising and falling edges further E User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 271 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 d amp m Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 24 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 200 SGL Stat Count 8 BURST PATTERN A EVM 1 B Result Summary Phase Err RMS Gain Imbalance In I Q Capture Amplitude Droop Start 26 sym i 5 Stop 174 sym j Mag CapBuf D MagAbs Meas amp Ref 1 i 1 1 1 1 j Pattern Search Start 0 sym Stop 10000 sym Start 26 sym 87 10 2010 13 32 07 Fig 9 10 Result range that exceeds the burst length 9 3 5 Setting the Evaluation Range In some scenarios such as in Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges the result range contains symbols that are not supposed to be considered for the EVM or other calculated parameters that are displayed in the Result Summary Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range To change the evaluated data 1 Start from the configuration described in chapter 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 271 2 Display the constellation diagram of the signal in window 1 Source Meas amp Ref Signal Result type Constellation 1 0 see
349. e I Q data acquisition digital decimation filters are used internally The passband of these digital filters determines the maximum usable bandwidth In consequence signals within the usable bandwidth passband remain unchanged while signals outside the usable bandwidth passband are suppressed Usually the suppressed signals are noise artifacts and the second IF side band If frequencies of interest to you are also suppressed you should try to increase the output sample rate since this increases the maximum usable bandwidth User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 65 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth o Bandwidth extension options The maximum usable bandwidth provided by the R amp S FSW in the basic installation can be extended by additional options These options can either be included in the ini tial installation B options or updated later U options The maximum bandwidth provi ded by the individual option is indicated by its number for example B40 extends the bandwidth to 40 MHz Note that the U options as of U40 always require all lower bandwidth options as a pre requisite while the B options already include them Max usable Required B option Required U option s BW 10 MHz 28 MHz B28 U28 40 MHz 40 U28 U40 B28 U40 80 MHz B80 U28 U40 U80 or B28 U40 U80 or B40 U80 160 MHz B160 U28 U40 U80 U160 or B28 U40 U80 U160 or B40 U80 U160 or B8
350. e analyzer in order to measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 319 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available Analyzer and thus in all applications in MSRA operating mode Realtime and thus in all applications in MSRT operating mode Multi Carrier Group Delay GSM VSA Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 320 Preamplifier option B24 If option R amp S FSW B24 is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze sig
351. e any xml editing tool you like following the rules described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 483 Before loading the file to the VSA application make sure the syntax of your file is valid Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences 1 Import or apply input data for which stable demodulation results are available to the VSA application If necessary adapt demodulation settings until the requested results are obtained 2 Start the R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences from the Windows task bar on the R amp S FSW or execute the file RecordingToolforSequences EXE from the installation directory on the instrument The R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences window is displayed R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences amp HR M Configuration VISA TCPIP localhost Results Analyzed Sequences 33 Modulation PSK Format NORM 8 ResultLength 148 Different Sequences 83 Last New Sequence Found 0 ago Throughput 0 72 kSymbols s Store for 7 Run Stop Reset 3 Start a measurement in the VSA application 4 the tool window select Run The tool records the demodulated data sequences The following result info
352. e blue bar representing the result range to a different position in the capture buffer Continuous and discrete result ranges Depending on the type of signal and your result range definition the result ranges may be continuous or discrete Bursted signals commonly have several discrete result ranges at the bursts with intervals during the noise periods which should not be inclu ded in the results see figure 4 67 Continuous signals on the other hand have result ranges that cover the entire ora specific part of the capture buffer without intervals C Mag CapBuf 40 dBm 60 dBm 80 dBm Fig 4 68 Result ranges for a continuous signal Result Range Length The result range length is defined by the number of symbols that are to be demodula ted All traces over time are displayed over the result range For example if you have a User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 124 R amp S9FSW K70 200Measurement Basics burst of 100 symbols and you define the result length as 200 symbols you can exam ine the burst ramps in detail by selecting the alignment Burst Center The maximum result length is 64 000 symbols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 sam ples Result Range Alignment By defining the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment ref erence source burst capture buffer or pattern you can define an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the si
353. e command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps See also INI Tiate CONTinuous on 392 Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt This command queries the first value of the x axis in symbols or time depending on the unit setting for the x axis Note using the CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet com mand the burst is shifted in the diagram the x axis thus no longer begins on the left at 0 symbols but at a selectable value Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Usage Query only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STOP This command queries the last value of the x axis in symbols or time depending on the unit setting for the x axis Note If the burst is shifted using the CALC TRAC ALIG commands the x axis no lon ger begins at 0 symbols on the left but at a user defined value Example CALC TRAC ADJ BURS
354. e con sidered for the EVM or other calculated parameters that are displayed in the Result Summary For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range See also chapter 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 271 The evaluation range is always equal to or smaller than the result range and defines e The range over which traces that do not have a time axis are displayed e g polar diagrams User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 125 R amp S FSW K70 200Measurement Basics 4 7 e The range over which the following parameters are calculated for the Result Sum mary EVM MER Phase Error Magnitude Error Power Evaluation range display In all displays over time except for capture buffer displays the evaluation range is indi cated by red lines D MagAbs MeastRef Start 26 sym Stop 174sym Fig 4 69 Evaluation lines in absolute magnitude diagram In symbol tables the evaluated symbols are indicated by red square brackets D Symbol Table Hexadecimal SS In other result displays that are based on the evaluation range only two red vertical lines are displayed in the diagram header to indicate a limited evaluation basis B Result Summary Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol Estimation points per sy
355. e demodulation bandwidth and thus the usable bandwidth The maximum sample rate depends on the defined Symbol Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 64 For details on selecting the suitable sample rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Sym bol Rate and Bandwidth page 64 Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 357 Maximum Bandwidth Defines the maximum bandwidth to be used by the R amp S FSW for data acquisition This setting is only available if the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 is installed Otherwise the maximum bandwidth is determined automatically For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 65 Auto Default All installed bandwidth extension options are activated The currently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 65 Note that using bandwidth extension options R amp S FSW B160 B320 may cause more spurious effects option B500 does not 80 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 80 MHz The bandwidth extension options R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 are deactivated 160 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 160 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B320 is deactivated Not available or required if bandwidth exten
356. e g of a MIMO signal contained in the nels I Q data binary file For multi channels the samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the data file see chapter A 7 2 Data Binary File on page 503 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the 1 data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt lt 2 gt valid Windows file name Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 int64 see DataType element Examples e xyz complex 1ch float32 xyz polar 1ch floato4 xyzreal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 UserData Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that preview can be only displayed
357. e in the Input Output and Frontend Settings smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision on page 354 5 5 5 4 Units You can configure the units for both axes of the diagrams The unit settings are displayed when you do one of the following e Select Input Frontend from the Overview and then switch to the Unit tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Unit Config softkey Amplitude Hz Res Len mel Amplitude YScale Unit Y Axis Unit 1 MagAbs Meas amp Ref Note that unit settings window specific as opposed to the amplitude settings P P 179 QS icd T E 180 X Axis Unit Defines the unit of the x axis in the current result diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME on page 354 Signal Capture Y Axis Unit Defines the unit of the y axis in the current result diagram Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SPACing on page 356 For phase diagrams CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe on page 354 For statistics CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 354 For equalizer group delay diagrams CALCulatecn Y UNIT TIME on page 354 5 6 Signal Capture The Signal Capture settings define how much how and when data is captured from the input signal The Signal Capture settings are displayed whe
358. e pattern is part of the signal but also to use the pattern for synchronization in order to obtain the correct reference signal For details on synchronization see chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Proc ess on page 94 If Auto mode is selected the detected data is used In manual mode you can select one of the following settings Data Default the detected data is used for synchronization i e unknown symbols Use this setting if no pattern is available or if the pattern is short or does not have suitable synchronization properties e g a pattern that consists of only one repeated symbol Pattern Known symbols from a defined pattern are used for synchronization Depending on the signal using the pattern can speed up your mea surement considerably and make it more robust against high carrier frequency offsets Make sure that the pattern is suitable for synchronization e g a GSM pattern Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh PATTern SYNC AUTO on page 385 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe on page 385 Fine Synchronization In addition to the coarse synchronization used for symbol decisions a fine synchroni zation is available to calculate various results from the reference signal e g the EVM However when the signal is known to have a poor transmission quality or has a high noise level false symbol decisions are more frequent which may cause spikes in the EVM results
359. e support information on page 294 Error Log The RSError 10g in the log directory of the main installation directory contains a chronological record of errors Obtaining Technical Support e Support file a zip file with important support information can be created auto matically The zip file contains the system configuration information device foot print the current eeprom data and a screenshot of the screen display To collect the support information 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Select Service gt R amp S Support and then Create R amp S Support Information The file is stored as C R_S instr user service zip Attach the support file to an e mail in which you describe the problem and send it to the customer support address for your region as listed at the beginning of the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual 11 11 1 Introduction Remote Commands for The following commands are required to perform measurements in VSA in a remote environment It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that basic tasks that are also performed in the base unit in the same way are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument config
360. e the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer If the Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Single Sweep function does not start data capturing it merely has an effect on trace averaging over multiple sequences In this case no trace averaging is performed Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate IMMediate on page 393 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of evaluations set in Statistics Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate CONMeas on page 392 Refresh non Multistandard mode Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Remote command INITiate REFMeas on page 393 Statistic Count Defines the number of measurements to be considered for statistical evaluations The behavior depends on the act
361. eads to a mismatch of the input data with the defined sequences A BER value of 0 5 means that for at least one measurement no matching sequence was found See also chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 99 2 Bit Error Rate Current Bit Error Rate 0 499 021 530 Total 2 of Errors 510 Total of Bits 1022 The following information is provided in the BER result display e Bit Error Rate error bits number of analyzed bits e Total of Errors number of detected bit errors known data compared to symbol decisions e Total of Bits number of analyzed bits For each of these results the following values are provided BER Result Description Current Value for current result range Minimum Minimum Current value during the current measurement Maximum Maximum Current value during the current measurement Accumulative Total value over several measurements for BER Total of Errors Total of Bits similar to average function Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM BER to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 CALC BER to query the results see CALCulate lt n gt BERate on page 438 22 Ee c ME CIC LI User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 22 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Dis
362. ect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Note In MSRA MSRT mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Mas ter Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 347 Amplitude and Vertical Axis Configuration Amplitude and scaling settings allow you to configure the vertical y axis display and for some result displays also the horizontal x axis e JAmplitude SOUNO sut tnmen dr nde ee d TO 169 e Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband 173 LEN D 176 LEE cse 179 Amplitude Settings Amplitude settings affect the signal power or error levels Input Output and Frontend Settings To configure the amplitude settings select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Con fig softkey The amplitude settings for Analog Baseband input are described in chapter 5 5 5 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 173
363. ed Spectrum2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activated Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL Spectrum4 Deletes the spectrum channel with the name Spectrum4 INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer SANALYZER Spectrum Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Parameter Default Channel Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation ADEM Analog Demod R amp S FSW K
364. ed as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode data can only be exported to other applications data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications gt FUNCIONS 234 e How to Export and Import VQ 236 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar Some functions for particular data types are also available via softkeys or dialog boxes in the corresponding menus e g trace data or marker peak lists For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual Import Export Functions 5 jo P EE 235 L Export Trace to ASCII File ceci retis acd tv atc x 235 L Expr 235 Import Provides functions to import data Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process data s
365. ed on the detected symbols and the specifi cations of the signal model i e the modulation scheme and the transmit filter Tx filter Measurement Filtering Both the measurement signal and the reference signal are filtered with the specified measurement filter Synchronization In this stage the measurement signal and the reference signal are correlated For PSK QAM and MSK modulated signals an estimation algorithm is used in order to obtain estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier frequency error phase error offset gain imbalance quadrature error and the amplitude droop Alterna tively it is possible to disable the estimation algorithm For FSK modulated signals estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier frequency error FSK deviation error and the carrier frequency drift are calculated The measurement signal is subsequently corrected with these estimates Compensation for FSK deviation error and carrier frequency drift can be enabled or disabled For more information on synchronization see e chapter 4 5 1 2 Estimation on page 107 e chapter 5 9 2 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization on page 206 Result Display The selected measurement results are displayed in the window s Configuration of the windows can be performed via the Window Configuration dialog see chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 228 Burst Search The burst search is performed only if it
366. ed to the one defined for the signal description Example Defining the result range In figure 8 2 a result range will be defined for the first 100 symbols of the capture buf fer starting at the second symbol which has the symbol number 1 the capture buffer starts at symbol number 1 the first symbol to be displayed is the second symbol due to the offset 1 1 2 Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Result Range Length Result Length 26 042 us Result Range Alignment Reference Alignment Capture Burst Pattern Waveform e Left C center Right Offset sym Symbol Number at Capture Start sym Visualization Fig 8 2 Example Defining the Result Range The result range is indicated by a green bar along the time axis in capture buffer result displays see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 122 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data Once the data has been stored in the capture buffer the results can be analyzed in numerous ways The following tasks are meant to make you familiar with the most How to Analyze the Measured Data common application features For a description of all analysis functions and set tings see chapter 6 Analysis on page 216 1 Press the MEAS CONFIG key to display the menu 2 Select the Display Config button in the Overview or the Display Config softkey and select the data sources for evaluation
367. eens SOfIK6y iit rrr rr aree nre 222 Coupling rere ee n ted 319 Customized Measurement performing 241 D Data acquisition 181 22 180 MSRA MSRT ter terree epe 181 357 Sample rate Usable Bandwidth 182 Data source Capture E 16 Display mce 2 Error vector Evaluation method Mas S E s Modulation accuracy Modulation errors 2 i ep ere oor ERLE PANTE SWINDON raro DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 341 Decimal separator qo f T 220 Default values MOMS 134 ife v 178 Deleting Settings files n mr tonnes 137 Standards vecti e XC E 137 Delta markers Brie 222 Demodulation Advanced aie ra anaes 206 Bandwidth troie 59 Compensation 203 204 202 Estimation points per symbol 208 Knowrn data hereto repere rte 129 Normalization 207 Offset EVM 210
368. efault 9 Enable the Limit Checking On option or press the ModAcc Limits On softkey in the Limits menu The limit check is performed immediately on the current modulation accuracy mea surement results and for all subsequent measurements until it is disabled The results of the limit check are indicated by red or green values in the result sum mary 8 3 3 How to Export the Trace Data to a File The measured data can be stored to an ASCII file either as raw data directly from the capture buffer or as displayed in the diagrams evaluated trace data Optionally a header can be included with additional information on the used measurement settings User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 255 How to Analyze the Measured Data 1 Press the TRACE key and select the Trace Export Config softkey 2 Define which type of data to export raw or trace By default trace data is expor ted 3 Optionally enable the header information to be included 4 To export the traces in all windows select Export Trace to ASCII File for all Win dows To export the traces only for the currently selected window select Export Trace to ASCII File for Specific Window To export the data from another window select it from the Specifics for list then export again In either case all traces of the selected window s are exported 5 Define a file name and storage location and select OK The data is stored in a file and can be analyzed in an
369. elected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument Input Output and Frontend Settings 5 5 1 3 Digital I Q Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Digital Base band Interface R amp S FSW B17 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box InputSource Power Sensor Frequency Digital 19 Input Sample Rate Auto Manual e Leve p R Yes IQR 100 101165 Digital 10 OUT Samp ate 10 MHz Full Scale Level 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Digital VO IMput State 2 161 INPUT SaMPlS S 161 e E 162 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level nennen 162 Connected 2 4224441 00 nnn t
370. en is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Starting the VSA Application 2 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application The R amp S FSW K70 is a firmware application that adds functionality to perform Vector Signal Analysis VSA to the R amp S FSW The application performs vector and scalar measurements on digitally modulated single carrier signals To perform the measurements it converts RF signals into the complex baseband It can also use the optional Digital Baseband interface R amp S FSW B17 option to ana lyze signals already delivered to the complex baseband The application features e Flexible modulation analysis from MSK to 10240 e Numerous standard specific default settings e Various graphical numerical and statistical evaluations and result displays e Spectrum analyses of the measurement and error signal e Flexible burst search for the analysis of complex signal combinations short bursts or signal mix This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the appli
371. ength sample rate 1 e For frequency response channel and group delay diagrams 4096 values You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis using D1SPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 432 Retrieving Parameter Values For each parameter the VSA application calculates and shows various statistical val ues e Current value e Mean value Calculated as the average of the number of results defined by the Statistic Count e Peak value e Standard deviation e 95 percentile Unlike the mean value the 95 ile is a result of all measurement results since the last start of a single or continous sweep or of all measurements since the last change of a measurement parameter Retrieving Results For details on the individual parameters see chapter 3 3 Common Parameters in VSA on page 55 and chapter A 6 Formulae on page 485 CALbCulatesmesiBERale ueteri to tre erbe t debs e tar cet vt Rn 438 lt gt lt gt 5 438 lt gt lt gt 439 lt gt lt gt 439 lt gt lt gt
372. ength on page 193 Refer to figure 4 46 for an illustration of the three parameters The detected bursts in the capture buffer for the current burst search settings are indi cated by blue lines in the preview area of the Burst Search configuration dialog box see chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 192 Information Expected Burst Length 148 4 sym Burst Found Preview Preview Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Lum mor eu gt EE SS aa User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 97 Overview of the Demodulation Process Power Averaged Calculate Average Filter Length Calculate Threshold Find Next Rising amp Falling Edge Calculate Acceptable Burst Lengths Burst Length Okay Add to Burst List Fig 4 47 Burst search algorithm 4 4 2 19 Pattern Search The pattern search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped The main benefit of the pattern search is that it enables an alignment of the result range to the pattern Furthermore this stage can function as a filter If the burst search and pattern search are switched on and the parameter Meas Only If Pattern Symbols Correct is set to true only bursts with the correct pattern are demodulated see Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct on page 195 During the pattern search stage the capture buffer is searched for an pattern by trying different time and frequency hypotheses The
373. ennan anneanne nnne nnns 162 Baie 162 Digital Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 320 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device Input Output and Frontend Settings The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 337 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 337 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an sam ple with the magnitude 1 If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 336 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 337 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 336 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 336 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connecti
374. ent of the result range to the reference source The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEFault on page 375 Offset Defines the offset of the result range to the alignment reference The result of the cur rent setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Note Note the following restrictions to this parameter An offset lt 0 is not possible if you align the result range to the left border of the capture buffer e An offset that moves the pattern outside the result range is not allowed For exam ple if you align the result to the left border of the pattern only offsets S 0 are allowed Otherwise you would never be able to find the pattern within the result range Remote command CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet on page 375 Symbol Number at Reference Start Defines the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment refer ence source burst capture buffer or pattern The result of the current setting is dis played in the visualization area of the dialog box In effect this setting defines an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the signal structure see Offset on page 146 Note When you define the Symbol Number at Reference Start remember to take the offset defined for the signal structure into consideration see Offs
375. ently converted back into logarithmic domain The linear values are indicated by the subscript lin in chapter A 6 2 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 488 Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSW Mean _ 1 2 _ W 1 4 E 722 M XM m with Xo 0 Peak 2 2 2 if Leas gt with if idx arg maxp with m Xo 0 Formulae Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSW StdDev 95 ile 5 DES with lt 0 95 Pr denotes the probability D oir Sorting the values and giving the 95 ile A 6 4 Trace Averaging The index m represents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count The index s represents the st sample within the trace If the measurement results are represented in logarithmic domain the average opera tion is performed on the linear values The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain Measurements Calculation in R amp S FSW RMS Average s M e Error Vector Magnitude e Meas Ref magnitude e Capture Buffer magnitude 1 d iW c Linear Average s M All measurements where trace averaging is possible except for the measurements
376. ently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar 3 Mag CaptureBuffer ei Clr 8000 sym Fig 3 1 Result ranges for a burst signal Note Tip You can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges using Select Result Rng softkey and analyze the individual result ranges in separate windows You can change the position of the result range quickly and easily by dragging the blue bar representing the result range to a different position in the capture buffer The default result type is Magnitude Absolute The following result types are available e chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 40 e chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag I Q on page 47 e chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 e chapter 3 2 32 Vector on page 54 Remote command LAY ADD 1 BEL MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 Measurement amp Reference Signal The measurement signal or the ideal reference signal or both The default result type is Magnitude Relative The following result types are available chapter 3 2 21 Magnitude Absolute on page 40 chapter 3 2 23 Magnitude Relative on page 43 chapter 3 2 26 Phase Wrap on page 45 chapter 3 2 27 Phase Unwrap on page 46 chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 chapter 3 2 12 Frequency Relative on page 32 chapter 3 2 28 Real Imag on page 47 chapter 3 2 10 Eye Diagram Real 1 on page 30 User Manual
377. er 25 C4FM APCO25 H CPM Filter for the APCO25 standard Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H DQPSK Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard CDMA2000 1X Forward Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X forward link http www 3gpp2 org Public html specs C S0002 C_v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 CDMA2000 1X Reverse Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X reverse link http www 3gpp2 org Public_html specs C S0002 C_v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period None USER No filter is used User defined filter Define the filter using the SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER command A 3 2 Measurement Filters Predefined Measurement and Tx Filters The most frequently required measurement filters are predefined in the VSA applica tion Table 1 3 Overview of predefined measurement filters EDGE NSR Measurement filter required for the EDGE Normal Symbol Rate standard see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 6 Modulation Accuracy The resulting system is NOT inter symbol interfer ence free EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Narrow Pulse st
378. er Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet lt Offset gt This setting is only available for applications in MSRT mode not for the MSRT Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range pretrigger time to min posttrigger time sweep time RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 188 11 7 6 Zooming into the Display 11 7 6 1 Using the Single Zoom lt gt 27 2 121 2 2 01 044 06 416 DISPlay WiINDow n ZOOMSTAT Ci a inc ta ea ean 416 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA SS SSS ______________________________________________________________________ ammnp DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm
379. er 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 464 Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for VSA application Parameter value Data source default result display CBUFfer Capture buffer Magnitude absolute MEAS Meas amp Ref Magnitude relative REF Equalizer EVECtor Error vector EVM MACCuracy Modulation Accuracy Result Summary MERRor Modulation Errors Magnitude error SYMB Symbols Hexadecimal LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows from top left to bot tom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syn tax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt Windowlndex string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index numeric value Index of the window Configuring the Result Display Example LAY CAT Result pau EE Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name
380. eren ves 182 Extension options 66 67 MAXIMUM nins donned kd beet ex e 182 Maximum usable 289 Relationship to sample rate 66 Signal processlrlg orci Rente 57 Usable max ac tree ettet 65 BB Power Trigger SOftKey pt rte eed 186 Bias Conversion loss table 21 External Mixer B21 remote control External Mixer B21 Bit error rate BER Result TY DG coo Ra t te Ro euo meae 21 Burst GSM EDGE Measurement example nnne tnnt 266 Burst search PQ ONIN cites e nel OU Red 98 Auto configurator tnra cre Rr de 193 Configuration 192 Demodulation process 95 Enabling 192 193 dede 277 Gap P 193 Parameters uoti err 96 eel m M 96 Remote FRODUSINGSS eerte trie prt once 97 Dus 193 Burst Sigala erect re trn e 145 Bursts Display i rentrer ret rernm es 13 Length min max Programming example sirsiran 465 Reference for result range 5 re 201 Run in T Signal SUCUS eet rere trees 145 Useful
381. eriod used for estimation is the capture sampling period 4 5 2 3 Modulation Errors A 2FSK signal is generated using a GMSK frequency pulse Examples of carrier drift and reference deviation are shown in figure 4 64 and figure 4 65 respectively Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Carrier frequency drift A carrier frequency drift is modeled as a linear change in the carrier frequency with respect to time The effect of carrier drift on the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal is illustrated in figure 4 64 Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation 15 o a Frequency Ref Deviation e Freq Ref Freq Meas 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 4 64 The reference and distorted instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with a carrier fre quency drift FSK deviation error The FSK deviation error is the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation FSK only on page 143 The evidence of a deviation error in the instantaneous fre quency of an FSK signal is demonstrated in figure 4 65 4 6 Measurement Ranges Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation Meas Deviation Frequency Ref Deviation Freq Ref Meas 70 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 4 65 The reference and measured instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with reference deviation error Measureme
382. es are defined with respect to the x axis includ ing an optional offset defined via the Symbol Number at Reference Start parameter Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 388 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings In order to do so a measurement is performed The duration of this measurement can be defined automatically or manually To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto 214 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 214 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 215 Upper Level 215 Lower Level FlySteresis m ciii tak tre o eee EHE ED 215 Auto Scale Once Auto Scale WiNdOW c cccccsecccceeteseececeresneeccerenseeaeeeetteneceeentteeee 215 SOAS All EUER 215 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analo
383. es cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 400 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 401 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 400 Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 399 Couple Windows If enabled markers in all diagrams with the same x axis time or symbols have cou pled x
384. esult CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT EVM PAVG CALC LIM MACC EVM PPE Query the value and check the limit for the largest error vector magnitude in the measurement Result CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT CFER AVG CALC LIM MACC CFER MEAN Query the value and check the limit for the mean carrier frequency offset in the result summary for the current evaluation range Result Storing trace data to a file FORM DEXP HEAD ON Include a header in the trace export file FORM DEXP MODE TRAC Export the trace data not raw I Q data DISP WIND1 TRAC2 X STAR Query the first value of the x axis for the current result range x values are not exported with trace data Result MMEM STOR4 TRAC 1 Measurement signal Save the measurement signal values trace 1 in window 4 to an ascii file Results MMEM STOR4 TRAC 2 Reference signal Save the reference signal values trace 2 in window 4 to an ascii file Results MMEM STOR2 TRAC 1 Result Summary Save the result summary values window 2 for the current result range to an ascii file Results Retrieving results for further result ranges gt DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC Query the number of result ranges current is last Use variable x to determine number of previous result range DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC x 11 13 3 Programming Examples Move to next result
385. esult summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green E User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 254 R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis B Result Summary Current Mean 95 ile 100 00 Imbalance 0 00 Quadrature Error 0 00 Amplitude Droop For details on the limit check functions and settings see chapter 6 4 Modulation Accu racy Limit Lines on page 225 To define a limit check 1 Configure a measurement with Modulation Accuracy as the Source see chap ter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 228 2 Press the LINES key on the front panel 3 Press the ModAcc Limits Config softkey in the Limits menu 4 n the Current tab define limits that the current value should not exceed for any or all of the result types Note the limits for the current value are automatically also defined for the peak value and vice versa However the limit check can be enabled individually for cur rent or peak values 5 Enable the Check option for each result type to be included in the limit check 6 If necessary define limits and enable the limit check for the mean values of the dif ferent result types on the Mean tab 7 f necessary enable the limit check for the peak values of the different result types on the Peak tab 8 Toreset the limits to their default values press Set to D
386. esulting equalizer function is not simply the inverted distortion function For more complex distortions the reference signal might not be determined correctly due to wrong symbol decisions Despite the resulting imperfect equalizer calculation the estimated equalizer is often good enough to improve the reference signal creation in the succeeding sweep Thus the new equalizer is improved successively This pro cessing mode of the equalizer is called tracking mode After only few sweeps the results are sufficiently accurate and the learning phase is completed Then the equal izer can be used without additional calculations as long as the input signal remains sta ble If an unstable input has led to an unusable equalizer filter reset the equalizer with the Reset button IQ Input Signal IQ Reference Equalizer Equalizer Compensate for Averaging Control MEAS Filter IQ Measure ment Signal Fig 4 52 An equalizer filter can be activated in the reference and measurement signal path The filter coefficients are determined in such a way that the error vector magnitude EVM is minimized User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 104 R amp S9FSW K70 200Measurement Basics The result range used for equalizer calculation might be quite short leading to unstable equalizer impulse responses For time invariant channels the estimation length can be extended using Averaging mode In this case the statistics from al
387. et on page 146 The Symbol Number at Pattern Start refers to the first symbol of the pattern offset not the first symbol of the pattern Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe VOFFset on page 376 5 9 Demodulation Settings During demodulation of the vector signal some undesired effects that may occur during transmission can be compensated for Furthermore you can influence the synchroni zation process e Demodulation 40 4 000000000 nnns 203 e Advanced Demodulation 1 206 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation o Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM values Demodulation settings are displayed when you select the Demodulation button in the Overview or the Demod Meas Filter softkey in the main VSA menu A live preview of the constellation with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation settings depend on the used modulation gy Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter Compensate for I Q Offset I Q Imbalance Amplitude Droop Symbol Rate Error Equalizer Mode Filter Length Reset Equalizer Preview Preview Const I Q Meas amp Ref
388. ffset on page 171 SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates a measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current measurement This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Usage Event INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the preamplification level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on 349 The command requires option R amp S FSW B24 Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of preamplification levels depends on the R amp S FSW model R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24 on page 150 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires option R amp S FSW B24 This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW 817 Parameters State OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification 11 5 2 9 Configuring Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier option B24
389. figure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 157 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 157 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 329 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instru ments C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 154 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Conversion loss tables can be defined and edited in the Edit conversion loss table dialog box which is displayed when you select the New Table button in the External Mixer gt Conversion loss table settings A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries Input Output and Frontend Settings Table File Name USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings
390. for VSA 1 Frequency Sweep 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt 2 gt lt 2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 232 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters State OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 232 See Restore Original Display on page 232 See Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 232 11 8 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the result display in a remote envi ronment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 228 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 417 11 8 1 Configuring the Result Display e General Window 418 e Working with Windows in the
391. for the demodulation RMSMin Optimization goal is the minimization of RMS of the error vector EVMMin Optimization goal is the minimization of the EVM Configuring Setting parameters Criterion RMSMin EVMMin RMSMin Optimizes calculation such that the RMS of the error vector is minimal EVMMin Optimizes calculation such that EVM is minimal RST RMSMin depends on selected standard Manual operation See Optimization on page 208 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO lt UseWfmForSync gt This command selects manual or automatic synchronization with a pattern waveform to speed up measurements Setting parameters lt UseWfmForSync gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 209 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe lt FastSync gt This command switches fast synchronization on and off if you manually synchronize with a waveform pattern Setting parameters lt FastSync gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 209 11 5 9 Measurement Filter Settings You can configure the measurement filter to be used Manual configuration of the measurement filter is described in chapter 5 10 Measure ment Filter Settings on page 210 For more information on measurement filters refer to chapter 4 1 4 Measurement Fil ters on page 60 Useful commands for defining measurement filters described elsewhere SENSe
392. form VSA According to Digital Standards on page 239 Digital standard settings are available via the Digital Standards softkey in the MEAS menu Standelds acea 136 L Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path 136 L New 2202 0 136 Ee BIB 136 EE i i MENOR REX 137 L oad Standard doit meii 137 L Save SOHO oss ei redit net iite eai cor puse i 137 L pelete Standal enonsa Rer Der aptius 137 L Restore Standard Files eene tnn 137 Digital Standards Opens file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement settings for conven tional mobile radio standards Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Digital Standards Select the storage location of the settings file on the instrument or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the standards files is C R_S Instr user vsa Standards Note Saving instrument settin
393. frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 326 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 325 Input Output and Frontend Settings Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Pre defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Managing Conversion Loss Tables tab For details on conversion loss tables see the External Mixer descrip tion in the R amp S FSW User Manual For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 157 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 327 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 327 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 326 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 326 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On Frequency Basic Se
394. from 1 to 1 sym bols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 1 Eye I Meas amp Ref Fig 3 7 Result display Eye Diagram Real I Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM IEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see lt gt on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 Frequency Absolute The instantaneous frequency of the signal source the absolute value is displayed in Hz Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal e Capture Buffer SSS gt EE SS SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 30 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays SSS Se Sa Meas amp Ref signal 1 d FREQ ZMEAS 2 z dt with tzn and duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 Capture buffer l d FREQ r 46 When evaluating the capture buffer the absolute frequency is derived from the mea sured phase with duration of one sampling period at the sample rate see Sample Rate on page 182 Note that this result display is based on an individual capture buffer range If more than 256 000
395. from different input sources The frequency and amplitude settings represent the frontend of the measurement setup e Input Sela noe ai ations cente bonore ra cel tate ce ds 148 e Output p n ERE Heer ribi i EE Er Renee ye aad 165 e Digital G Output re aeta ense het 166 e Frequency 168 e Amplitude and Vertical Axis 169 5 5 1 Input Settings Input settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Some settings are also available in the Amplitude tab of the Amplitude dialog box D The DigiConf softkey is described in chapter 5 5 1 3 Digital 1 Input Settings on page 161 e Radio Frequency eec E ed dett eoe dane dt e cedente 149 External Mixer Settings eite Pec REIHE ce Pr A PER Dr E TUER 151 e pigital O Input Settifigs 161 e Analog Baseband Input Settings sssssssssssseeee enne 163 e Probe Sellings rnt ct s dtt ev o a d ES 164 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration 5 5 1 4 Radio Frequency Input The default input source for the R amp S FSW is the radio frequency If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input Frontend Radio Frequency Input Coupling Digital IQ High Pass F
396. from the sampled or frequency time data records The mappings for all standards used in the analyzer and for all employed modulation modes are described in the following Unless indicated otherwise symbol numbers are specified in hexadecimal form MSB at the left 4 3 1 Phase Shift Keying PSK With this type of modulation the information is represented by the absolute phase position of the received signal at the decision points All transitions in the diagram are possible The complex constellation diagram is shown The symbol numbers are entered in the diagram according to the mapping rule BPSK NATURAL Fig 4 10 Constellation diagram for BPSK including the symbol mapping Fig 4 11 Constellation diagram QPSK including the symbol mapping for CDMA2000 FWD and DVB S2 Fig 4 13 Constellation diagram for QPSK NATURAL including the symbol mapping Symbol Mapping Fig 4 14 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for WCDMA 8PSK Fig 4 16 Constellation diagram for 8PSK NATURAL including the symbol mapping Fig 4 17 Constellation diagram for including the symbol mapping DVB S2 4 3 22 Rotating PSK A rotating PSK modulation is basically a PSK modulation in which additional phase shifts occur These phase shifts depend on the symbol number e g for a 4 the third symbol
397. fter each filter The relevant filters for vector signal analysis are shown in figure 4 1 IQ Demodulation Bandwidth Bandwidth H d Optional Equalizer Filter Halfband Filter Decimation Filter IF Filter i i Measurement Filter Digital IF Baseband Baseband Baseband Analog Section Digital Hardware Section i DSP Section Fig 4 1 Block diagram of bandwidth relevant filters for vector signal analysis e After the IF Filter only for RF input operation bandwidth 40 MHz e After the digital hardware section The phase and amplitude distortions of the IF filter have been compensated for Usually the I Q data has a usable bandwidth of about 0 8 sample rate For details refer to chapter 4 1 1 Bandwidth on page 58 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing The data s sample rate and bandwidth are automatically adjusted to the set symbol rate For most modulated signals even the smallest allowed value for the sample rate leads to a sufficient data bandwidth The whole spectrum of the input signal is captured but most adjacent channels and interferers are effectively suppressed Only for very wide signals FSK no TX filter used it can be necessary to try higher values for the sample rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 64 increasing the bandwidth The data delivered to the DSP section has no considerable amplitude or phase distor tion a
398. g In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 297 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Comm
399. g Witli 2 arn rrr eerte en 243 Peak search MEE HQ 224 LIMIS 224 ja 223 Peaks Absolute 224 Formula sisri 490 Marker positioning 224 224 SOfIKGy rr t ren nen 224 Phase Distortion effect cere 115 Formula ee 485 Wrap result type un ooo tete eicere 45 Phase error DG PION eee Formula Result type RMS peak aes 488 Phase Error 2 rre n rrr ence 45 Phase shift keying See PSK 73 Phase unwrap Unwrap result type rts 46 Ports External Mixer B21 remote control 327 Preamplifier Setting 150 171 Softkey 150 171 Prefix cii ni retten 197 Preset Bands External Mixer B21 remote control 324 Exterrial Mixer B21 2 153 Presetting Channels 139 Default values 134 4 EM sei css 188 Probes MICKODUMON t aa 165 Settings ceti rr mene te o enr ens 164 Programming examples Burst GSM EDGE signal 465 Continuous QPSK signal EN External Mixer B21 Protection RF input remote eatin entem E 319 Differential ret e eas 78 Error model Mixed forms Modul
400. g softkey from the main VSA menu or the Display Config button in the Over view Note however that this button is only displayed in the general Overview not for window specific configuration Specifics for must be disabled The default evaluation for the selected data source is displayed in the window Up to 16 result displays can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The VSA evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started man ual 2 Window Configuration In a second step you can select a different evaluation method result type for the window based on the data source selected in the Dis play Configuration Window Configuration For each window you can select a different evaluation method result type based on the data source selected in the Display Configuration Further window settings are available for some result types The Window Configuration is displayed when you select the Window Config softkey from the main VSA menu Display and Window Configuration Some settings only displayed after you select the More button in the dialog box To hide these settings select the Less button inre M 229 IR ce 229 Result Type ccu cet ter nates etd rg re tt eg ne E e tas 229 Highlight ey lue ER 230
401. g baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the signal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression clipping and overload conditions are minimized In order to do so a level measurement is performed to determine the optimal reference level This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 215 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 391 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 389 Adjusting Settings Automatically Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 389 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 389 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In orde
402. g mode the application data range is defined by the same settings used to define the signal capture in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the application data for vector signal analysis The Capture Buffer displays show the application data of the VSA application in MSRA MSRT mode Data coverage for each active application Generally if a signal contains multiple data channels for multiple standards separate applications are used to analyze each data channel Thus it is of interest to know which application is analyzing which data channel The MSRA MSRT Master display indicates the data covered by each application restricted to the channel bandwidth used by the corresponding standard by vertical blue lines labeled with the application name Since the VSA application supports several standards and the standard used by User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 130 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode the currently analyzed data is not known the Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings is used to approximate the channel bandwidth Analysis interval However the individual result displays of the application need not analyze the com plete data range The data range that is actually analyzed by the individual result dis play is referred to as the analysis interval In the R amp S FSW VSA application the analysis interval i
403. g table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual Table 5 2 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATAA P Trigger GP1 SDATAA P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATAA P Reserve2 GP4 gt SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 not available for Digital enhanced mode Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 364 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 363 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 363 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 363 For analog baseband B71 or digital baseband B17 input only Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep The time may be entered in s or in symbols Signal Capture offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for zero span e g Analyzer application and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger max sweep time When using the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 the maximum range is l
404. g the result range DDEMod TIME 200 Defines the result length as 200 symbols CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the burst as the reference for the result range CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG LEFT Aligns the result range to the left edge of the burst CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG OFFS 10 Defines an offset of 10 symbols from the burst start DISP TRAC X VOFF 10 Defines t he symbol number 10 as the result range start CALC ELIN STAT ON CALC ELIN1 10 CALC ELIN2 190 Evaluation range starts at symbol 10 and ends at symbol 190 LAY WIND4 REM Close symbol table display window 4 DISPlay WINDowl TRACe2 MODE Add a second trace in max hold mode to EVM vs Time display window 1 LAY ADD 3 RIGH MEAS Create new window to the right of capture buffer window 3 with measurement signal as data type Result 4 CALC4 FORM MAGN Set result type for window 4 to magnitude DISPlay WINDow4 TRACe2 MODE WRIT CALC4 TRAC2 REF Add a second trace in clear write mode for the reference signal CALC LIM MACC STAT ON Activates limit checks for all values in the Result Summary INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until the 10 sweeps have finished Programming Examples CALC2 MARK FUNC DDEM STAT EVM AVG CALC LIM MACC EVM RCUR Query the value and check the limit for the EVM RMS value in the result summary for the current evaluation range R
405. gnal look wrong 293 Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement window Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the AUTO key e 3 Press the Y Axis Auto Scale softkey Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement win dow the trace of the reference signal is not Solution e 1 Select the measurement window R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement pere M MR MERE Uu e 2 Press the TRACE key e 3 Press the Trace Config softkey e 4 Select a second trace choose Clear Write as Trace Mode and toggle to Ref in the Evaluation column Trace Wizard Screen Trace Trace Mode Evaluation 7 Trace 3 Blank gt 4 Blank Trace 5 Blank E Trace 6 Blank Ar V Preset Select All Traces Avg Min Cirwrite Min Problem The measurement window does not show average results Solution e 1 Select the measurement window e 2 Press the TRACE key 3 Press the Trace Config softkey e 4 Select a second trace and choose the preferred Trace Mode e g Hold or Average Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mod m el Att 20 008 Freq 1 0GHz ResLen Evaluation 1 2 Avg 3 m
406. gnal structure see Offset on page 146 For example if you align the result to the center of the pattern and set the Symbol Number at Pattern Start to O you can easily find the pattern start in the EVM mea surement simply by moving a marker to the symbol number O set defined for the signal structure into consideration see Offset on page 146 If you define an offset of the pattern with respect to the useful part of the burst in the signal description and align the result to the pattern the Symbol Number at Pattern Start refers to the first symbol of the useful part of the burst not the first symbol of the pat tern 2 When you define the Symbol Number at Reference Start remember to take the off Run In Run Out Time The parameter Run In Out can be used to influence the range over which the EVM is minimized The internal synchronization range is the overlapping area of the result range and the burst excluding its Run In Out areas Hence this parameter also allows for demodulation of bursts with mixed modulations e g Bluetooth because it can be used to explicitely exclude symbols from influencing the synchronization Useful length The burst excluding its Run In Out areas is sometimes referrred to as the useful part The minimum length of the useful part Min Length Run In Run Out must be 210 4 6 2 Evaluation Range In some scenarios the result range contains symbols that are not supposed to b
407. gs in secure user mode In secure user mode all data is stored to volatile memory and is only available during the current instrument session As soon as the power is switched off on the R amp S FSW the data is cleared To store settings permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual New Folder lt Digital Standards Creates a new folder in the file system in which you can save the settings file File Name Digital Standards Contain the name of the data file without the path or extension By default the name of a settings file consists of a base name followed by an under score Multiple files with the same base name are extended by three numbers e g limit lines 005 Configuration According to Digital Standards For details on the file name and location see the Data Management topic in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to volatile memory To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Comment Digital Standards An optional description for the data file A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed
408. gth Note however that in this case the results are actually correct and the message can be ignored e The settings do not match the signal In order to allow you to select certain bursts the burst search only searches for bursts that have a length between Min Length and Max Length plus a tolerance that you can set in the Burst Search Dialog In case the burst is e g shorter than the Burst Min Length the burst search fails Mag CapBuf 1 Cirw Modulation amp Signal Description Modulation Signal Description Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 200 sym JP 738 462 Max Length 800 sym 21 108 m Start 0 sym Stop 1300 sym _ Run In G sym 11 077 8 sym OZ Fig 10 5 Example for a failed burst search due too a burst that is too short E User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 279 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Solution try one of the following Switch on the Magnitude Capture Buffer result display Move a marker to the start of the burst Move a delta marker to the end of the burst and compare the burst length to the settings in the Signal Description dialog Increase the search tolerance the Burst Search dialog Keep an eye on the green red field If the burst search succeeds you can see the length of the found bursts Set the minimum burst length to 50 and
409. guring Bursts and 4 0000 eene nnns 367 e Deining the alib ecc oer heo e ndr 374 e Demodulation Setuligs 1 cei sei de E 377 e Measurement Filter 08 4 0 1 1 inn nn tnn ka nnns 385 e Defining the Evaluation Range ieee aes ert ae etd de ae 387 e Adjusting Settings Automatically eese 388 Signal Description The signal description provides information on the expected input signal which optimi zes pattern and burst detection and the calculation of the ideal reference signal Manual configuration of the signal description is described in chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 140 cedro to 307 315 Modulation The modulation settings vary depending on the selected modulation type in particular FSK modulation provides some additional settings gt 5 307 gt 5 308 SENSe IDBEMOG APSK NS Tale ate c ropes 308 SENSe J DDEMbd ASRK NS 2 te xe id Ra 308 SENSe DDEMod FIETer ALPH
410. h the measured signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 283 R amp S FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 6 6 _____________________ ss At positions where the correlation exceeds the I Q Correlation Threshold the pattern is found e Stage 2 demodulates the measured signal at the pattern location and the trans mitted symbols are checked for correctness against the pattern symbol sequence In case of a very short pattern i e a pattern length in the order of the inter symbol interference ISI duration a number of issues can arise e False positive The pattern is found at positions where the transmitted symbols differ from the pattern symbols Solution Try one of the following Activate Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Increase the Correlation Threshold see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 193 e False negative The pattern search misses a position where transmitted symbols match the pat tern symbols Solution Decrease the I Q Correlation Threshold see chapter 5 7 2 Pattern Search on page 193 In case of bursted signals the pattern search finds only the first occurrence of the pattern within each burst If a false positive occurs in this situation cf case 1 the use of Meas only if pattern symbols correct will not provi
411. h to the Known Data tab Modulation amp Signal Description Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge See To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences on page 248 Data c Pr 148 Load EIIg eerie Ore ees oe eoo Dese o 148 Input Output and Frontend Settings Known Data Activates or deactivates the use of the loaded data file if available When deactivated the additional information from the previously loaded data file is removed Any referen ces to the known data in the Demodulation dialog box are replaced by the default parameter values see chapter 5 9 2 Advanced Demodulation Synchronization on page 206 Note When a standard is loaded the use of a Known Data file is automatically deacti vated Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe on page 382 Load Data File If Known Data is activated this function displays a file selection dialog box to select the xml file that contains the known data Once a file has been selected any additional information provided by the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME on page 383 5 5 Input Output and Frontend Settings The R amp S FSW can evaluate signals
412. has an additional phase offset of 3 1 rr 4 This offset has the same effect as a rotation of the basic system of coordinates by the offset angle after each symbol The method is highly important in practical applications because it prevents signal tran sitions through the zeros in the I Q plane This reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal and the linearity requirements for the amplifier In practice the method is used for 311 8 8PSK for example and in conjunction with phase differential coding for rr 4 DQPSK Symbol mapping The logical constellation diagram for 3 8 8 comprises 8 points that correspond to the modulation level see figure 4 18 A counter clockwise offset rotation of 8 is inserted after each symbol transition Fig 4 18 Constellation diagram for 37 8 8PSK before rotation including the symbol mapping for EDGE Fig 4 19 I Q symbol stream after 3778 rotation in I Q plane if the symbol number 7 is transmitted six times in a row X 3 Fig 4 20 Constellation diagram for 3174 QPSK including the symbol mapping EDGE 3 Fig 4 21 Constellation diagram for 74 QPSK Natural including the symbol mapping 4 3 3 Differential With differential PSK the information is represented in the phase shift between two consecutive decision points The absolute position of the complex sample value at the decision poi
413. he FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey e Select the Frequency tab in the Input Settings dialog box Frequency Freq Center Stepsize Value Frequency Offset Value 0 0 Hz t sea ere tin A Pe e RU ecc dd rai 168 Center Frequency 169 FYEGUGNCY ONGC E M 169 Center frequency Defines the normal center frequency of the signal The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 5 fcenter fmax Spanmin 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 Input Output and Frontend Settings fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 346 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size of the center frequency The step size can be set to a predefined value or it can be manually set to a user defined value Auto The step size is set to the default value e using the rotary knob 100 kHz e using the arrow keys 1 MHz Manual Defines a user defined step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO on page 347 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 347 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no eff
414. he Write to lt CVL table name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 322 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH on page 321 Write to CVL table name Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 156 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 328 Managing Conversion Loss Tables In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cvl direc tory are listed in the Modify Tables list Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Digital IQ ME o RN 157 Edit T 157 Delete Eie cede Eee cese re re E eed Eee deste see 157 TOO 157 Input Output and Frontend Settings New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to con
415. he channel informa tion bar you can see the number of completed evaluations Stat Count Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Mod Att 24dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen SGL Stat Count 10 1 Clrw 5 change the number of evaluations press the SWEEP key and select Statistic Count Config Select Manual and enter the desired number of evaluations e g 12 When you press RUN SINGLE the VSA application will capture data until 12 evaluations are completed 9 3 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals In this measurement example a bursted GSM EDGE signal will be measured and eval uated The goal of this section is to familiarize you with the VSA application features that are relevant specifically for the analysis of bursted signals 9 3 1 Transmitter Settings This section summarizes the necessary transmitter settings It contains a list of the parameters and step by step instructions for the R amp S SMU If you are interested in a more detailed description or background information refer to the user manual of the R amp S SMU which can be downloaded from the Rohde amp Schwarz website www rohde schwarz com downloads manuals smu200A html Frequency 1 GHz Level 0 dBm Standard GSM EDGE Burst with normal symbol rate User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 266 Measurement Example 2 Burst GSM EDGE Signals To define the settings for the R amp S SMU 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2
416. he grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Range per Division on page 177 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Y Axis Reference Position on page 177 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid For external generator calibration measurements requires External Generator Control option R amp S FSW B10 this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Parameters Value RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation See Y Axis Reference Value on page 177 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in 96 Usage SCPI confirmed Configuring Manual operation See Y Axis Unit on page 180
417. he instrument was switched on or the equalizer was reset are considered to calculate the new filter To start a new averaging process use the SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet on page 381 command RST TRACe Example DDEM EQU MODE TRAC Activates the tracking mode of the equalizer Manual operation See Mode on 205 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer RESet This command deletes the data of the currently selected equalizer After deletion train ing can start again using the command DDEM EQU MODE TRA see SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE on page 380 Usage Event Manual operation See Reset Equalizer on page 206 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer SAVE Name This command saves the current equalizer results to a file Setting parameters Name string File name Example DDEM EQU SAVE D MyEqualizer Saves the current equalizer results to D MyEqualizer vae Manual operation See Store Load Current Equalizer on page 206 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the equalizer For more information on the equalizer see chapter 4 4 5 The Equalizer on page 103 Setting parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST OFF Example DDEM EQU OFF Manual operation See State on 205 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO lt FineSyncAuto gt This command selects manual or automatic Fine Sync Sett
418. ho value represents the worst case Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MACC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM RSUM to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 5 Result Summary on page 436 CALC MARK FUNC DDEM STAT parameter to query individual parameter values see chapter 11 9 3 Retrieving Parameter Val ues on page 437 Result Summary Individual Results The Result Summary can display either all or only a single modulation accuracy parameter Only the most important parameters can be displayed individually namely those for which modulation accuracy limits can be defined see Limit Value on page 227 Individual results are selected for display by tapping the Result Summary table header A Table Configuration dialog box is displayed in which you can select the parameter to be displayed Results to be displayed ae EVM RMS EVM Peak Phase Errors RMS Phase Error Peak Magnitude Error RMS Magnitude Error Peak Carrier Frequency Error IQ Offset R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays By default all parameters are displayed If you select a specific parameter the Result Summary display is replaced by the individual result display 2 EVM RMS EVM RMS 0 84 9 o 1 00 Fig 3 21
419. hreshold on page 155 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set tings SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDOVT iiie tas cre nt eei n era da d v ve a ed add 323 S TAB let E ev Eve RESP 324 SENSe MIXer FREQusncy S TOP2 a xa aeiaai 324 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet essere 324 2 tte td roten 324 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGHES TATe cuidas desse etate ze ea ie cna adeunda 325 325 SENSe MIXer HARMONIC TYPE aeaa a p eee aaa 326 SENSe MIXer HARMO e LOW liia iota eiie coit eaii sra ainina 326 5 Ue Em 326 SENSe MIXer EOSS TABLe BI TL ira eiii idein to repu no La pp nra FRE eu Favor iude 326 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW tette tentent 327 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW eccentric 327 SEN rubenasrq me 327 SENSeTMIXer RFOVelratigel STAT t uc tds cael ee b exe Fe ees 327 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency a
420. iM Clrw Start 0 002 Stop 0 002 Fig 5 2 Demodulation settings for PSK MSK and QAM modulation User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 203 R amp S FSW K70 Configuration Demodulation amp Measurement Filter LI Demodulation Demodulation Advanced Meas Filter h Compensate for Carrier Frequency Drift FSK Deviation Error Symbol Rate Error Equalizer State Mode Filter Length Reset Equalizer Preview Preview Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 21 888 MHz Stop 21 888 MHz Fig 5 3 Demodulation settings for FSK modulation r T Compensate for PSK MSK ASK QAM If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Thus these distortions are not shown in the calculated error values Note Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM val ues e Offset default on User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 204 Demodulation Settings Imbalance Amplitude Droop default on Symbol Rate Error required to display the SRE in the Result Summary Channel default on Note that channel distortion can only be determined if the equalizer is on see State on page 205 Thus compensation can only be disabled if the equalizer is on By default channel compensation is enabled to improve accuracy of the error results If compensation is disabled the EVM is calculated from the original input signal with
421. iate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL 11 9 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the calculated VSA parameters Retrieving Results All results that are not based on the capture buffer data are calculated for a single result range only see chapter 4 6 1 Result Range on page 123 To retrieve the results for several result ranges use the SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC on page 366 command to move from one result range to the next 11 9 1 e Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values sse 431 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA lt gt 22 435 Retrieving Parameter creen eee euin 437 e Retieving Limit Check Results rre ten rire eek er uH 448 Retrieving Trace Data and Marker Values In order to retrieve the trace and marker results in a remote environment use the fol lowing commands gt lt gt 8084 431 gt lt gt 2 431 Culate lt n gt MARKEr lt m gt Y 2 432 15 lt gt lt gt 5 5 432 15
422. if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 349 INPut GAIN VALue on page 349 Input Coupling Input Settings The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 319 RF Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital Baseband Interface option R amp S FSW B17 Attenuation Mode Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting By default an
423. ified in digital standards various pre defined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the option In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measure ments For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 2 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 472 This section provides instructions for the following tasks To perform a measurement according to a standard on page 239 Toload predefined settings files on page 240 e To store settings as a standard file on page 240 delete standard files on page 240 Torestore standard files on page 241 To perform a measurement according to a standard 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the VSA application 2 Press the MEAS key and select the Digital Standards softkey 3 Select the required settings file and then Load see To load predefined settings files on page 240 The instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard and a measurement is started immediately How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards 4 Press the RUN SINGLE key to stop the continuous measurement mode and start a defined number of measurements The measured data is stored in the capture buffer and can be analyzed see chap ter 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data on page 250 To load predefined settings files 1 In the Meas menu select the Digi
424. ignal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Input Output and Frontend Settings Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on page 348 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increases the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay
425. ilter 1 3 GHz YIG Preselector Preamplifier Preview Preview Spectrum RealImag CapBuf Radio Frequency SEALS a cepe ti ieee yates ed De LR 149 061 pL 149 Fligh Pass Filter 1 3 Oz ci 150 150 Preamplifier option 24 150 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 320 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 319 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 149 Input Output and Frontend Settings High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of th
426. ime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Capture Length beider itm ttr tuta tae nde ERR nce 181 Sample Sale c baie Rd 182 Maximum rre rrr dea eh EY eerta vr vette eds id 182 Usable VQ REF RR Rex Ex 182 M T 183 Capture Length Settings The capture length defines how many symbols are captured during each measure ment Enable the Auto option to define the capture length automatically according to the burst and pattern length settings and the statistics count Thus a minimal capture length is used which improves performance User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 184 Signal Capture If the capture length is not defined automatically enter the number of symbols or sec onds to be captured and select the used unit The defined number is converted to the alternative unit seconds symbols for reference As of firmware version 1 70 up to 64000 symbols can be captured and processed dur ing each measurement previously 50000 Remote command SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO on 357 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue on page 358 Sample Rate Defines the number of samples to capture per symbol The sample rate in MHz is indi cated for reference This parameter affects th
427. imi ted by the number of pretrigger samples See table 4 3 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 361 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 362 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Note For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the base band power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid uninten tional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 361 Slope For all trigger sources except time and frequency mask Realtime only you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 364 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 362 Capture
428. in The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly If the Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Continuous Sweep function does not start data capturing it merely has an effect on trace averaging over multiple sequen ces In this case trace averaging is performed Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate CONTinuous on page 392 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of evaluations set in Statistics Count The mea surement stops after the defined number of evaluations has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Signal Capture Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next tim
429. in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name noo Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Importing data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the ll Open icon the toolbar Select the I Q Import softkey ome Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension How to Export and Import Data 6 Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the data a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip amp or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser gt xzy xml How to Export and Import I Q Data 4 Drag the parameter XML file e g example xm1 into your web browser gt file xml D xzy xml xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Du
430. includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 See Search Next Peak on page 224 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 224 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 See Search Next Minimum on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a
431. ing FUNCIONS deste 224 Individual Marker Settings In VSA evaluations up to 5 markers can be activated in each diagram at any time 5 Analysis Markers Marker Settings Search Range Selected State Stimulus Settings All Marker Off 22972191 1 Code Domain Power Marker Selected Marke 221 Marker T re 221 PREV AUG 221 aui icio Y 222 Assigning the Marker to amp uc cia cert rtt xdi xk iint Ea 222 6 222 Couple WINdOWS M 222 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 400 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 401 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X page 401 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 400 6 3 2 Markers Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These typ
432. ing parameters lt FineSyncAuto gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 1 Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 209 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel lt SERLevel gt This command sets the Fine Sync Level if fine sync works on Known Data Configuring Setting parameters lt SERLevel gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 0 RST 10 0 Default unit PCT Manual operation See If SER lt on 210 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult The result of this query is 0 if the fine sync with known data failed otherwise 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 209 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE lt FineSync gt This command defines the fine synchronization mode used to calculate results e g the bit error rate Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in refer ence to the analyzed data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed See SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 381 Setting parameters lt FineSync gt KDATa PATTern DDATa KDATa The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data PATTern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern This setting requires an activated pattern search see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 371 DDATa Default The reference signal is estim
433. ion Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 374 5 8 Result Range Configuration Mod order The order of modulation e g 8 for an 8 PSK Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 373 Symbols The pattern definition is a symbol table consisting of one or more symbols The number of symbols is indicated as the Size to the left of the symbol table A scrollbar beneath the input area alows you to scroll through the table for long pat terns The numbers beneath the scrollbar indicate the sequential number of the follow ing symbols from left to right e the first symbol e the currently selected symbol e the last symbol Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 372 Symbol format Symbols Defines the format in which each symbol is defined hexadecimal decimal or binary Adding symbols Symbols Adds a new symbol in the symbol table to the left of the currently selected symbol Removing symbols Symbols Removes the currently selected symbol the symbol table Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 371 Result Range Configuration The result range determines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is dis played For more
434. itDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 460 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt m gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable LMARgin lt m gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHo NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt
435. ithms used to quantify specific modulation errors are then outlined The descriptions vary depending on the modulation type e PSK QAM MSK 106 116 4 5 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation 4 5 1 1 Error Model Modelling Modulation Errors Modulated RF Signal Amplitude Quadrature Inbalance Offset VQ Offset Distorsion Fig 4 53 Modelling Modulation Errors The measured signal model for PSK QAM and MSK modulation is shown in fig ure 4 53 and can be expressed as MEAS REF 1 jo REF e Jef eomm n t where REF t and REF t the inphase and quadrature component of the reference signal g and the effects of the gain imbalance c and the effects of an offset 9 the quadrature error a the amplitude droop Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors fo the carrier frequency offset the carrier phase offset C the timing offset n t a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power 4 5 1 2 Estimation The VSA application includes two synchronization stages The first stage has already been described in the context of the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions block see chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 99 The second stage is realized within the Synchronization block Here the meas
436. ive R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the probe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 344 5 5 2 Output Settings The R amp S FSW VSA application can provide output to special connectors for other devi ces For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters Output settings can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key or in the Outputs dia log box User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 165 5 5 3 Input Output and Frontend Settings Output Digital IQ Output IF Frequency IE VIde 166 166 IF Video Output Defines the type of signal available at the IF OUT connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW For restrictions and additional information see the R amp S FSW User Manual IF 2 GHz Out The measured IF value is available at the IF OUT output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz with a bandwidth of 2 GHz This setting is only available for instrument models R amp S FSW43 50 67 Remote command OUTPut
437. ive sweep mode Activate Description to display a visualization of the behavior of the current settings Note If the Statistic Count is set to 7 trace averaging is not performed Max Hold and Min Hold however remain active unlike in the Spectrum application 5 7 Burst and Pattern Configuration Auto In single sweep mode captures the I Q data once and evaluates it In continuous sweep mode captures data continuously for each evaluation the average is calculated over the last 10 capture sets moving average Manual In single sweep mode captures data until the defined number of evaluations have been performed In continuous sweep mode captures data continuously if trace averaging is selected the average is calculated over the defined number of capture sets moving average Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue on 366 Select Result Rng Selects the result range from the capture buffer that you want to evaluate This function is available in single sweep mode only By default the application shows the results over all result ranges that have been cap tured in the signal capturing process and are in the R amp S FSW s memory By selecting a range number you can evaluate a specific result range e g a particular burst The range depends on the number of result ranges you have captured previously For more information refer also to chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 1
438. jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component Only Low IF 1 The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 341 Input configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain I Q signal via 2 simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Differential 1 and inverse 1 0 data Single Ended l data only Remote command INPut I
439. je M 94 PREM O16 es 377 Synchronization 206 209 Diagram footer information 14 Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control 340 Analog Baseband 164 Differential PSK DPSK Symbol MAPPING cis 78 DiglConf Softkey see also R amp S DiglConf 162 Digital Baseband Interface 17 167 Connected instrument Input settings mnn e nene Input status remote teretes 335 Output connection status remote Output settings Digital Bandwidth S siisii innn aae Connection information Enhariced mode neben Input connection information 162 Input settings Output settings Output settings information Sample rates rir ree rer erra Digital input Bandwidth S ten rere Connection information T ISeSIIIClIODS n rre rennes Digital output Enabling ereas ee prr c s 167 SeSIIICliOliS n rcr terret rr err 72 Digital standards Assigned 196 Assigning patterns EN Configuration correr trc 4135 Performing measurement according to ET Predefined nn cr 472 REMO
440. keying FSK involves the encoding of information in the frequency of a transmitted signal As opposed to other modulation formats such as PSK and QAM the FSK process is a non linear transformation of the transmitted data into the trans mitted waveform Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors A sequence of symbols s are modulated using a frequency pulse g t to form the instantaneous frequency of the transmitted complex baseband waveform denoted by frer t and defined as face iT where fsymp 1 T is the symbol rate and h is a scaling factor termed the modulation index The transmitted or reference FSK signal is formed by frequency modulation of the instantaneous frequency i2 ae REF t e where pe t denotes the phase of the transmitted waveform In the VSA application continuous phase FSK signal is assumed which is ensured by the integral in the expression for REF t A graphical depiction of the reference waveform generation is shown below in figure 4 62 Frequency Modulator Fig 4 62 Reference complex baseband FSK signal generation Reference Deviation The transmitted symbols 5 are assumed to be chosen from a finite and real valued constellation of M values The maximum absolute constellation point is denoted by The maximum phase contribution of a data symbol is given by Pmax 72 2 Guy The reference deviation of the FSK
441. l Rate Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset Cap Len Capture Length instead of result length for capture buffer display see Capture Length Settings on page 181 mE User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 13 Understanding the Display Information Input Input type of the signal source see chapter 5 5 1 Input Settings on page 148 Burst Burst search active see Enabling Burst Searches on page 192 Pattern Pattern search active see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 194 Stat Count Statistics count for averaging and other statistical operations see Statis tic Count on page 190 cannot be edited directly Capt Count Capture count the current number of captures performed if several cap tures are necessary to obtain the number of results defined by Statistics Count cannot be edited directly SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the display of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 Const I Q Meas amp Ref Fig 2 1 Window title ba
442. l previously deter mined reference signals and measurement signals are averaged to determine the cur rent equalizer function Thus the results of previous sweeps are continuously consid ered to calculate the current equalizer values Averaging is only restarted when the instrument is switched off or when the user manually resets the equalizer Obviously this method requires a stable input signal for the entire duration of the measurement as otherwise the current equalizer is distorted by previous results This process requires extended calculation time so that the measurement update rate of the instrument decreases distinctly When the distortions are compensated suffi ciently this averaging process can be stopped The current filter is frozen that means itis no longer changed Keep in mind that in Tracking and Averaging mode for sweep counts gt 1 repeated analysis of past result ranges might lead to differing readings The equalizer algorithm is limited to PSK and QAM modulation schemes as the optimi zation criterion of the algorithm is based on minimizing the mean square error vector magnitude Thus it cannot be used for FSK modulation User defined equalizers Instead of tracking equalizer values repeatedly for different input signals you can store existing values to a file and load them again later This is useful if signals from the same input source are measured frequently In this case you only have to perform a calculation o
443. lated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals d 1 FREQ 5 5 g MEAS with duration of one sampling period at sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal 3 FreqRel Meas amp Ref o 1M Fig 3 9 Result display Frequency Relative SSS gt E gt SSS NUUS SU User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 32 Result Types in Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see L AYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat page 426 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 430 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe n on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 3 2 13 Frequency Error Absolute Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency in Hz of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a f
444. lay and Window Configuration on page 228 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 Bit Error Rate BER Channel Frequency Response Group Delay Channel Frequency Response Magnitude Constellation Frequency Constellation Constellation Rotated Error Vector Magnitude EVM Eye Diagram Frequency Eye Diagram Imag Q Eye Diagram Real I Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative Frequency Error Absolute Frequency Error Relative Frequency Response Group Delay Frequency Response Magnitude Frequency Response Phase 3 2 1 Result Types in VSA e Impulse Response 38 Impulse Response ton dee c e o nd b e edd 39 e Impulse Response Roal lmag eene rixa inci 39 e IMagrnideADSOIUIB iere Re xe 40 e Magnitude Overview 00000000 eene nennen 41 e Magnitude Relative eine ciere Rede C LR RR EXIRET RE E RENE ELE EORR RA ER 43 Manuo EO etr em rate Lade ta Sra 43 icio 44 a 45 e Phase e neds 46 C E 47 Result SUMMA 48 oos 52 e Vector ooo rcr E PE
445. le MODulation n IQRHo PTRansition essen 461 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n IQRHo EVENt eese 459 5 5 lt gt 459 5 0 lt 5 lt gt 2 20 00 00 460 5 5 lt gt 2 461 5 5 lt gt 2 461 5 0 lt 5 lt gt 2 459 5 5 lt gt aiia nnne nnne 461 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe CONDition essen 459 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe ENABle lt gt 5 461 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n PHASe PTRansition esses 462 5 0 lt 5 lt gt 2 222 004000 459 5
446. le for the baseband power trigger source when using the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 187 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 187 Configuring VSA TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it For external and time domain trigger sources you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 188 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selec
447. lection 9 2 5 Averaging Several Evaluations By default all measurement windows are displayed with a single trace which is the Clear Write trace This trace displays the result of the current evaluation i e the high lighted blue area from the example in chapter 9 2 4 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer on page 264 However for most real world measurement tasks you need to obtain a result that is averaged over a certain number of evaluations or a worst case result of a certain number of evaluations This section explains how to achieve this To evaluate EVM vs Time 1 Configure window 1 such that it displays the EVM versus time measurement Source Error Vector Result Type EVM see chapter 9 2 3 Changing the Dis play Configuration on page 263 Select the window to set the focus on it 2 To display the trace averaged over several measurements or the maximum hold trace over several measurements press the TRACE key 3 Add further traces by pressing the TRACE key and then either using the Trace 2 3 or the Trace Config softkeys Set the second trace to Average and the third trace to Max Hold Note that the configured traces appear in the window title SSS SS ee User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 265 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Start 0 sym Stop 800 sym Fig 9 5 Several traces in one window 4 Press RUN SINGLE again The current capture buffer is evaluated for this trace setup In t
448. list but not deleted Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove on page 374 Adding patterns to a standard Adds the selected patterns in the list of available patterns Patterns to the list of assigned patterns Standard Patterns For details see To add a predefined pattern to a standard on page 243 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD page 374 Displaying available patterns The All Patterns list contains the patterns available in the VSA application You can assign available patterns to the selected standard edit existing or define new patterns For details on managing standard patterns see chapter 8 2 2 3 How to Manage Patterns on page 246 The list can be filtered using the following functions Prefix Displaying available patterns Shows only patterns that contain the specified prefix Show Compatible Show Displaying available patterns Shows only patterns that are compatible to the selected modulation mode or all pat terns regardless of the selected standard Edit Opens the Edit Pattern dialog box to edit the pattern definition See chapter 5 7 4 Pattern Definition on page 198 For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 245 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 373 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 371 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 372 SENSe
449. lly in all measurement windows Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ALL on page 389 6 6 1 Trace Settings Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers windows etc can be configured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analy sis functions in the base unit except for the special window functions Window specific configuration The settings in the Analysis dialog box are specific to the selected window Thus the Analysis button is only available in the Overview if the Specifics for option is enabled To configure the settings for a different VSA window select the window out side the displayed dialog box or select the window from the Specifics for selection list in the dialog box LEM 216 Trace Export SeftlgB eei D dede n ded teda LIE 219 Pm 220 e Modulation Accuracy oett ndr et ttd eve 225 e Display and Window 0 228 LOOM FUNCIONS EEE EEEE ii 231 s Analysis in MSRAIMSRT MOoda acte ret rt dad end e ta 233 Trace Settings The trace settings determine how the measured data is analyzed and displayed in the window Depending on the result display between
450. log box 3 Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns 4 Press Delete Pattern The pattern is removed from the lists of available and assigned patterns and can no longer be assigned to any standard Any existing assignments to other stand ards are removed as well To restore predefined patterns Default patterns provided by Rohde amp Schwarz can be restored 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Select Restore Factory Settings softkey 3 Select the Restore Pattern Files softkey The patterns as defined by Rohde amp Schwarz at the time of delivery are restored How to Perform Customized Measurements Restoring user defined patterns User defined patterns can only be restored if you have a copy of the pattern file cre ated during creation In this case copy the file named Patternname xml back to the installation directory of the VSA application under vsa standards After a preset or after performing certain operations e g changing the modulation settings the pat tern will be included in the list of All Patterns again 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files 8 2 3 1 You can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the VSA application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions e Fine synchronization during the demodulation process see figure 4 45 and Fine Synchronization on page 209 e Calculation of the Bit E
451. lt on page 382 If SER S This setting is only available if Known Data is selected for Fine Synchronization You can define a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the evaluated data Thus if a wrong file was mistakenly loaded or the file proves to be unsuitable it is not used for synchronization Otherwise the results would be strongly distorted If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 381 Offset EVM The offset EVM is only available for Offset QPSK modulated signals Unlike QPSK modulation the Q component of Offset QPSK modulation is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain The symbol time instants of the and the Q component therefore do not coincide The offset EVM controls the calculation of all results that are based on the error vector It affects the EVM Real Imag and Vector I Q result displays as well as the EVM results in the Result Summary EVM and MER You can configure the way the VSA application calculates the error vector results If Offset EVM is disabled the VSA application substracts the measured signal from the reference signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period one that corresponds to the component and one th
452. lude user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Data File Format iq tar Sample iq tar files Some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e Q data binary file e g xyz complex f10oat32 Contains the binary data of all channels There must be only one single data binary file inside iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file preview XSLT file e g open xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the parameter XML file and a preview of the data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwa
453. lyzer and Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel on 348 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Input Output and Frontend Settings Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value Note however that the Reference Level value ignores the Reference Level Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal A positive value indicates that an attenuation took place R amp S FSW increases the displayed power values a negative value indicates an external gain R amp S FSW decreases the displayed power values The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 348 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines the optimal reference level for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are
454. m 3 Press the Delete button 4 Confirm the message to avoid unintentionally deleting a standard The standard file is removed from the folder 8 2 How to Perform Customized Measurements To restore standard files 1 Torestore the predefined standard files do one of the following e Inthe Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey The Manage VSA Standards file selection dialog box is displayed e Inthe Meas menu select the Restore Factory Settings softkey 2 Select Restore Standard Files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery are restored to the Standards folder How to Perform Customized VSA Measurements In addition to performing vector signal analysis strictly according to specific digital standards you can configure the analysis settings for customized tasks The general process for a typical measurement is described here 1 Press the MODE key on the front panel and select the VSA application 2 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for VSA 3 Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics If the input data is largely known in advance define files with the known data to compare the measured data to see chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 247 This can improve demodulation significantly 4 Select the Input Frontend button to define the input sig
455. m The measurement window does not show average results 287 Problem The spectrum is not displayed the logarithmic domain 288 Problem The Vector result display and the Constellation result display look dif ferente eere eme 288 Problem The Constellation measurement result display has a different number of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S 5 70 288 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSW K70 or Why do have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ the R amp S FSW IT tetendit id eyed Y Cr Ro e eas 289 Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is significantly slip EM 289 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSW K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR in R amp S FSQ KJIQT eee ert dt t ti tina 291 Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result display 292 Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative 02 72 42 4 4 292 Question How can get demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer inimemele Control 292 Question Why do the EVM results FSK modulated si
456. m the right edge of the current result range is displayed in the center of the next range Overview vs details While the Magnitude Absolute and other result displays based on the capture buffer Real Imag Vector I Q chapter 3 2 11 Frequency Absolute on page 30 only display a single result range at a time the Magnitude Overview Absolute displays the entire capture buffer at once However the overview trace is restricted to 25 000 points If necessary the captured samples are mapped to 25 000 display points using an autopeak detector for display in the Magnitude Overview Absolute diagram Thus this result display is not suitable to detect transient effects or analyze individual sym bols closely For these purposes the Magnitude Absolute result display is suited bet ter where one display point can be displayed for each sample taken Since the result ranges are only calculated and processed one after the other after the entire capture process has been completed the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display is displayed sooner than the Magnitude Absolute display with several ranges However for large capture lengths all result displays based on the capture buffer require some time before results are displayed Restrictions Trace modes that calculate results for several sweeps Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual ranges in the capture buffer diagrams and thus may not provide useful results For the
457. m the configuration described in chapter 9 3 4 Evaluating the Rising and Falling Edges on page 271 Select window 4 to set the focus on it Press the TRACE key and then the Trace 2 softkey Select Clear Write as the Trace Mode and Evaluation Ref This adds a sec ond trace to your result display This trace is the ideal reference signal that can now be compared to the measurement signal see figure 9 13 SS WC HN M USt User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 273 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples 5 To view the traces in more detail enlarge the window using the Split Maximize key and zoom into the display using the icon in the toolbar see the dot ted rectangle in figure 9 13 Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 2408 Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 200 BURST PATTERN D MagAbs Meas amp Ref __ Start 26 sym i Stop 174 sym Fig 9 13 Zooming Now you can compare the measured and the ideal reference signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 274 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations the following tips may help you optimize or troubleshoot the measurement 10 1 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting seccina enne nnne 275 Explanation of Error 277 Frequently Asked Questions eerie ex
458. mands are required to control the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in a remote environment They are only available if this option is instal led For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW Ana lyzer User Manual Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 320 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 346 SENSe SWAPiq on page 358 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output STAT eiii tore re eno deoa o sd e Kone 340 e AUTO 340 INPUutIG PULL Sale uz Cw 340 INPublO TYBE rre tee a rr a D 341 GALibration AIQ DGOFPTsetel aci citta cr eet ta y ree taa ee co aee de eda 341 GALibration AlG DCOFTSEUG n a ER n Fan V Ta bie ex wea aae 341 SENSES SETUp CMOPF SSl oh Ei ee den ete 342 TRAGCeIG APGoOn STATe 5 Den E 342 TRACE JQ AP COMA E 343 343 TRACEIQ APCon rete n et tiv d et e en Lived 343 Configuring VSA
459. marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level Analysis If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on 225 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer SEARch lt MarkReallmag gt This command specifies whether the marker search works on the real or the imag trace for all markers Setting parameters lt MarkReallmag gt REAL IMAG RST REAL Manual operation See Real Imag Plot on page 224 CALCulate MARKer X SLIMits LEFT lt SearchLimit gt This command defines the left limit of the marker search range If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Parameters lt SearchLimit gt The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST left diagram border lt Limit gt Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 0 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 224
460. mbol During synchronization the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal and various signal parameters are calculated as well as the optional equalizer You can define how many sample points are used for this calculation at each symbol Typi cally this is one point per symbol symbol rate or a factor of 4 sample rate User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 126 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol Display points per symbol The number of points per symbol used for calculation may vary from the number of points used to display the results of the calculation If more points per symbol are selected than the defined sample rate the additional points are interpolated for the dis play The more points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes as illustrated in figure 4 70 IZQ Vector Meas amp Ref B I Q Vector Meas amp Ref amp 1M Cirw Stop 2 91 imMCirw 01 0 Vector Meas amp Ref 1M Cirw Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 2 Stop 2 91 Fig 4 70 Result display with different numbers of points per symbol window A 1 window 2 window C 4 window D 16 The displayed points per symbol also determine how many values are returned when the trace data is queried by a remote command see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 For results based on the capture buffer one display point is displayed for each sam ple taken i e the display points per s
461. mbol mappings for QPSK modulation D D D D DEM TFIL ALPH 0 35 Select the RRC transmit filter LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVEC Create new window to the right of I Q constellation window 1 with error vector as data type Result 5 CALC5 FORM MAGN Set result type for window 5 to magnitude EVM DISPlay WINDow5 TRACe2 MODE AVER Add second trace in average mode DISPlay WINDow5 TRACe3 MODE MAXH Add a third trace in max hold mode SWE COUN 10 Calculate an average over 10 sweeps Programming Examples INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiate a new measurement and wait until the 10 sweeps have finished DISP WIND1 SIZE LARG Display the I Q Constellation result display window 1 in full screen HCOP DEST MMEM Define the destination of the screenshot as a file HCOP DEV LANG BMP Select bmp as the file format MMEM NAME C R_S INST USER IQConstellation bmp Select the file name for the printout HCOP ITEM ALL Print all screen elements HCOP Store the printout in a file called IQConstellation bmp DISP WIND5 SIZE SMAL Restore the I Q Constellation result display to one subwindow FORM DEXP HEAD ON Include a header in the trace export file FORM DEXP MODE TRAC Export the trace data not raw I Q data MMEM STOR4 TRAC 1 AverageEVM Save the detected symbol values x values are not exported with trace data Results MMEM STOR5 TRAC
462. mbols that can be demodulated in the sequence from the input signal Possible characters are Up to 6000 different sequences i e Data elements can be 0 to n 1 where n is the defined in total lt ModulationOrder gt Spaces tabs and line breaks are ignored lt RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA FILE as specified File End the exact number also depends on available memory space Sample xml file for known data RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE Version 01 00 gt Comment Standard EDGE 8PSK lt Comment gt Base 16 lt gt lt ModulationOrder gt 8 lt ModulationOrder gt lt ResultLength gt 148 lt ResultLength gt lt Data gt 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 7 Data Data 77 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 177 177 171 117 777 177 717 717 111 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 7 7 Data 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 Data 7 5 1 5 ITI 777 177 717 717 111 615 7 6 770 17 177 17 527 04 241 26 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 7 77 Data 4 0 Data 7 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 177 177 17
463. ment channel configuration an overview of the most important currently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus overview 0 00 Std nm EM _ Vector Signal Analysis Modulation npu Capture Length Symbol Rate nter Fre Sample Rate Tx Filter Signal Type Signal Description Estimation APS Demodulation Meas Filter Meas Filter Lu Specific Settings for In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The individual configuration steps are displayed in the order of the data flow Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Signal Description See chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 140 2 Input and Frontend Settings See chapter 5 5 Input Output and Frontend Settings on page 148 3 Signal Capture including Triggering See chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 180 4 Burst Pattern Configuration See chapter 5 7 Burst and Pattern Configuration on page 191 5 Result Range Definition See chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 200
464. ment window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 11 1 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Introduction 11 1 5 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ 11
465. meters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Introduction If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indica
466. mple See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Modulation Type on page 141 See Load User Modulation on page 142 SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate lt FSKNstate gt This command defines the demodulation of the FSK modulation scheme Setting parameters lt FSKNstate gt 21418 2 2FSK 4 4FSK 8 8FSK RST 2 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 142 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog This command queries the names of all mappings that are available for the current modulation type and order A mapping describes the assignment of constellation points to symbols Return values lt Mappings gt A comma separated list of strings with one string for each map ping name Example SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog Result CDMA2K FWD DVB S2 GRAY NATURAL WCDMA Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 464 Usage Query only Manual operation See Modulation Mapping on page 143 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue lt Mapping gt To obtain a list of available symbol mappings for the current modulation type use the SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog query Setting parameters Mapping Example Example Example Manual operation Configuring VSA stri
467. n See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Analysis Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 See Search Next Minimum on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak on page 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak sets the marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Max on page 224 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search
468. n be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Miri 2 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Displays the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace R amp S9FSW K70 l Analysis paese c H UTERE ua For the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display only one trace is available Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 398 6 2 Trace Export Settings The captured trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file The format of these files can be configured Traces 5 3G WCDMA SR 3 84 MHz mm Traces Trace Export Mode Header Decimal Seperator Point Export Trace to ASCII File for all Windows Export Trace to ASCII File for Specific Window 7 1 Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref gt Decimal Separator Fer ERROR SAXA US M ETE 220 ASC gt coro RC 220 Data Export Mode Defines whether raw 1 0 data as captured or trace data evaluated is stored Remote command FORMat DEXPort M
469. n be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 159 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results 8 Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PO
470. n gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow 2 query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example Usage Manual operation Configuring the Result Display LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Query only See Capture Buffer on page 16 See Measurement amp Reference Signal on page 16 See Symbols on page 17 See Error Vector on page 17 See Modulation Errors on page 17 See Modulation Accuracy on page 18 See Equalizer on page 18 See Signal Source on page 229 For a detailed example see chapt
471. n page 153 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 321 Parameters Band USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Manual operation See Band on page 152 Configuring Table 11 2 Frequency ranges pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Parameters State Example Manual operation ON OFF RST OFF MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON See Range 1 2 on page 153 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high Second range Parameters HarmOrder Example Manual operation numeric value 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Range MIX HARM HI
472. n page 465 Manual operation See Data Export Mode on page 219 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode Retrieving Results In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters Trace Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace ASCII Export on page 220 See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 235 SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst STARt This command queries the start of the current result range within the capture buffer Return values lt StartValue gt Symbol or time at which x axis starts Example INIT CONT OFF switch to single sweep mode INIT WAI perform single sweep SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC 1 switch to first result range SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR START query start
473. n the estimation model is described in detail in section chap ter 4 5 2 FSK Modulation on page 116 The parameters of the FSK specific result summary table can be related to the distortion model parameters as follows Table 1 8 Evaluation of results in the FSK result summary Frequency Error RMS x Xrneo nno r Y i max FREQ ERR n T Magnitude Error RMS 1 XMao Eni T Y Peak max MAG _ERR n T Formulae FSK Deviation Error _ _ grr m A uras m A per 1 A ger A ERR 8 220 Estimated FSK deviation error Hz FSK Measurement Deviation A meas B Age A MEAS Estimated FSK deviation of the meas signal Hz FSK Reference Deviation FSK reference deviation as entered by the user Hz AREF Carrier Frequency Error C h _ fo 2 T The carrier frequency error of the measured signal Hz Carrier Frequency Drift D The drift in the carrier frequency of the measured signal Hz Sym A 6 3 Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary The statistical evaluations in the result summary are based on the measurement results that are displayed in the Current column Hence the index m here repre sents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count If the measurement values are represented in the logarithmic domain the linear values are averaged The result is then subsequ
474. n ti tret rer rr re her rire E e eas LAYout REPLace WINDow 423 gt 423 EAYout WINDowsn REMO eee tein ce mcrito arise t see aE a aime aii ence 424 LAYout WINDOWS M gt REPLACE M I EC 424 EAY Out WINBOwSmDs ROSE Vei reve EAE YER 424 MMEMOrn EOAD IQ S TATG a ctio chi esee mere Fono Lx Poe ird 450 MMEMory STORe IQ COMMBTI rr tc ro er rena ehe tnr c Pr Fe E kae 450 MMEMory STOR amp IQ S TATO6 rne orte ha et i te e tr eer n e eO ELE ee ee pad 451 STORES H gt e YR COR EXER dune Re 433 eio 338 OUTPUtDIO CDEV CG 338 5 346 STAT s QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDIOT HR a er ce re vea 459 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimitENABI 2 ttt atit ee te E pd etr ge eg le eara 460 STATus QUEStionable ACPlimitIN TRAMSITOMN sic ce
475. n you select the Signal Capture but ton from the Overview or the Signal Capture softkey from the main VSA menu tee xt e aeu te ene 180 Trigger SOUS sie tree riore ie E 183 PU 189 5 61 Data Acquisition The Data Acquisition settings define how much and how data is captured from the input signal A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly The Data Acquisition settings are displayed when you select the Signal Capture button from the Overview or the Signal Capture softkey from the main VSA menu R amp S9FSW K70 Configuration gt Data Acquisition Trigger Capture Length Auto sm 2 083 5 Sample Rate 4 Symbol Rate 7 15 36 MHz Maximum Bandwidth Auto Usable 1 0 Bandwidth 12 288 MHz Swap 1 0 Preview Mag CaptureBuffer 0 8000 sym MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the VSA application in MSRA MSRT mode define the application data extract and analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realt
476. nal Description Signal Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 Max Length 148 sym 546 462 Run In sym 11 077 Run Out B sym 11 077 w Pattern I 1 7 Start sym Stop 151 sym Mag CapBuf 1 Cirw DGE_TSCC 5 0 0s Descriptio e Burst Lengthi Offset Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym 09 09 26 Fig 10 7 GSM EDGE burst Pattern is actually located in the middle of the burst The correct value for Offset here would be 58 Solution Try one of the following Remove the offset unknown Enter the correct offset within about 4 symbols of tolerance For more information see Offset on page 146 e The specified pattern does not coincide with the pattern in your signal In the R amp S FSQ K70 it is possible to search for multiple patterns at the same time For example in a GSM measurement the capture buffer can be checked for all TSCs simultaneously This is not possible in the R amp S FSW K70 Solution Make sure that the correct pattern is specified in the Signal Description dialog User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 281 R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement For more information see chapter 5 4 Signal Description on page 140 Message Result Alignment Failed The result range alignment i
477. nal Description Transmit Filter Type Defines the type of transmit filter An overview of available transmit filters is provided in chapter A 3 1 Transmit Filters on page 479 For more information on transmit filters see chapter 4 1 3 Modulation and Demodula tion Filters on page 59 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 314 To define the name of the transmit filter to be used SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe on page 314 To switch off the transmit filter SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER on page 315 To select a user defined filter Load User Filter Transmit Filter Type Opens file selection dialog box to select the user defined transmit filter to be used Note If a user defined transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically see Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto on page 211 a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used For details see chapter 4 1 5 Customized Filters on page 62 For detailed instructions on working with user defined filters see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters on page 242 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER on page 315 SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 314 Alpha BT Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for transmit filter is available for RC RRC Gaus
478. nal s center frequency amplitude and other basic settings 5 Select the Signal Capture button and define how much and which data to cap ture In MSRA MSRT mode define the application data instead see chapter 4 10 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode on page 130 e Capture length the duration or number of symbols to be captured e Sample rate how many points are to be captured for each symbol 6 Optionally select the Trigger tab and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an external trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted In MSRA MSRT mode define a Capture Offset instead see chapter 4 10 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode on page 130 7 For bursted signals select the Burst Pattern button and define the criteria to detect the individual bursts within the input signal see chapter 8 2 2 How to Per form Pattern Searches on page 243 How to Perform Customized Measurements 8 Select the Cut Result Ranges button and define which of the captured data is to be demodulated see chapter 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range on page 249 9 Select the Demodulation button to configure and optimize the synchronization process 10 Select the Meas filter button to select a different or user defined measurement fil ter to improve the accuracy of the error vector see chapter 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters on page 242 11 Select the Eval
479. nals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 5 5 1 2 Input Output and Frontend Settings 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 349 INPut GAIN VALue on page 349 External Mixer Settings The external mixer is configured in the External Mixer tab of the Input dialog box which is available when you do one of the following if the R amp S FSW B21 option is installed e Press the INPUT OUTPUT key then select the External Mixer Config softkey e From the Overview select Input then switch to the External Mixer tab under Input Source Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode For details on using external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual e 151 Basic Songs 154 e Managing Conversion Loss e rein enini 156 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss 157 Mixer Settings In this tab you configure the band and specific mi
480. nalyze results with their corresponding remote control command e QData Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw measurement data e Howto Perform Measurements in VSA The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods e Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately e Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the test setup e Remote Commands for VSA Remote commands required to configure and perform VSA measurements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes e Annex Reference material e List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Documentation Overview Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service
481. nce and can use the same equalizer filter again and again Filter length The length of the equalizer can be defined in symbols The longer the equalizer the higher the resolution in the frequency domain is and the more distortion can be com pensated The shorter the filter length the less calculation time is required during the equalizer s tracking or averaging phase Estimation points per symbol You can define how many sample points are used for the equalizer calculation at each symbol Estimation points per symbol see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Symbol on page 126 Typically this is one point per symbol 7 symbol rate or a factor of 2 Channel EVM The equalizer not only compensates for distortions in the measurement signal but also improves the accuracy of the estimated ideal reference signal Thus it is usually rec ommendable to enable the equalizer once you have analyzed the original input signal on the R amp S FSW By default the error results are calculated using the compensated values if the equalizer is enabled However you can disable the compensation for channel results in order to analyze the actual error values obtained from the distorted channel User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 105 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 4 5 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors This section describes the signal and error models used within the VSA application The estimation algor
482. nctions are only available from the toolbar MNO M Multiple oe Restore Original Display Deactivating Zoom Selection mode ee De t e ere eet e e e 232 Zoom Functions Single Zoom ER A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 416 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on 416 Multiple Zoom E In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn Z0OM MULTiple zoom STATe on page 417 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 416 Restore Original Display Restores the original display and closes all zoom windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M STATe on page 416 single zoom DISPlay WINDow n Z200M MULTiple czoom STATe on 417 for each multiple zoom window Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer
483. nd a suitable bandwidth the usable bandwidth achieved for the current settings see Usable 1 0 Bandwidth o The Signal Capture dialog box Data Acquisition tab shows the sample rate and on page 182 e After the optional measurement filter The measurement signal and the reference signal can be filtered by various mea surement filters which have different bandwidths The filters described above are the ones that directly affect the bandwidth of the cap tured data and the final measurement signal and reference signal Note however that several other filters are also involved in the DSP section but are not mentioned above e Receive filter to prevent ISI intersymbol interference e filters necessary for various estimators e others 4 1 4 1 Bandwidth The bandwidth of the data used as input for the vector signal analysis is filtered as described in chapter 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 57 Its flat usable bandwidth no considerable amplitude or phase distortion depends on e the used sample rate which depends on the defined Symbol Rate see Symbol Rate on page 143 the defined Sample Rate parameter see Sample Rate on page 182 e the type of input used digital baseband input RF input etc For details on the maximum usable bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 64 played in the Signal Capture dialog see
484. nd defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range Parameters lt FileName gt string file name gt Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 154 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 154 SENSe MIXer PORTSs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 213 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 153 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe State If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 152 Configuring Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables SENSe CORRection sinunt 328 SENSeTCORRScloOI CYL BIAS teer atl ed eter pee es ER ek eR ced ace 328 SENSe CORRection CVLICATAIOg 2i E EH
485. nd interface R amp S FSW B7 1 For more information on the the Digital Baseband Interface or the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW 1 Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 364 Power lt Trigger Source This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is used for input It is also not available for analysis bandwidths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled data exceeds the trigger threshold The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the Usable I Q Bandwidth setting for data acquisition see Usable Bandwidth on page 182 Remote command TRIG SOUR see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 364 Signal Capture Digital Trigger Source For applications that process data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note If the Digital enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps only the general purpose bits GPO and 1 are available as Digital trigger source The followin
486. ne the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 436 3 2 7 Error Vector Magnitude EVM Displays the error vector magnitude as a function of symbols or time EV t EVM t Ere with and duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 The normalization constant C is chosen according to the EVM normalization By default C is the mean power of the reference signal duration of symbol periods Note that k 0 5 n T for Offset QPSK with inactive Offset EVM User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 27 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays ei Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 5 Result display Error Vector Magnitude Available for source types e Error Vector Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EVEC to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 419 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 3 2 8 Eye Diagram Frequency The eye diagram of the currently measured frequencies and or the reference signal
487. nen ennt nnns nsns nsns nr sre rene 397 DISPlayEWINDowensETRACBSESMOQDE e eas eased teu e tu tte rt ens 397 DISPlay WINDow n TRAGe t STATe 1 rerit esce cuna ne canne na 398 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue lt TrRefType gt This commands selects the measurment or the reference signal as the data source for a trace Suffix lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt TrRefType gt MEAS REF RST The default for trace 1 is always the measurement signal MEAS For all other traces the default sig nal type depends on the current measurement Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Evaluation on page 218 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode Depending on the result display not all trace modes may be available Analysis Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep resul
488. ng SENS DDEM MAPP GSM Sets mapping to GSM See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 464 See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 See Modulation Mapping on page 143 SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat lt MSKformat gt This command defines the specific demodulation order for MSK Setting parameters MSKformat Manual operation TYPE1 TYPE2 NORMal DIFFerential TYPE1 NORMal Demodulation order MSK is used TYPE2 DIFFerential Demodulation order DMSK is used RST TYPE1 See Modulation Order on page 142 SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat PSKformat Together with DDEMod PSK NST this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate on page 312 Depending on the demodulation format and state the following orders are available NSTATe Name Order 2 any BPSK 8 NORMal 8PSK 8 DIFFerential D8PSK 8 N3Pi8 3pi 8 8PSK EDGE 8 PI8D8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Setting parameters lt PSKformat gt Manual operation NORMal DiFFerential N3Pi8 PIBD8PSK RST NORMal See Modulation Order on page 142 Configuring SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate lt PSKNstate gt Together with DDEMod PSK FORMat this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 311
489. ng Results Query parameters type none Amplitude droop in dB symbol for current sweep AVG Amplitude droop in dB symbol evaluating the linear average value over several sweeps RPE Peak value for amplitude droop over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of amplitude droop PCTL 95 percentile value of amplitude droop Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ALL The command queries all results of the result summary as shown on the screen Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the carrier frequency error measurement per formed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Carrier frequency error for current sweep AVG Average carrier frequency error over several sweeps RPE Peak carrier frequency error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency error PCTL 95 percentile value of frequency error Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM type This command queries the results of the error vector magnitude measurement of digital demodulation The output values are
490. ng order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 160 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 159 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 331 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring Parameters Type string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR C
491. nges the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error 100 100 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dBm 0 0 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters Index1 The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 422 Configuring the Result Display Example LAY SPL
492. niece dahin acne eoa ae RE ARE 413 CALCulate MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 233 CALCulate MSRA ALINe VALue Position This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master Parameters Position Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 233 CALCulate MSRA WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the index lt n gt This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It ha
493. nitude model is given by Apr t K e with K is a constant scaling factor which can be interpreted as the system gain and is the amplitude droop in Nepers per second The phase model is given by Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Prep 6 0 Ct V D with B is a scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error C is a carrier frequency offset in radians per second D is a frequency drift in radians per second per second Tis a timing offset in seconds and is a phase offset in radians For the above phase model an equivalent frequency distortion model may be expressed as 0 fo fat with B is the scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error 2 is a carrier frequency offset in Hz 0 2 is a frequency drift in Hz per second and Tis the timing offset in seconds The measured signal model in terms of the instantaneous frequency and all distortion parameters is given by t jr B ut fyt V f MEAS t e t e n t 4 5 2 2 Estimation The estimation of the distortion parameters listed previously is performed separately for the magnitude and phase frequency distortions as illustrated in figure 4 63 It is noted that the estimation of the timing offset is performed only on the frequency of the signal as the reference magnitude is assumed to be constant over the estimation range For
494. ns ect rere t rre terret Demodulation Demodulation process tenete 95 KNOW data ee 100 Symbol error rate SER Fine synchronization artnet 210 Symbol mapping 73 143 x scorta retenti 92 ASK tede Deis 91 Differential PSK docete a 78 H r 83 MSK 85 Offset QPSK 91 OOK 2 91 86 Rotating differentialPSK 80 Rotating 76 User defined Wizard x ceo cd reitera 93 Symbol number Result range start rre 202 Symbol rate x Basics DISPLAY MSRA MSRT mode tete 130 Relationship to sample 65 Ding ec 313 Symbol Rate eoi cette eee e creta con 204 Symbol Rate Error SRE E 109 Symbol tables Result type rrr rte rre re rre 52 Symbols Data SOUCO nm 17 Format patterns vi n Erie 200 rnnt irte 230 Patterns 200 RResultityD8s idee ico rt 17 Window Configuration 2 2 230 SynchronizatlOm i2 rt tk err retenta
495. nsmit ter VSA Vector Signal Analysis Measurement at complex modula ted RF carriers Predefined Standards and Settings In the Digital Standards menu predefined basic settings for standards can be selected and user defined standards stored see chapter 5 2 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 135 The most common measurements are predefined as standard settings for a large num ber of mobile radio networks The instrument comes prepared with the following set tings for those standards Capture length and result length Signal description Modulation Transmit filter and measurement filter Burst Pattern search configuration Result range alignment Evaluation range settings Display configuration The standard settings are grouped in folders to facilitate selecting a standard s ous e Jo SJOYIP si Jo 425 991 x Predefined Standards and Settings EN 3903 Wvo9L 7 YSN 3903 00817 gt SWO 39d GLivvl e weyed Srl 3903 WVO9L pezueeur zHX e8904z WVvO9IL v L 09 3903 13snqjeuu 3983 451 39q3 YSN 39d3 aN 3533 6 SWo ux GLivvl e weyed 871 OOSL 3903 2 0 6 5 8 8 12 8 3od3 cav WSS 8v Ws9 0 ANON
496. nt Ranges The application contains three measurement ranges that need to be set by the user Capture Buffer Length The length of the capture buffer specifies how many data points are captured dur ing a single measurement For example if you want to measure a bursted signal it is recommended that you make the capture length long enough to ensure that in each capture buffer at least one entire burst is included The maximum capture buffer length is 64 000 symbols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 samples Result Range The result range defines the symbols from the capture buffer that are to be demodulated and analyzed together For example bursted signals have intervals between the bursts that are not of interest when analyzing peaks or overshoots Thus the result range usually coin cides with the range of the capture buffer in which the burst is located The maximum result range length is the entire capture buffer which is 64 000 sym bols for a sample rate of 4 or 256 000 samples 4 6 1 Measurement Ranges e Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines the symbols from the result range that are to be included in the evaluation of specific parameters e g error vectors For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range Capture
497. nt does not carry information In the physical constellation diagram the constellation points at the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation are shown as with common PSK meth ods This diagram corresponds to the display on the analyzer The position of the con stellation points is standard specific For example some QPSK standards define the constellation points on the diagonals while other standards define the coordinate axes In table 4 4 the symbols are assigned to phase shifts The QPSK INMARSAT map ping corresponds to simple QPSK with phase differential coding Tables table 4 5 and table 4 6 show two types of differential BPSK modulation Differential coding according to VDL is shown in table 4 7 It can be used for modula tion types with 3 bits symbol e g 8PSK Other types of modulation using differential coding method are described in chap ter 4 3 4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation on page 80 Fig 4 22 Constellation diagram for DQPSK INMARSAT and NATURAL including the symbol ping Table 4 4 DQPSK INMARSAT Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 90 90 180 Fig 4 23 Constellation diagram for D8PSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 APCO25 Phase 2 GRAY NATURAL and TETRA Table 4 5 08 5 NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulati
498. ny systems RRC filters are used as transmit and measurement filters To determine modulation error the measurement signal must be compared with the corresponding ideal signal For this purpose a reference filter is required which is calculated by the analyzer by convolving the coefficient of the transmit filter Tx filter and the meas filter see figure 4 2 If unfiltered signals have to be measured as well e g to determine nonlinear signal distortions no measurement filter is switched into the signal path and the reference filter is identical to the Transmit filter see figure 4 2 In the baseband block diagrams see figure 4 2 the system theoretical transmitter and analyzer filters are shown for PSK and QAM demodulation For the sake of clearness RF stages IF filters and the filter stages of the digital hardware section are not shown For a correct demodulation the following filters have to be accurately specified for the analyzer e Transmit filter filter characteristic of transmitter e Meas filter PSK QAM UserQAM MSK The and the Q part of the measurement and the reference signal are filtered with this filter FSK The instantaneous frequency of the measurement reference signal are filtered In many applications the measurement filter is identical with the ISI filter User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 59 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing The receive filter ISI filter
499. o 460 STAT s QUEStionable ACPEirmitP TRANSOM ia ci 461 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt STATUs QUEStionable DIQ CONDITION Iba be Pier Y i ine EY DRE dE LR NE Rd rad 459 STAT s QUEStionable DIQ ENADISe iras irae treno re Pr lee y rr ER e c PUE ern e re FRA EE EC 460 STATus QUEStionable DIQ NTRarSILOTD 2 Ep nager d tsp edge ode pedo ree Pages 460 STATus QUEStionable DIQ P T RartisitiOn necat coat fi rest keep 461 STAT s QUEStionable DIO EVENIt 2 crt enr ree rr cS eee re 459 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDItIOn eruca erem qat Hire be o EI a ER ER UAR 459 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition 2 1 rnt tae tnter rn tnra 460 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency P TRANSI eseese rne kc rer enr oe ERR 461 STATUs QUEStionable FREQuency E BEVENIJ 459 STATUs QUEStion ble EIMitem EEMENI J rtr tene sag c pta e cre pn tu 459 STATus QUEStionable LIMit m CONDILIOTI 5 1o tari tn n perte e 459 STATus QUEStionable LIMit amp m ENABIe 5 2 tt rrr eterna ee eni e
500. o 200 MHz max 160 MHz bandwidth The only data source that can be used for digital baseband output is RF input For details on digital I Q output see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual Remote command OUTPut DIQ page 338 Output Settings Information Displays information on the settings for output via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 The following information is displayed e Maximum sample rate that can be used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface i e the maximum input sample rate that can be processed by the con nected instrument e Sample rate currently used to transfer data via the Digital Baseband Interface SSS SS User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 167 Input Output and Frontend Settings e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on page 338 Connected Instrument Displays information on the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 if available If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port Remote command OUTPut DIQ CDEVice on 338 5 5 4 Frequency Settings Frequency settings for the input signal can be configured via the Frequency dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following e Select t
501. o the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous Sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Performing Measurement If the sweep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 394 the mode is only con sidered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Parameters State OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 189 INITiate IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement For a statistics count gt 0 this means a restart of the corresponding number of meas urements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 189 INITiate REFMeas Repeats the evaluation of the data cu
502. of a certain value is plotted against the value e Trace 2 the cumulated probability of occurance is plotted against the value Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DDEM SPECtrum STATe on page 425 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 428 Highlight Symbols If enabled the symbol instants are highlighted as squares in the window for measured and reference signals in time normal display as well as error displays Only evaluations that are based on symbols e g constellations or traces support this function Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe 5 1 on page 430 Display Points Sym Defines the number of display points that are displayed per symbol If more points per symbol are selected than the defined Sample Rate the additional points are interpola ted for the display The more points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes For more information see chapter 4 7 Display Points vs Estimation Points per Sym bol on page 126 Note If the capture buffer is used as the signal source the Sample Rate defines the number of displayed points per symbol the Display Points Sym parameter is not available If Auto is enabled the Sample Rate value is used Alternatively select the number of points to be displayed per symbol manually The available values depend on the source type 1 only the symbol time instants are displayed 2 4 8 16 more points are displa
503. of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow 2 command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow 2 on page 419 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter As opposed to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 418 command the LAYout SPLitter cha
504. of current first result range in the capture buffer SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR CALC 2 switch to second result range SENS DDEM SEAR MBUR START query start of current second result range in the capture buffer Usage Query only TRACe lt n gt DATA Trace This command queries the trace data Which data is returned depends on the result display in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt Retrieving Results For details see chapter 11 9 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 435 Setting parameters Trace TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 TRACe5 TRACe6 TRACe1R 1 TRACe2R TRACe21 TRACe3R TRACe3l 1 2 3 4 5 6 The complete data the corresponding trace TRACe1R TRACe2R TRACe3R The real data from the corresponding trace The parameters are available for the Real Imaginary result types TRACelI TRACe2l TRACe3l The imaginary data from the corresponding trace The parame ters are available for the Real Imaginary result types Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 11 9 2 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA lt gt The evaluation data source selected by the LAY ADD WIND command and the result type selected by the CALCulate lt n gt FORMat command also affect the results of the trace data query see TRACe lt n gt
505. of display points that are displayed per symbol automatically i e according to SENSe DDEMod on page 357 To define a different number of points per symbol for display use the MANual parameter and the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue command Setting parameters lt DisplayPPSMode gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 230 Retrieving Results DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue lt DisplayPPS gt This command determines the number of points to be displayed per symbol if manual mode is selected see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 429 This command is not available for result displays based on the capture buffer in this case the displayed points per symbol are defined by the sample 1 SENSe DDEMod PRATe command Setting parameters lt DisplayPPS gt 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 1 only the symbol time instants are displayed 2 4 8 16 32 more points are displayed than symbols RST 4 Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 230 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe SYMBol This command enables the display of the decision instants time when the signals occurred as dots on the trace Manual operation See Highlight Symbols on page 230 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immed
506. ommands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage SCPI confirmed INITiate CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using INIT CONT OFF or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 190 INITiate CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization t
507. on If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed e Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face e Used port Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 335 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key on the front panel The R amp S FSW application is displayed with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual 5 5 1 4 Input Output and Frontend Settings Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed If you select the File Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed N
508. on Suffixes Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In VSA the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description m 1 4 lt gt 1 16 Window lt gt 1 6 11 3 Activating Vector Signal Analysis Vector signal analysis req
509. on page 426 Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS Selects the meas signal CALC FORM PHAS Selects the phase measurement CALC DDEM SPEC STAT ON Selects the spectral display of the phase Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 229 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Feed gt Selects the signal source and for the equalizer also the result type for evaluation Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 8 2 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 419 Only for the Equalizer Impulse Response and Equalizer Frequency Response this command is required Configuring the Result Display Setting parameters Feed string XTIM DDEM MEAS Measured signal XTIM DDEM REF Reference signal XTIM DDEM ERR VECT Error vector XTIM DDEM ERR MPH Modulation errors XTIM DDEM MACC Modulation accuracy XTIM DDEM SYMB Symbol table TCAP Capture Buffer XTIM DDEM IMP Equalizer Impulse Response XFR DDEM RAT Equalizer Frequency Response XFR DDEM IRAT Equalizer Channel Frequency Response Group Delay CALCulate lt n gt FORMat lt Format gt This command defines the result type of the traces Which parameters are available depends on the setting for the dat
510. on symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 Symbol Mapping Table 4 6 D8PSK GRAY Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 tion MSB LSB 010 011 100 101 110 111 Phase shift 0 45 135 90 270 315 225 180 Table 4 7 D8PSK VDL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 tion MSB LSB 010 011 100 101 110 111 Phase shift 0 45 135 90 315 270 180 225 4 3 4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation Phase differential modulation is frequently combined with an additional phase shift e g 4 DQPSK 4 phase shift modulation differential modulated 4PSK The logical mapping diagram corresponds to the diagram for DPSK The physical constellation diagram shows the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation Fig 4 24 Constellation diagram for 77 4 DQPSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 Phase 2 NADC NATURAL PDC PHS TETRA and TFTS the 77 4 rotation is already compensa ted for Table 4 8 7 4 DQPSK PDC PHS TETRA Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 9
511. on to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters State OFF 0 1 RST 1 Configuring VSA Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 172 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO page 351 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 173 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is n
512. or individual window Screen 2 Name of next window Header section for individual trace Trace 1 First trace in second window Data section for individual trace A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description When you load a Known Data file the R amp S FSW K70 application checks whether the file complies with the following syntax Table 1 6 Known Data File Syntax Syntax Possible Values Description RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE as specified Version 01 00 gt File Header lt Comment gt lt Comment gt arbitrary Optional file description lt Base gt lt Base gt 2116 The base used to specify the Data values binary hexa decimal For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use binary 2 lt ModulationOrder gt lt Modulation 21418116 32 64 128 Number of values each symbol can represent order of modu Order gt 256 lation e g 8 for 8 PSK For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use lt Base gt 2 lt ResultLength gt lt ResultLength gt 1 up to 2000 Number of symbols in each lt Data gt element The number must be identical to the Result Length setting in the Result Range dialog box i e the number of symbols to be demodulated the exact number also depends on available memory space Known Data File Syntax Description Syntax Possible Values Description Data Data One character per symbol One possible sequence of sy
513. ot available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Parameters lt State gt OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 173 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command is only available with option R amp S FSW B25 It is not available if R amp S FSW B17 is active Configuring VSA Parameters State RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation Option B25 on page 173 11 5 2 10 Scaling and Units Useful commands for scaling described elsewhere DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 389 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset on page 376 Remote commands exclusive to scaling and units GALCulat lt n gt S TAT isties PRE SG bias tro ero etre nex i E 352 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe AUTO nnne rne nnne 352 CALCulate n STATistics SCALeJCBGCOYUnl iicet 353 CALCulate n STATistics S CALeY LOWE aas eun aaa ase ey Ta 353 CALOCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer essen eret enint 353 CALCulatesmeSTATIsos SCALeYU MUT dti nu Rn Renee centies 354 Belus dye el
514. ote that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the Analog Base band Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes Radio On Input Settings External 1 0 Mode 1 10 Input Config Differential Digital IQ swap 1 9 Analo 9 Signal Path Baseband Analog I jQ Center Frequency For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and Input User Manual Analog Baseband Input State coe c a ta e rco t tc cre ce 163 VQ 163 eN c e 164 n 164 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 320 Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information on data processing modes see the R amp S FSW Analyzer and Input User Manual Input Output and Frontend Settings
515. pe see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 Phase Wrap The phase or argument of the signal the display is limited to the phase value range of 180 180 Phase yras Z MEAS with and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Lum moo esc umo c c peau muera aaa User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 45 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays pres pc L_ SS 1 PhaseWrap Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 49 sym Fig 3 17 Result display Phase Wrap Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL REE to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM PHASe to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 3 2 27 Phase Unwrap The phase of the signal the display is not limited to 180 180 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Lum m usc gt c c pea pu ee aa User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 46 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2
516. pecific filter filter combination with Pulse ISI EDGE Wide Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Wide Pulse standard specific filter filter combination with ISI User Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination with low ISI A 4 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt gt n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on the result type which are also separated by a semico lon If several traces in several windows are exported to one file the data for each window is listed subsequently Within the data for a single window the data for the individual traces is listed subsequently User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 481 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data For details on which data is stored for which result display see TRACe n DATA on page 434 Table 1 5 ASCII file format for VSA trace data export File contents Description Header Type FSW Instrument model Version 1 40 Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2012 Date of data set storage Header section for individual window Screen 1 Window name Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis y per div 0 220
517. plays 3 2 2 3 2 3 Channel Frequency Response Group Delay The Frequency Response Group Delay of the channel is the derivation of phase over frequency for the original input signal It is a measure of phase distortion 4 ChanGroupDelay Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FEED XFR DDEM IRAT to define the channel frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 425 CALC FORM GDEL to define the group delay result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 437 Channel Frequency Response Magnitude The frequency response magnitude of the channel indicates which distortions occurred during transmission of the input signal It is only determined if the equalizer is activa ted SSS gt gt a umo E eru User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 23 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 2 ChanFreqResp Equalizer ei Clrw Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz The bandwidth for which the channel transfer function can be estimated is not only limi ted by the usable I Q bandwidth but also by the bandwidth of the analyzed input sig nal Areas with low reception power e g at the filter edges may
518. positions e automatically according to the current results The range of the displayed y axis can be defined in the following ways e manually by defining the minimum and maximum values to be displayed e automatically according to the current results After changing the scaling you can restore the default settings To define the number of bars 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt XScale Config gt X Axis Quantize 3 Enter the number of bars to be displayed The diagram is adapted to display the specified number of bars To define the x axis scaling manually using a reference point and divisions With this method you define a reference value on the x axis to be displayed at the Ref Position of the y axis The reference value is determined internally according to the displayed data and cannot be changed The beginning of the diagram is at the position 0 the end is at 100 Additionally you define the range to be displayed in each of the 10 divisions of the display which determines the total range to be displayed on the x axis 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT gt Scale Config gt Reference Value 3 Enter a reference value on the x axis in the current unit 4 Define the range to be displayed per division total range 10 The x axis is adapted so that it displays the defined range with the reference value at the specified position R amp S FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis
519. power for digital input via the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process data such as the Analyzer or optional applications and only if the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly the LVDS connector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Digital Q on page 187 RST IMMediate Configuring VSA Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 185 See Free Run on page 185 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 185 See IF Power on page 186 See Baseband Power on page 186 See Power on page 186 See Digital on page 187 11 5 5 Configuring Sweeps The sweep commands define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then evaluated Manual configuration of the sweeps is described in chapter 5 6 3 Sweep Settings on page 189 5 22 2 lt c tractu nea 366 ISENSeTSWEep CODNI VALU 2222 uoce to tondere e ea tree nta nettes 366 SENSe SWEep COUNEtCURRent
520. pplication The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 48 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as well as the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All dif ferent information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections R amp S FSW K70 Welcome to the Vector Signal Analysis Application MultiView 33 Spectrum VSA 2 Ref Level 0 00 r Std j SR 4 MHz SGL Att 108 1325 GHz ResLen Stat Count 10 1 Const I Q Meas amp Re 2 3 1 2 Result Summary Current Je Unit EVM RMS 100 00 Peak 100 00 NMS 0 00 Peak 0 00 Phase Frror RMS 103 95 Peak 179 82 Magnitude Frror RMS 100 00 Peak
521. quency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 323 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 153 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 324 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 327 Input Output and Frontend Settings Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 324 Mixer Type The R amp S FSW option B21 supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF d
522. r and the modulation scheme Subsequently it searches the capture buffer for this pat tern i e the waveform of the pattern It is assumed that patterns can only appear within bursts i e the pattern search range is limited to the bursts detected by the burst search stage If the burst search is switched off the whole capture buffer is searched for the pattern A list of all detected patterns is passed on to the next processing stage It is important to note that the VSA application can only search for one pattern at a time The pattern search can be switched on or off via the Pattern Search dialog see Enabling Pattern Searches on page 194 Detected patterns are indicated by a green background in the symbol table If during demodulation individual symbols do not match the pattern after all these symbols are indicated by a red frame Extraction of Result Range The result range can be aligned to a burst a pattern or simply the start of the capture buffer see Reference on page 201 Within this stage the result range is cut from the capture buffer starting at a point that is specified by the user e g the start of a detected burst The VSA application automatically takes into account filter settling times by making the internal buffers sufficiently longer than the selected result range Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the extracted result range and aims at making the correct s
523. r a sweep turn the rotary knob When you scroll in the dia gram the right edge of the current range or the selected result range is displayed in the center of the next range if possible To display the entire capture buffer with all ranges in one diagram use the Magnitude Overview Absolute result display Note that trace modes that calculate results for several sweeps Average MinHold MaxHold are applied to the individual ranges and thus may not provide useful results in this result display For more information on result ranges see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 In the Magnitude Absolute result display the actual signal amplitude is displayed User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 40 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 22 Mag yas 8 9 with t n Tp Tp the duration of one sampling period at the defined sample rate defined by the dis play points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal Displays the actual signal amplitude for the selected evaluation range 3 Mag CaptureBuffer ei 8000 Fig 3 12 Result display Magnitude Absolute for capture buffer data Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL CBUF to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow page 419 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page
524. r information in VSA application 1 Window name 2 Result type 3 Data source type 4 Trace color 5 Displayed signal for Meas amp Ref data source M Meas or R Ref 6 Trace mode Diagram area The diagram area displays the results according to the selected result displays see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 15 Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the start and stop symbols or time of the evaluation range Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 Measurements and Result Displays Various different result displays for VSA measurements are available Which result types are available depends on the selected data source You can define which part of the measured signal is to be evaluated and displayed The determined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces For background information on the result and evaluation ranges see chapter 4 6 Mea surement Ranges on page 122 e Evaluation Data Sources in 5 2 1 4 1 0 15 Types In ian nn
525. r to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on 390 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically This function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not for the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on 390 Auto Scale Once Auto Scale Window If enabled both the x axis and y axis are automatically adapted to the current mea surement results only once not dynamically in the selected window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Auto Scale All function Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 389 Auto Scale Adapts the x axis and y axis to the current measurement values only once not dynamica
526. range and repeat section retrieving results for range specific results Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check In this example a user defined pattern is used to detect bursts and the calculated mea surement results are checked against defined limits The configuration settings are stored as a user defined standard RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM VSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named VSA DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME EDGE TSC CUST Create new pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC NST 4 DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00030001000000000003000200020001000300010001 DDEM SEAR SYNC COMM Customized pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC TEXT Special edge normal Burst DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME EDGE TSC CUST D Store customized pattern DEM SEAR SYNC PATT ADD EDGE TSC CUST Add new pattern to current standard f eee Ere Configuring the expected input signal DEM FORM QPSK Set the modulation type DEM QPSK FORM NORM Set the modulation order DEM MAPP CAT Query the available symbol mappings for QPSK modulation DEM MAPP WCDMA Set the symbol mapping to WCDMA DEM SRAT 1 MHz Set the symbol rate nm E E U DEM SIGN BURS Define input signal as burst signal DEM SIGN PATT ON U Programming Examples Enable pattern search
527. rate also referred to as the user or output sample rate is the rate at which the data is demodulated and analyzed The sample rate also affects the demodulation measurement bandwidth see also chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 65 If the bandwidth is too narrow the signal is not displayed completely If the bandwidth is too wide interfer ence from outside the actual signal to be measured can distort the result Thus for sig nals with a large frequency spectrum e g FSK modulated signals a higher sample rate may be necessary For further details see chapter 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Process ing on page 57 For an indication of the required sample rate view the Real Imag I Q display of the capture buffer with a Spectrum transformation If the complete signal is displayed and fills the width of the display the selected value is suitable Spec Reallmag CapBuf 1 Clrw 80 dB 100 dB 140 dB Start 541 667 kHz Stop 541 667 kHz Fig 4 5 Determining the I Q bandwidth Real Imag 1 0 display of the capture buffer with a spectrum transformation User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 64 R amp S9FSW K70 200Measurement Basics If the signal is cut off increase the sample rate if it is too small decrease the sample rate by changing the Symbol Rate defined in the Signal Description settings or the Sample Rate parameter in the Data Acqui
528. ration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 How to Perform According to Digital Standards 8 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 8 1 Using the VSA option you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using pre defined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the mea surement settings to your specific requirements e Configuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings in a file e How to Perform VSA According to Digital 239 e How to Perform Customized VSA 241 e How to Analyze the Measured nennen 250 How to Perform VSA According to Digital Standards In order to perform vector signal analysis as spec
529. re Quadrature Inphase Inphase Offset QPSK reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal with respect to nor mal QPSK and therefore the demands on amplifier linearity by avoiding zero cross ings A distinction is made in the analyzer display In the Vector result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is not compensated for The display corresponds to the physical diagram shown in table 4 12 In the Constellation result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is compensated for The display corresponds to the logical mapping as in figure 4 25 Lum mmo sms gt gt umo E erum mE a User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 82 4 3 6 OQPSK Fig 4 25 Constellation diagram for OQSK GRAY including the symbol mapping Frequency Shift Keying FSK To illustrate symbol mappings for FSK modulations the symbol numbers are marked in the logical mapping diagram versus the instantaneous frequency An instantaneous frequency of zero in the baseband corresponds to the input frequency of the analyzer 2FSK NATURAL With 2FSK the symbol decision is made by a simple frequency discriminator Symbol Numbers Fig 4 26 Constellation diagram for 2FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 4FSK With 4FSK the symbol decision is made by a frequency discriminator with 3 decision thresholds 2 3 0 2 3 normalize
530. re new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Firmware Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Conventions Used in Documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks 1 3 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscre
531. result range is indicated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display 8 Optionally zoom into a diagram to enlarge an area of the displayed data 9 Optionally change the display scaling for diagrams see chapter 8 3 1 How to Change the Display Scaling on page 252 10 Optionally check the modulation accuracy against specified limits see chap ter 8 3 2 How to Check Limits for Modulation Accuracy on page 254 11 Optionally export the trace data of the measured signal to a file see chapter 8 3 3 How to Export the Trace Data to a File on page 255 R amp S9FSW K70 How to Perform Vector Signal Analysis 8 3 1 8 3 1 1 How to Change the Display Scaling Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling func tions are available to adapt the result display to the current data How to Scale Time and Spectrum Diagrams The range of the displayed y axis for time and spectral diagrams can be defined in the following ways e manually by defining the range size reference values and positions e automatically according to the current results To define the scaling manually using a reference point With this method you define a reference value and a position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis 1 Focus the result window 2 Select AMPT YScale Config Y Axis Reference Value 3 Enter a reference value for the y axis in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt
532. results of the power measurement of digital demodulation Query parameters type none power measurement for current sweep AVG Average of power measurement over several sweeps RPE Peak of power measurement over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of power measurement PCTL 95 percentile value of power measurement Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset type This command queries the results of the offset measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters type none Origin offset error for current sweep AVG Average origin offset error over several sweeps RPE Peak origin offset error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of origin offset error PCTL 95 percentile value of origin offset error Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor type This command queries the results of the phase error measurement performed for digi tal demodulation Retrieving Results Query parameters type none RMS phase error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS phase errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum phase errors over several sweeps PCTL 9596 percentile of RMS phase error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum phase errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum phase errors over se
533. review Preview Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 2 794 Stop 2 794 L Load User 22222044110 212 Rm 212 Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto If the Auto option is enabled the measurement filter is defined automatically depend ing on the transmit filter specified in the Modulation settings see Transmit Filter Type on page 144 Note If a user defined transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO on page 386 E User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 211 Evaluation Range Configuration Type Defines the measurement filter type if the Using the Transmit Filter as a Measurement Filter Auto setting is not enabled Predefined An overview of available measurement filters is provided in chapter A Filter gt 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 480 User User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter function or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For more information on user defined filters see chapter 4 1 5 Cus tomized Filters on page 62 None No measurement filter is used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe on page 386 To turn off the measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter
534. rmation is provided by the tool during recording e Analyzed Sequences number of data sequences analyzed since the tool was started How to Perform Customized Measurements e Different Sequences number of unique sequences detected in the measured data e Last New Sequence Found time that has passed since the most recent unique sequence was detected e Throughput current data processing speed of the tool Note that while the tool is running the R amp S FSW is set to remote mode i e the manual interface is not available As soon as the tool is closed the remote mode is automatically deactivated 5 When all known possible sequences have been detected or when a significantly large amount of time has passed so as to assume no more sequences will be detected stop the tool by selecting Stop 6 e Ifthe results are acceptable select Store for K70 to store a valid xml file with the recorded data sequences on the instrument A file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can select the storage loca tion and file name You can also add an optional comment to the file e Otherwise reset the tool to start a new recording possibly after changing the demodulation settings or input data 7 Close the tool window to return to normal operation of the VSA application The created xml file can now be loaded in the VSA application as described in chap ter 8 2 3 1 How to Load Known Data Files on page 247 8 2 4 How to
535. rn 107 rcr 209 Demodulation 206 Demodulation process 96 PING nii cs creed t recen cobre LU eS 209 Kriown Dalal xac ener 209 210 aches 209 Symbol error rate SER 210 Syntax Known data TOS ct eet reet ctc eret Peces 483 T Trace Export COMIQUEATION E 219 eR Em 219 Header information 220 iirerzte zdleroziio rper 220 Traces Averaging fomula S sesoses ttes 491 Configuration Softkey 216 Configuring remote control 396 ARP 218 EXPOMTONMAL TE 220 Exporting 220 235 EXPO MIM 255 Measurement signal eren rrt 218 Mode 217 Mode remote 397 Signal rore rete qa cepere 218 Retrieving data remote 431 Selecting Settings remote control 396 Settings predefined teens 218 SOK CY Sica E Hau Ru 218 Troubleshooting 286 Transmit filter MESS 144 Predefiliedi suc serae te rore
536. rom the Name selection list select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard 6 Ifthe pattern you require is not available continue with To add a predefined pat tern to a standard on page 243 or chapter 8 2 2 2 How to Define a New Pat tern on page 244 7 Optionally select the Offset option and enter the number of symbols in the signal to be ignored during the pattern search 8 Close the Signal Description dialog box 9 Inthe Overview dialog box select Burst Pattern and switch to the Pattern Search tab 10 Select On to enable the search To enable a search only if a pattern is part of the signal description enable the Auto option The results of the pattern search with the selected pattern on the current measure ment data is displayed in the Preview area of the dialog box Whether a pattern was detected or not is indicated in the Information area 11 If necessary adapt the correlation threshold If bursts not detected reduce the threshold if false bursts are detected increase the threshold 12 Optionally enable the Meas only if pattern symbols correct option In this case measurement results are only displayed if a valid pattern has been detected 13 Close the dialog box The selected pattern is used for a pattern search in the next measurement 8 2 2 1 How Assign Patterns to a Standard Only patterns that are assigned to the currently selecte
537. rr Amplitude Droop Start 2 43 Stop 2 43 C Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym Fig 9 4 Default window layout for Measurement Example 1 9 2 3 Changing the Display Configuration 1 To change the window layout i e the display configuration do one of the following e Select the Display Config softkey in the main VSA menu e Select the Display Configuration block in the Overview only if Specifics for option is disabled E Select the SmartGrid icon from the toolbar 2 Replace window 1 by an eye diagram of the inphase component of the measure ment signal a Select the Meas amp Ref data source from the SmartGrid selection bar and drag it over window 1 EN Close the SmartGrid mode by selecting the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar c Select the Window Config softkey d Select the result type Eye Diagram Real 1 3 Close the dialog to take a look at your new display configuration Due we ep EUREN II c c ma um eC Iq a uu e a User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 263 Measurement Examples R amp S9FSW K70 _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 9 2 4 Navigating Through the Capture Buffer Using the R amp S FSW VSA application you can navigate through the capture buffer i e control which part of the capture buffer is currently analyzed Note In the Spect
538. rrently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh non Multistandard mode on page 190 INITiate REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA MSRT mode not the MSRA MSRT Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged Performing Measurement Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INST SEL IQ ANALYZER Selects the IQ Analyzer channel INIT REFR Refreshes the display for the Analyzer channel Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh on page 191 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA or MSRT mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels
539. rror Rate BER see chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 How to Load Known Data Files Known Data files are loaded in the Modulation amp Signal Description settings To load an existing Known Data file 1 In the Overview select Signal Description 2 Switch to the Known Data tab 3 Activate the usage of a Known Data file by enabling the Known Data option This enables the Load Data File function 4 Select the Load Data File button A file selection dialog box is displayed 5 Select the xml file which contains the possible data sequences of the input signal The file must comply with the syntax described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 483 The header information of the xml file is displayed in the dialog box Once a Known Data file has been loaded the Bit Error Rate result display becomes available If the Fine Synchronization setting in the Demodulation dialog box is set to Auto mode the known data is also used for synchronization Otherwise it can be selected manually Defining a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in ref erence to the analyzed data avoids using a falsely selected or unsuitable file for synchronization see also If SER lt on page 210 How to Perform Customized Measurements 8 2 3 2 How to Create Known Data Files You must create the Known Data files yourself according to the possible data sequen ces of the input signal Us
540. rror of the instantaneous frequency of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals FREQ _ ERR 45 t with tzn and duration of one sampling period at sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 SSS EE NUUS User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 34 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for chapter 3 2 13 Frequency Error Absolute on page 33 1 Freq Error Rel 49 sym Fig 3 11 Result display Frequency Error Relative Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow 2 page 419 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe MODE on page 430 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chap
541. rum application this functionality is referred to as gating 1 In the measurement display take a closer look at window 3 magnitude of the cap ture buffer The green bar shows how far the current measurement has already proceeded i e how much of the signal has been evaluated Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym 2 Press the RUN SINGLE key Since the signal you are currently analyzing is continuous as opposed to contain ing bursts the entire capture buffer is analyzed and hence will be marked with the green bar The last evaluated result range i e the currently evaluated result range at the time the measurement stopped is highlighted in blue Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym 3 Togo back to a previously evaluated result range within the same capture buffer press the SWEEP key and then the Select Result Rng softkey By selecting dif ferent result ranges for example using the rotary knob you can move the high lighted blue area through the capture buffer and choose your currently demodula ted result range ee ey 264 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Select Result Range x Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym The results for this range are displayed in the Current column in the Result Sum mary in the eye diagram and in the symbol table Note Generally all Clear Write traces and the are affected by this se
542. rz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt Data File Format iq tar lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefined
543. s 177 Range Rarige per dIVISIOD Jerr isena ienr nasa rers due 177 Reference position 177 252 Reference value 177 252 feptem 176 Scaling statistics 177 Scaling auto 252 254 Scaling auto softkey 177 215 Scaling auto all windows softkey 215 jc 180 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating eene 150 Activating Deactivating remote 320 2 Zooming Activating remiote Area Multiple mode remote Area remole Lu rene B actiValihg e eret cer Multiple mode Multiple mode remote neret Restoring original display Single mode e Single mode remote
544. s and GMSK filter Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa on page 314 5 4 2 Signal Structure The Signal Structure settings describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for configuration You can define a pattern to which the instru ment can be synchronized thus adapting the result range A visualization of the currently defined signal structure is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box The Signal Structure settings are displayed when you select the Signal Description button in the Overview or the Signal Description softkey in the main menu and then switch to the Signal Structure tab R amp S9FSW K70 Configuration 148 7 Modulation Signal Structure Known Data Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst 148 sym 546 462 pus Max Length 546 462 us Run In sym 11 077 Run Out sym 11 077 ps Pattern EE pattern contig Offset 58 sym 214 154 ps Description NGM sotto aetati e etu EUN d Htec 145 Burst EE 145 L Min Length Length tnter 146 Mou 146 olco E 146 SOUS fees c ttd c td atr Ed 146 NE NN 146 L Patiem Configure coa erecti rne hore ege eb pua daba 146 Doo em 146 Signal
545. s a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements 11 7 5 Analysis Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to Record length RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 188 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only In MSRT operating mode only the MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRT applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is common time marker for all MSRT applica tions For the VSA application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 5 3 Signal Capture on page 357 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for vector signal analysis Useful commands related to MSRT mode described elsewhere INITiate REFResh on page 393 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 394 Remote commands exclusive to MSRT applications The following commands are only available for MSRT application channels
546. s automatically determined according to the evaluation range or result range settings as in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to capture buffer start is indicated in the window header for each result display Exception Equalizer In the Equalizer displays do not indicate the analysis interval in MSRA MSRT mode Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in any MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not e orange AL the line lies within the interval e white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e the line lies outside the interval
547. s not possible for the patricular capture buffer The result range needs data that has not been captured trun VSA Ref Level 10 00 Att 1008 Freq 1 AEVM Length Result Range Alignment Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Reference Capture Burst Alignment Left Center Offset Symbol No Burst Start 0 sym 1 a Start 126 sym Visualization Mag CapBuf I D amp C CB 4 4 T WM EIL Start 0 sym Stop 500 sym Display 11 01 2010 115707 Fig 10 8 Example for failed alignment In this windowshot the alignment of the long result range to the burst center is not pos sible because there are not enough samples in the capture buffer before the burst starts In this scenario the trigger settings should be changed such that the burst is in the middle of the capture buffer Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see e chapter 5 6 Signal Capture on page 180 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 282 R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected Spectrum VSA Modulation amp Signal Description Ref Level 4 00 dBm Att 16 dB Modulation Signal Description SGL BURST PATTERN Signal Type A EVM Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148
548. s state to ON Setting parameters Name Name of the measurement filter or User for a user defined filter An overview of available measurement filters is provided in chapter A 3 2 Measurement Filters on page 480 Manual operation See Type on page 212 SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe lt MeasFilterState gt Use this command to switch the measurement filter off To switch a measurement filter on use the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME command 11 5 10 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt 110 Switches the measurement filter off ON Switches the measurement filter specified by SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME com mand automatically switches the selected filter on RST 1 Manual operation See Type on page 212 SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects the user defined measurement filter For details on user defined filters see chapter 4 1 5 Customized Filters on page 62 Setting parameters lt FilterName gt Name of the user defined filter Example SENS DDEM MFIL NAME USER Selects user filter mode for the meas filter ENS DDEM MFIL USER D MMyMeasFilter Selects the user defined meas filter Manual operation See on page 212 See Load User Filter on page 212 Defining the Evalua
549. s the connector is always configured for input Signal Capture External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note in VSA trigger output is not supported thus the connector is always configured for input Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 364 IF Power Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input It is not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or measurements the third IF represents the center frequency The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 364 Baseband Power Trigger Source Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseba
550. samples are captured overlapping ranges with a size of 256 000 each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Frequency Absolute result display For details see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations have transitions through zero in the plane in this case you might notice uncriti cal spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero is of limited significance but still influences the result of the instantaneous fre quency measurement 1 FreqAbs CaptureBuffer 1 Clrw 8000 sym Fig 3 8 Result display Frequency Absolute um EP S UU User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 31 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 12 Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM FREO to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA 1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 1 Capture Buffer Results on page 435 chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 Frequency Relative The instantaneous frequency of the signal source The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modu
551. see chapter 3 2 1 Bit Error Rate BER on page 21 For details on working with Known Data files see chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 247 Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the VSA application is provided on the instrument free of charge See To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences on page 248 The syntax for Known Data files is described in chapter A 5 Known Data File Syntax Description on page 483 When you use Known Data files as a reference some dependencies to other settings and restrictions for other functions apply Modulation Order The Modulation Order selected in the Modulation settings in the VSA application must correspond to the modulation order value specified in the xml file ModulationOr der element Demodulation Demodulation using synchronization to the Known Data may increase the measure ment duration as each detected symbol must be compared to each possible sequence in the data file R amp S FSW K70 200Measurement Basics Result Length The Result Length specified in the Result Range dialog box in the VSA application must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element Result Range Alignment e Bursted signals When you align the result range to a bursted signal due to the uncertainty
552. see chapter 4 3 Symbol Mapping on page 73 Remote command SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 309 Load User Modulation Modulation Type This function is only available if the modulation type User Modulation is selected Opens file selection dialog box to select the file that contains the user defined modu lation vam file For details on user defined modulation files see chapter 4 3 11 User defined Modula tion on page 93 Remote command SENS DDEM FORM UQAM see SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 309 SENSe DDEMod USER NAME on page 315 Modulation Order Depending on the Modulation Type various orders of modulation are available Type Available orders PSK BPSK 3Pi 4 QPSK Pi 8 D8PSK QPSK 8PSK DQPSK Offset QPSK 3Pi 8 8PSK Pi 4 DQPSK Pi 4 QPSK D8PSK MSK MSK DMSK QAM 16QAM Pi 4 32QAM 256QAM Pi 4 16QAM 64QAM 512QAM 32QAM 128QAM 1024QAM FSK 2FSK 4FSK 8FSK Signal Description Type Available orders ASK 2ASK 4ASK APSK 16APSK 32APSK Remote command PSK SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 311 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate on page 312 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat on page 313 MSK SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat on page 311 QAM SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat on page 312 SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTate on page 312 FSK SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate on page 310 ASK SENSe DDEMod ASK NSTate on page 308 SENS
553. seeeeeeeneeeneneeee nennen 459 5 0 lt 5 lt gt 2 2 0 202 460 5 5 lt gt 0000 2 0000000000 110000000000000 aaa 461 5 5 lt gt 211 21 0000 008 000000000000000 00 461 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt lt gt 459 5 lt gt 224 4 annie ra LaK ENa rnt nnne 460 STATus QUESti nable MOD lationsn gt FSK NTRanSitiO M sssrinin 461 5 lt gt FSK PTRAnNSit OMi aeia 461 5 lt lt gt 2 459 5 0 lt 5 lt gt 1 722 1 459 lt gt 1 460 5 5 lt gt 1 0 461 STATus QUEStionab
554. sented by the transition of two consecutive symbols The block dia gram of the coder is shown below Fig 4 32 DMSK differential encoder in the transmitter d input symbol 0 1 of differential encoder d 4 input symbol delayed by the symbol period Ts d output symbol 0 1 of differential encoder The logical symbol mapping is then performed on the XOR coded bitstream 4 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM In the case of QAM the information is represented by the signal amplitude and phase The symbols are arranged in a square constellation in the plane To ensure reliable demodulation symbol numbers should be distributed evenly with respect to the symbol alphabet As a rule of thumb the result length should correspond to at least 8 times the modula tion order For example with 64 QAM a result length of at least 8 64 512 symbols should be used QAM Mappings The following QAM mappings are obtained from the mapping of the 1st quadrant which is always rotated by 2 for the subsequent quadrants and supplemented by a GRAY coded prefix for each quadrant Table 4 15 Derivation of QAM mappings n In the following diagrams the symbol mappings are indicated in hexadecimal and binary form 0 1 3 2 0000 0001 0011 0010 0100 0101 0111 0110 1100 1101 1111 1110 1000 1001 1011 1010 Fig 4 33 Constellation diagram for 160 GRAY in
555. signal is defined as _ d Hs Arr n phus 80 dt In the VSA application the frequency pulse filter is normalized such that Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The constellation for M FSK is assumed to be 37 3 M 1 which implies Gmax M 1 The expression for the reference deviation in terms of the modulation index is therefore given by 1 no T fus The above formula provides the necessary calculation for measurement of an FSK sig nal with known symbol rate and modulation index Calculation examples The GSM standard describes the transmission of binary data using MSK i e 2FSK modulation with a modulation index of h 1 2 at a symbol rate of 270 8333 KHz reference deviation is therefore given by B 2 1 270 8333 kHz 67 7083 kHz The APCO Project 25 standard phase 2 defines a H CPM signal i e 4AFSK with a modulation index of h 1 3 and a symbol rate of 6 KHz The reference deviation is A per 5 4 1 6 2 3 kHz 4 5 2 1 Error Model The FSK measurement model used assumes that signal distortions in both the magni tude and phase frequency are present as well as additive noise The measured signal model is expressed as 8 Apis ve with n t is a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power Apisr t is the distorted magnitude model q 5T0 is the distorted phase model The mag
556. sing D1SPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 432 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams For cartesian diagrams magnitude phase frequency real imag eye diagrams the command returns the y values of the trace The number of returned values is the product of the Result Length and the display points per symbol The unit depends on the specified unit see chapter 11 5 2 10 Scaling and Units on page 352 You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis using DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 432 The eye diagram result displays are the same as the real imag result display the results for eye diagrams are merely superimposed in the display 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams For polar diagrams the command returns a pair of values for each trace point The first value is the real part the second value the imaginary part The number of returned value pairs depends on the result type e Vector I Q evaluation range length display points per symbol e Constellation evaluation range length e Constellation Frequency and Vector Frequency one value for each trace point on the y axis 11 9 2 4 Symbols For the symbol table result diagrams the command returns one value for each num ber in the table The command always returns the values in the decimal format The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected 11 9 2 5
557. sion option R amp S FSW B500 is installed Remote command TRACe IQ WBANd STATe on page 359 TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH on page 359 Usable Bandwidth Shows the usable bandwidth which depends on the selected sample rate For details see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate 1 0 Bandwidth on page 64 Signal Capture This information is provided for reference only Note In diagrams in the frequency domain Spectrum transformation see Result Type Transformation on page 229 the usable bandwidth is indicated by vertical blue lines Remote command TRACe lt n gt 1Q BWIDth on page 358 Swap Activates or deactivates the inverted modulation If the and parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 358 5 6 2 Trigger Settings The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger settings can be configured via the TRIG key or in the Trigger dialog box which is displayed when you select the Trigger button in the Overview R amp S FSW KTO Configuration Signal Capture 1 1 Data Acquisition Trigger Source Level Hysteresis Drop Out Time Slope Holdoff Time Preview Preview Mag CapBuf
558. sition INVerse Inverted position RST NORMal 11 13 Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate how to perform vector signal analysis in a remote environment These examples are meant to demonstrate the use of the most common remote com mands for vector signal analysis Note that not all commands executed here are actually necessary as they may reflect default settings e Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal 464 e Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital cler Me 465 e Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check 469 Programming Examples 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continu ous QPSK Signal The following example describes a scenario similar to the one for manual operation described in chapter 9 2 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal on page 258 RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 1GHz Set the center frequency DISP TRAC Y RLEV 4dBm Set the reference level INST CRE NEW DDEM MyVSA Create new measurement channel for vector signal analysis named MyVSA DEM FORM QPSK Set the modulation type DEM QPSK FORM NORM Set the modulation order DEM MAPP CAT DEM MAPP WCDMA Set the symbol mapping to WCDMA DEM SRAT 1 MHz Set the symbol rate DEM TFIL NAME RRC D D D Query the available sy
559. sition settings As described above the sample rate is determined by the number of samples to cap ture per symbol Thus the maximum sample rate depends on the maximum number of symbols to be captured the symbol rate and vice versa The maximum sample rate for the R amp S FSW is 10 GHz see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 65 Thus the maximum symbol rate is Table 4 1 Maximum symbol rate depending on sample rate parameter Sample rate parameter Max symbol rate 4 symbol rate 2500 MSymbols 8 symbol rate 1250 MSymbols 16 symbol rate 625 MSymbols 32 symbol rate 312 5 MSymbols 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input Definitions e Input sample rate ISR the sample rate of the useful data provided by the con nected instrument to the R amp S FSW input e User Output Sample rate SR the sample rate that is defined by the user e g in the Data Aquisition dialog box in the I Q Analyzer application and which is used as the basis for analysis or output Usable Analysis bandwidth the bandwidth range in which the signal remains undistorted in regard to amplitude characteristic and group delay this range can be used for accurate analysis by the R amp S FSW e Record length Number of I Q samples to capture during the specified measure ment time calculated as the measurement time multiplied by the sample rate For th
560. stimation and Modulation Errors Phase Distortion Table 4 20 Effect of nonlinear phase distortions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortion analyzer Phase Distortion Tranam ter 0 01 02 03 04 Be 0 06 07 06 Phase Destomen Analyzer 0 02 03 04 05 05 07 08 Rey The effect of nonlinear phase distortions on a 64QAM signal is illustrated in table 4 20 only the first quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected These effects are caused for instance by saturation in the transmitter output stages The sig nal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is minimized The second column shows the signal after scaling Table 4 21 Phase transfer functions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortions analyzer Phase Transter Function Traneevtter 02 015 Phase ae m e 2 2 ge 48 amp 4 42 4 8 4 2 0 Power 029 Phase Tansy F unctio Anayzer 02 015 Phase e b e m E o F e 4 2 0 6 5 4 2 0 Input Poser 00 A logarithmic display of the phase transfer functions is shown in table 4 21 The ana lyzer trace is shifted by the phase described above as against the transmitter trace
561. suffer from less accu rate estimation results Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FEED XFR DDEM IRAT to define the channel frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 425 CALC FORM MAGN to define the magnitude result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 437 3 2 4 Constellation Frequency The instantaneous frequency of the source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 24 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 9 907 MHz Fig 3 2 Result display Constellation Frequency Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM CONF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 436 3 2 5 Constellation I Q The complex source signal without inter symbol interference as an X
562. sym 546 462 us Max Length 148 sym 546 462 us Run In 8 sym 11 077 us Run Out 8 sym 11 077 us W Pattern _____ Start 13 sym Name 1 M Mag CapBuf w Offset 58 sym 214 154 us Description K Burst Length Run In GES Offset Start 0 sym 1300 Syiti Fig 10 9 The red circle shows the place where you can specify a pattern Solution Select an existing pattern or create a new pattern that you expect to be within the signal For more information see e Pattern Settings on page 146 chapter 8 2 2 How to Perform Pattern Searches on page 243 Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range A pattern can only be found if it is entirely within the result range Therefore this error message always occurs with a Pattern Not Found error Solution Choose the pattern as reference of your result range alignment Then the pattern will be forcefully part of your result range and the pattern search can succeed For more information see e chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 200 e chapter 8 2 4 How to Define the Result Range on page 249 Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fail The R amp S FSW performs the pattern search in two stages e Stage 1 involves the generation of an I Q pattern waveform by modulating the pat tern symbol sequence The 1 pattern is then correlated wit
563. t SENSE d pde e TUI nev e sh RECTE Marien SENS amp FREQ ericy terr t e YR RE HOP Ea ever erat 347 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO cenae ne Uer i 347 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet SENSE MIXer BIAS HIGH vx ccce easter pt cte e vc pl pe etr SENSe MIXeEBIASEEOW tain tci cse SENSe MIXer FREQuUEenCy HAN DOVEF icc coo the o tr err rene re ah deere eel eU Eve re Feo ea 323 SENS amp MIXeF FREQuehGey S TAR 324 5 e rato tete ER e E EY 324 SENSe MIXer HARMONie BAND PRE Sefina nine cip eie qai E ide Eo 324 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue HIGH e tee does ax ue UR Ee Seta eue EL SENSe MIXer HARMONie iit ci erac catorce SENSe MIXer HARMoOric TYPE tenet entered eret pe tiva 5 IM Xer HARMONICELOW Eis Fore ERE et oec ri Fin Free e add coe dit SENSe MIXeF EOPOW
564. t RF Output RF Input Signal and Spectrum Analyzer FSW Fig 9 1 Connection to a test transmitter for example R amp S SMU 9 2 Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal In this measurement example a continuous QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying signal will be measured and evaluated QPSK is used in several standards such as DVB S2 APCO25 WCDMA CDMA2000 etc For the description characterization of a continuous QPSK signal the following parameters are the most important e Carrier Frequency e Level e Symbol Rate e Transmit Filter 9 2 1 Transmitter Settings This section summarizes the necessary transmitter settings It contains a list of the parameters and step by step instructions for the R amp S SMU If you are interested in a more detailed description or background information refer to the user manual of the R amp S SMU which can be downloaded from the Rohde amp Schwarz website www rohde schwarz com downloads manuals smu200A html Frequency 1 GHz Level 0 dBm Modulation QPSK Measurement Example 1 Continuous QPSK Signal Symbol Rate 1 Msym s Filter Root Raised Cosine with Roll Off 0 35 To define the settings for the R amp S SMU 1 Press the PRESET key to start from a defined state 2 Press the FREQ key and enter 1 GHz 3 Press the LEVEL key and enter 0 dBm 4 To define the modulation a Press the DIAGRAM key b Select the first block Baseband A in the
565. t ELIN lt startstop gt STATe on 387 Suffix lt startstop gt 1 2 1 start value 2 stop value Setting parameters lt LeftDisp gt numeric value Range 0 to 1000000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Start Stop on page 214 11 5 11 Adjusting Settings Automatically Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings Manual execution of automatic adjustment functions is described in chapter 5 12 Adjusting Settings Automatically on page 214 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe AUTO 389 lt gt lt gt 389 SENSe J ADJust GONFIgure DURAallgh uiia tn e it ces tenet 389 Configuring VSA 5 0 389 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis 2 4 390 SENSe ADJust CONFIg ure HYSTeresis UPPert 2 2 1 eei aaa npud 390 SENSe JAD Just Vel ccce rtr te o nee ER Re RR RR SERERE 391 SENS amp DDEMod PRESetRLENVOl irn uu taut eau e niu a ni nn
566. t gt 438 lt gt lt gt 5 12 439 lt gt lt gt 5 439 lt gt lt gt 5 440 lt gt lt gt 5 2 440 lt gt lt gt 5 5 441 lt gt lt gt 5 441 lt gt lt gt 5 5 442 lt gt lt gt 5 5 443 lt gt lt gt 5
567. t DataType gt 1 IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 346 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF 1 quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ Example INP IQ TYPE Q Manual operation Q Mode on page 163 CALibration AIQ DCOFfset Offset This command defines a DC offset of the input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters Offset numeric value DC offset RST 0 Default unit V Example CAL AIQ DCOF I 0 001 CALibration AIQ DCOFfset Q Offset This command defines a DC offset of the Q input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 Configuring VSA Parameters lt Offset gt numeric value DC offset RST 0 Default unit V Example CAL AIQ DCOF Q 0 001 SENSe PROBe lt ch gt SETup CMOFfset lt CMOffset gt Sets the common mode offset The setting is only
568. t LimitValue gt User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 410 R amp S FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean frequency error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 mean 1 0 Default unit Hz CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean magnitude error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy
569. t Source gt Analog Baseband tab see chapter 5 5 1 4 Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 163 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and Input User Manual Reference level suene ers leta tide rd Ea tu pp d Eee Ea 174 L Shifting the Display 0 220110015 174 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 175 Full Scale Level Mode Value esses nnne nnne 175 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the R amp S FSW hardware is adapted according to this value it is recommended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that the Reference Level value ignores the Shifting the Display Offset It is important to know the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW Ana
570. t display for Vector Frequency Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM COVF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 3 Polar Diagrams on page 436 Vector The complex source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the dis play points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 are drawn and connected The scaling of the capture buffer depends on the input source e Scaling is relative to the current reference level for RF input e Scaling is relative to the full scale level for I Q input Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal e Error Vector Capture buffer display Note that this result display is based on an individual capture buffer range If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping ranges with a size of 256 000 each are created Only one range at a time can be displayed in the Vector result display For details see chapter 4 8 Capture Buffer Display on page 128 SSS E gt a aaa User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 54 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Vector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Fig 3 24 Result display for Vector I Q Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MEAS
571. t in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 217 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 217 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 218 Analysis 11 7 2 Working with Markers 11 7 2 1 Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Manual configuration of markers is described in chapter 6 3 Markers on page 220 Individual Marker Pete
572. t n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDI EMod STATistic Parameter 4 1 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing 200Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in VSA is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings For information on the basic processing of data the R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual e Filters and Bandwidths During Signal 57 e Sample Rate Symbol Rate and 64 e Symbol Mapplrig anu ed 73 e Overview of the Demodulation 94 e Signal Model Estimation and Modulation 106 e Measurement dites Cade deducere ba a eleanor 122 e Display Points vs Estimation Points per 126 e Capture Buffer DISMAY 128 e Known Data Files Dependencies and 129 VSA in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode sse 130 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing This section describes the used filters in vector signal analysis with an R amp S FSW as well as the bandwidth a
573. t type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs on page 331 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair select the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 330 Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently s
574. t which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 321 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Configuring Manual operation See Handover Freq on 152 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 152 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 152 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave guide band Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band o
575. tal Standards softkey 2 Inthe file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings you want to load To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system 3 Press the Load button The dialog box is closed and the instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard To store settings as a standard file 1 Configure the measurement as required see chapter 8 2 How to Perform Cus tomized VSA Measurements on page 241 2 Inthe Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 3 In the File Name field enter the name of the standard for which you want to store settings To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system To insert a new folder select the New Folder button and enter a name in the New Folder dialog box 4 Press the Save button The dialog box is closed and the current measurement settings are stored in a standard file To delete standard files 1 In the Meas menu select the Digital Standards softkey 2 Inthe Manage VSA Standards file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings file you want to delete Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file syste
576. tected elimi nated if a pattern was successfully detected at symbol level see also chapter 4 4 4 Pattern Symbol Check on page 102 If modulation types are used where the information is represented by the phase transi tion e g differential PSK or MSK the absolute phase position is not an issue Thus the ambiguity of the starting phase does not have an influence on the symbol deci sions If the measurement signal contains a known pattern it is also possible to use a data aided DA estimator at this stage This means that the estimator operates on a known data sequence i e the pattern If the signal contains a pattern it is possible to choose between the above described non data aided estimator and the data aided estimator with the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern If the data aided estimator is employed the phase ambiguitiy can be resolved at this stage Overview of the Demodulation Process Demodulation amp Symbol Decision Setings IQ Samples From Result Range Extract Result Range IQ Meas with corrected timing IQ Meas with corrected timing phase frequency offset scaling Symbol Decision IQ Meas corrected IQ Symbols Passed on to Pattern Symbol Check Fig 4 48 Demodulation and Symbol Decision algorithm Overview of the Demodulation Process 4 4 A Pattern Symbol Check This stage performs a bit by bit comparison between the selec
577. ted as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available e Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Introduction 11 1 2 Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT 11 1 3 Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea sure
578. ted device must support data transfer rates up to 200 Msps e Digital Output The R amp S FSW must supply the required bandwidth i e the bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSW B160 or higher must be installed and active The connected device must support data transfer rates up to 200 Restrictions for digital in and output The following table describes the restrictions for digital in and output Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth Table 4 3 Restrictions for digital in and output Parameter Minimum Maximum Record length 2 complex samples 220 1024 1024 complex samples Input sample rate ISR 100 Hz 10 GHz Sample Rate SR Digital input Max 100 Hz ISR 8388608 Min 10 GHz 2 ISR Sample Rate SR Digital output 100 Hz 200 MHz Usable bandwidth Digital input and filter active Min 0 8 SR 0 8 ISR Bandwidths Depending on the sample rate the following bandwidths are available Usable IQ bandwidth ISR BW 0 8 SR l Ll Lb Ll L r Filter can be turned off BW 0 8 ISR Fig 4 9 Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input 4 3 Symbol Mapping Mapping or symbol mapping means that symbol numbers are assigned to constellation points or transitions in the I Q plane e g PSK and QAM In the analyzer the mapping is required to decode the transmitted symbols
579. ted pattern and the demodulated bits It is important to note that this comparison is only performed at posi tions that have been identified by the pattern search as possible pattern positions The algorithm and a simple example are illustrated in figure 4 49 First the pattern candidate bits are extracted from the whole bitstream calculated by the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions stage This means that the symbol stream is cut at the position that has been detected by the Pattern Search as the start of the pattern The extracted sequence is then compared to the selected pattern If the demodulation has been ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position the extracted sequence needs to be compared to all possible rotated versions of the selected pattern For example in the case of QPSK modulation the rotational symme try has the order four i e there are four pattern hypotheses If the extracted sequence coincides with one of the hypotheses the pattern is declared as found and the abso lute phase corresponding to the appropriate hypothesis is passed on Both the symbol decisions and the measurement signal are then rotated with this pattern phase for the whole result range thus resolving the phase ambiguity For more information refer to e chapter 4 4 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 99 e chapter 4 4 2 Pattern Search on page 98 4 4 5 Overview of the Demodulation Process P
580. ter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 3 2 15 Frequency Response Group Delay The Frequency Response Group Delay of the equalizer is the derivation of phase over frequency It is measure of phase distortion User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 35 R amp S FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 GroupDelay Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Available for source types e Equalizer Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL EQU to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FEED XFR DDEM RAT to define the frequency response result type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 425 CALC FORM GDEL to define the group delay result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on 434 and chapter 11 9 2 6 Equalizer on page 437 3 2 16 Frequency Response Magnitude Frequency response of the current equalizer to the input signal Note that the fre quency response of the equalizer is not a pure inverted function of the channel response as both functions are calculated independantly The frequency response is calculated by determining an optimal EVM for the input signal User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 36 R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 17 1 FreqRespMag Equalizer Start 100 MHz Stop 100 MHz Available for sour
581. tern This message can only occur if the coarse synchronization is data aided i e is based on a known pattern In case the pattern is very short pattern based coarse synchroni zation might be unstable If demodulation is stable e g you get a reasonable EVM there is no need to change anything Otherwise you have two options e Switch to the non pattern based mode by setting the parameter Coarse Synchro nization Data Due e mp EUREN c c man u aT User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 285 Frequently Asked Questions see Coarse Synchronization on page 209 e f possible use a longer pattern For more information see e chapter 4 4 Overview of the Demodulation Process on page 94 Message Result Ranges Overlap This message does not indicate an error It is merely displayed to inform you that the defined result ranges in the capture buffer overlap Thus some captured data is evalu ated more than once For example the same peak value may be listed several times if it is included in several result ranges and averaging is performed on partially dupli cate values However a negative influence on the measurement results is not to be expected 10 3 Frequently Asked Questions Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement window 286 Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible the measurement window the trace of the reference signal IS not eerie 286 Proble
582. that are of interest to you see chap ter 6 5 Display and Window Configuration on page 228 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences For each data source a window with the default result type for that data source is displayed 3 Exit the SmartGrid mode 4 Select the Window Config softkey to change the result types and other display settings for the selected window To change the settings in other windows select a different window from the Specifics for list in the Window Config dialog box 5 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview Enable the Specifics for option to access the analysis functions for the selected window 6 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to configure special analysis settings for the individual result displays for example e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the results e g when comparing errors or peaks e Configure the trace to display the average over a series of measurements If necessary increase the Statistics Count defined in the Sweep menu 7 Press the SWEEP key and select the Selected Result Rng softkey to select a specific burst to be evaluated The result displays are updated to show the results for the selected burst Tip You can use a capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges and analyze the individual result ranges in another window The currently displayed
583. the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 149 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires option R amp S FSW B13 Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Configuring VSA Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 150 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 150 Parameters State OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for Analyzer GSM VSA and MC Group Delay measurements Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on 150 INPut SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to inp
584. the capture buffer you will see a Burst Not Found Message Solution Refer to Message Pattern Not Found on page 280 Switch the pattern search off Choose Burst as the reference for the result range alignment Message Pattern Not Found The Pattern Not Found error message can have several causes The burst search has failed User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 280 R amp S9FSW K70 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement eee ae If burst and pattern search are active the application looks for patterns only within the found bursts Hence in case the burst search fails the pattern search will also fail Solution Try one of the following Make sure the burst search is successful Deactivate the burst search but keep the pattern search active For more information see Message Burst Not Found page 278 chapter 5 7 1 Burst Search on page 192 e The offset of the pattern within the burst is incorrectly set It is possible to set a pattern offset to speed up the pattern search The offset of the pattern would be the offset of the pattern start with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst However if the entered offset is not correct within about 4 sym bols of tolerance the pattern will not be found VSA Ref Level 22 00 Mod Modulation amp Signal Description m el Att 10 0 08 Freq 1 0GHz Cap Ler SGL TRG EXT BURST PATTERN Modulation Sig
585. the maximum burst length to 5000 For more information see Burst Settings on page 145 Burst Configuration on page 193 The signal is highly distorted and or has modulation noise One possibility to enhance the robustness of the burst search is to increase the minimum gap length If the bursts within your capture buffer are not closely spaced it makes sense to increase the value of this parameter Burst amp Pattem Search Burst amp Pattern Search scorch L3 N Auto according to Signal Description Burst found Auto according to Signal Description Burst found Meas only if Burst was found Meas only if Burst was found Auto Configurabon Auto Configurabon Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 ys Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 us Min Length 3 692 us Min Length sym 3 36 923 us Related Settings Related Settings i Signal Description Signal Description Trace Mag CapBuf 1 Cir Mag CapBuf Fig 10 6 Example for adjusting the minimum gap length For more information see Min Gap Length on page 193 The pattern search is switched on fails and the alignment is with reference to the pattern In case the pattern search is switched on and the reference for the alignment is the pattern and not the burst a non detected pattern causes the result range to be positioned at the beginning of the capture buffer Hence if a the burst does not start right at the beginning of
586. the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Query parameters type none RMS EVM value of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS EVM values over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS EVM value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum EVM values over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of EVM values over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FDERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the FSK deviation error of FSK modulated sig nals Retrieving Results Query parameters type none Deviation error for current sweep AVG Average FSK deviation error RPE Peak FSK deviation error SDEV Standard deviation of FSK deviation error PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK deviation error Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift type This command queries the results of the carrier frequenc
587. ting only Manual operation See Removing patterns from a standard on page 197 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT lt Text gt This command defines a text to explain the pattern The text is displayed only in the selection menu manual control This text should be short and concise Detailed infor mation about the pattern is given the comment see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 371 Setting parameters lt Text gt string Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Edit on page 197 See New on page 197 See Description on page 199 Defining the Result Range The result range determines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is dis played Manual configuration of the result range is described in chapter 5 8 Result Range Configuration on page 200 Useful commands for result ranges described elsewhere SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURst STARt on page 434 Configuring VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STOP on page 432 Remote commands exclusive to defining result ranges lt gt lt 2 gt 375 lt gt lt 2 375
588. tion Range The evaluation range defines which range of the result is to be evaluated Manual configuration of the evaluation range is described in chapter 5 11 Evaluation Range Configuration on page 212 Culate lt n ELIN lt Staristop t STATE uui etat tenute eei eer Rhe 387 lt gt lt gt rares 388 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe Auto This command restricts the evaluation range The evaluation range is considered for the following display types e eye diagrams e constellation diagrams e modulation accuracy e statistic displays e spectrum displays Configuring VSA Suffix lt startstop gt 1 2 irrelevant Setting parameters lt Auto gt ON OFF 1 0 ON The evaluation range extends from the start value defined by CALC ELIN1 VAL to the stop value defined by CALC ELIN2 VAL see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN startstop VALue on page 388 OFF The complete result area is evaluated RST OFF Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Evaluating the Entire Result Range on page 213 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue lt LeftDisp gt Defines the start and stop values for the evaluation range see CALCulate lt n g
589. tion contains a pattern Name lt Pattern Settings Specifies the pattern name from the list of defined patterns You can also configure new patterns see chapter 5 7 3 Pattern Configuration on page 195 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern on page 317 Pattern Configuration Pattern Settings Displays the Pattern Configuration dialog box see chapter 5 7 3 Pattern Configura tion on page 195 Offset Pattern Settings The offset of the pattern is defined with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst see Useful length on page 125 If the position of the pattern within the burst is known it is recommended that you define the offset That will accelerate the pattern search and enhance the accuracy of the burst search Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe on 318 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue page 318 Signal Description 5 4 3 Known Data The Known Data settings allow you to load a file that describes the possible data sequences in the input signal see chapter 8 2 3 How to Manage Known Data Files on page 247 Additional information provided by the loaded file is displayed at the bottom of the dia log box This information is not editable directly The Known Data settings are displayed when you select the Signal Description but ton in the Overview or the Signal Description softkey in the main VSA menu and then switc
590. toPattSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Enabling Pattern Searches on page 194 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold lt CorrelationLev gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold for pattern matching in percent A high level means stricter matching Setting parameters lt CorrelationLev gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 100 0 RST 90 0 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Q Correlation Threshold on 194 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE lt MeasOnlyOnPatt gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that the measurement is performed only if the measurement was synchronous to the selected sync pattern The command is available only if the pattern search is activated see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 371 Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnPatt gt MEAS SYNC MEAS The measurement is performed independently of successful synchronization SYNC The measured values are displayed and considered in the error evaluation only if the set sync pattern was found Bursts with a wrong sync pattern sync not found are ignored If an invalid or no sync pattern is found the measurement waits and resumes running only when a valid sync pattern is found RST 0 Manual operation See Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct on page 195 11 5 6 3 Configuring VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect Select This command selects
591. tronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 351 INPut EATT AUTO on page 351 INPut EATT on page 351 5 5 5 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude tab of the Input dialog box Input Output and Frontend Settings Amplitude Amplitude Scale Reference Level Input Settings Offset Unit Auto Level Full Scale Level Mode Value The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Inpu
592. ts the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters Source Configuring VSA IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 IFPower Second intermediate frequency Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 this parameter is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons IQPower Magnitude of sampled data For applications that process data such as the Analyzer or optional applications Not available for input from the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 or the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the Digital Baseband Inter face R amp S FSW B17 Baseband
593. ttings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Digital IQ Signal ID Auto ID Bias Value 155 m 155 y ome HT 155 Au 1D Treshold 22202 155 sicuro Hm 155 L write to lt CVL table name 156 Input Output and Frontend Settings LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower 322 Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the Analyzer for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 322 Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and
594. ttom of the dialog box The green bar below the trace indicates the defined result range indented red lines indicate defined start and stop symbols see Evaluation range display on page 126 The visualization is not editable directly The evaluation range settings are displayed when you select the Evaluation Range button in the Overview or the Range Settings softkey in the main VSA menu and then switch to the Evaluation Range tab Alignment and Evaluation Range Result Range Evaluation Range Evaluation Range Entire Result Range 0 sym 148 sym Start 3 0 sym Stop 144 75 sym Length 142 0 sym 524 308 us Visualization For details on the evaluation range see chapter 4 6 Measurement Ranges on page 122 For an example on setting the evaluation range see chapter 9 3 5 Setting the Evalua tion Range on page 272 Evaluating the Entire Result Sage cen 213 SLOP MM 214 Evaluating the Entire Result Range If enabled the entire result range is evaluated If disabled you can define a specific part of the result range to be evaluated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe on 387 5 12 Adjusting Settings Automatically Start Stop Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is started and stopped The start and stop symbols themselves are included in the evaluation range Note Note that the start and stop valu
595. ualizer udo Error VOCIOR reete 17 Error Vector Magnitude EVM 27 Eye Diagram Frequency 28 Eye Diagram Imag Eye Diagram I CU Frequency Absolute 90 Frequency Error Absolute 2 99 Frequency Error Relative 34 Frequency Relative etti 32 Frequency Response Group Delay Frequency Response Magnitude Frequency Response Phase Impulse Response Magnitude Impulse Response Phase 20 Impulse Response Real Imag 39 Magnitude Absolute nte 40 Magnitude Error E Magnitude Overview Absolute 41 Magnitude Relative rne 43 Meas 4 Ref 416 Modulation accuracy 2 18 Modulation errors Overview 19 Phase Error 44 Phase eo erret 46 Phase Wrap robin nene re rer ek 45 Real Imag 2 47 Result Summary 48 SCPI parameters 19 Symbol Table 52 Symibols wich Vector Frequency ee rer e 53 54 Results Retrieving remote e 430 Updating the dis play res 191 Updating the display remote
596. uation Range button to define which part of the demodulated data is to be evaluated and displayed 12 Press the RUN SINGLE key to stop the continuous sweep and start a new sweep with the new configuration The measured data is stored in the capture buffer and can be analyzed see chap ter 8 3 How to Analyze the Measured Data on page 250 8 2 1 How to Select User Defined Filters The most frequently required measurement and TX filters required for vector signal analysis according to digital standards are provided by the R amp S FSW VSA application However you can also load user defined filters To load a user measurement filter 1 In the Overview select the Meas Filter button 2 In the Meas Filter tab of the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dialog box select Type User 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick To load a user transmit TX filter 1 In the Overview select the Signal Description button 2 In the Modulation tab of the Signal Description dialog box select Transmit Fil ter Type User 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick How to Perform Customized Measurements 8 2 2 How to Perform Pattern Searches To configure a pattern search 1 In the Overview select Signal Description 2 Select the Signal Structure tab 3 Select the Burst Signal signal type 4 Enable the Pattern option 5 F
597. uch as the Analyzer or optional applications Note that the data must a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW Analyzer Input User Manual import is not available in MSRA MSRT mode Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 450 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Note that only the trace data in the currently displayed result range of the capture buf fer is exported For the Magnitude Absolute Overview result display the trace contains a maximum of 25 000 points Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 433 Export Export Opens file selection dialog box to
598. ue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy RHO PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean Rho limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1 0 RST 0 999 mean 0 9995 Default unit NONE Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions For the VSA application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 5 3 Signal Capture on page 357 Be sure to select the correct measurement channel before executing these commands Useful commands related to MSRA mode described elsewhere INITiate REFResh on page 393 INITiate SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 394 Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels Analysis 5 5 sn nnns 413 MSRACALINSEVALDUus 413 CALCulate MSRA WINDOWsn IVAL 413 SENSe MSRACGAPTUre OPFSel
599. uires a special application on the R amp S FSW A measurement is started immediately with the default settings INS Tumen GREAS DUPLICA Pe 301 INSTr ment CGREate NEW eroi eret aan i ara ea eoo e uu e E aga duda D 301 INS Trument GREat REPLaG6 uar rect ame cx eoa an esr 301 INSTrument DELete Activating Vector Signal Analysis bh gie 302 INS FEBRE RE Males nuce tae e e edes 303 INSTr ment SEL el 11e Ee eterna Cete ee Een Puoi en aL Ee EEERR TARDE 304 SYSTem PRESetCHANnel EXEQCute 22er ine entre treu unu Rn nein nannte enr enar nnne G 304 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e starts a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g Spectrum gt Spectrum 2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA MSRT Master channel is selected Example INST SEL Spectrum INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named Spectrum and creates a new measurement channel named Spectrum 2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt gt lt ChannelName gt
600. ul commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling page 319 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 391 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings lt gt 5 eene 348 lt gt 348 SENSe IDDEMod 349 INPUEGAIN T VALUE 349 IN Put GAIBS ssa eate ea indian XE RE DRE ERREUR 349 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With a reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 170 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset Configuring Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display O
601. ullumMoq 191092 S OHH VIL 0 0j1sung 992 3 S 0 8L E VHl3L S VHl3L yullumoq Ou snonuguoo 0 0 0j1sung 9 2 LS VHlal S 0 8L MSdOG r sid VYLSL NEN 71081 Wvoc HSH 3983 asina 9pIM C 3903 esingepiM 491099 0OSL WvoZ adeys esind 3903 usu wv 5222 7 11V MSH 3903 3903 ZH Sze 26 3903 _ esind 1051 HSH 3903 i 3903 esind 7 edeus 50 0081 Woz 3903 usu wv 5722 Y 14 HSH 29003 Zp 922 WVOZE P LL 022 3903 u6ue sang 191114 Budde 1895 10 u2ue9S 104 YOIeaS JoquiAs uone npo N puepuejs JopjoJ4 Predefined Standards and Settings si ous e Jo OU SJOYIP eSeuw si 104 425 991 x SUON IEIMEN 8 7982 Z 01jsung 0 82 90 ASNS ZHN 5 4 19082 SUON IEIMEN 97619 Z 01jsung 2291 90 SND ZHW YSZ enig SUN
602. ult summary with current EVM peak value marked If you want to compare the trace values to the results of the Result Summary make sure to match the displayed points per symbol of the trace and of the Result Summary Refer to Display Points Sym on page 230 for details Mean value In the Mean column the linear mean of the values that are in the Current column is displayed Note that if the values are a logarithmic representation e g the I Q Off set the linear values are averaged Peak value In the Peak column the maximum value that occurred during several evaluations is displayed Note that when the value can be positive and negative e g the phase error the maximum absolute value maintaining its sign is displayed The peak value of Rho is handled differently since its minimum value represents the worst case In that case the minimum value is displayed Standard Deviation The value for the standard deviation is calculated on the linear values and then conver ted to the displayed unit 95 percentile The 95 percentile value is based on the distribution of the current values Since the phase error and the magnitude error can usually be assumed to be distributed around zero the 95 Percentile for these values is calculated based on their absolute values User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 50 Result Types in Again the Rho value is handled differently Here the 5 Percentile is displayed since the lowest R
603. ult unit SYM Example See chapter 11 13 2 Measurement Example 2 GSM EDGE Burst Measurement Based on a Digital Standard on page 465 Manual operation See Result Length on page 201 Configuring VSA 11 5 8 Demodulation Settings During demodulation of the vector signal some undesired effects that may occur during transmission can be compensated for Furthermore you can influence the synchroni zation process Manual configuration of the demodulation process is described in chapter 5 9 Demod ulation Settings on page 202 377 2 378 AUTO 2 haa natae part 378 SENSeTDDEMod EPRalte VALUE icti cett arta ee mti e 379 ISENSe DDEMedEQUalizetbENGID iios ect ra caesi ener rte 379 ISENSe DDEMod EQUAGlIzeit LORD rior cer ri rer tr reper RR 380 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer MODE http tte qom ert er d 380 SENSe DDEMed EGUalizetESPl occi eri tret etit eus eter eec 381 SENSeJDDEM6d EOUaGIIZeE SAVE ri rere tree Ree eu RE EE Retard oen 381 SENSe DDEMod EQUalizer STATe eee eene 381 SENS amp e J DDEMaoGd F
604. unction of symbols over time FREQ _ERR FREQyras 0 with tzn Tp and duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 230 Note that this measurement does not consider a possible carrier frequency offset This has already been compensated for in the measurement signal This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but O can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the I Q plane in this case you might notice uncriti cal spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero has in fact limited significance but still influences the result of the current fre quency measurement R amp S9FSW K70 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 14 1Freq Error Abs 1 Clrw 349 sym Fig 3 10 Result display Frequency Error Absolute Available for source types e Modulation Errors Remote commands LAY ADD 1 BEL MERR to define the required source type see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 419 CALC FORM FREO to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 426 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 434 and chapter 11 9 2 2 Cartesian Diagrams on page 436 Frequency Error Relative Displays the e
605. up 107 Evaluation Ra Ere paeem n etx 190 SPECS TAME RETO 191 MACES EL 218 Evaluation methods Data SOULGB 15 PROMOS mr PECES 419 Evaluation range Configuration remote Definition Entire result rage cere oer emen Start stop values Export ccs dera voro hie EA ER ex ne P La factual Exporting data data remote SONKEY CE Trace UR Bici c eC EC EORR External Mixer B21 i 152 Activating remote control 321 Band eie 152 324 Basic S6elliligS reet cree ener ee e 154 Configuration 151 Conversion loss 154 Conversion loss tables t tee 157 Frequency range reet rnt 152 Handover frequency 152 Harmonic Order 163 Harmonic Type we VOB Nate 159 Programming example 2922 MC 153 Restoring bands rr eter tena 153 RF overrange 152 327 RE Stan RF SIOD e cvi C erue 152 Serial MUMbDEM icai eco re 159 153 160 327 External trigger Level
606. uracy EVM PCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak RESUIt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy EVM RCURrent RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent RESUIt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy FERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor RMEan RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MAC Curacy MERRor RPEak RESult User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 448 R amp S9FSW K70 Remote Commands for VSA CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK RESult CALCulate n LIMit MAC
607. uration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation e Using the common status registers The following tasks specific to are described here Introdielofy cocer 295 Common IP ic EE 300 e Activating Vector Signal Amalysls ccrte n 300 Pension mE 304 COMMOUMMG VSA 306 e Performing nnne nnns 391 LEE UC LIONE 396 e Configuring the Result Display t ete E ERE aise E eter ite 417 e Retrieving 430 Importing and Exporting Data and 450 e Status REPOMING System asas tassi seid o ceti eed de e 451 Commands for Compatibility tr ieee e RR X ERE RA 462 e Programming Examples ccc ctt rtr ce t ceret Lc eta here cedido 463 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or 5 and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more para
608. ure ment signal is matched to the reference signal by minimizing the mean square of the error vector magnitude This is done by selecting the optimum parameter vector 2 8 M The minimization takes place at the sample instants specified by the Estimation Points Sym parameter i e t n Tg with Tg the sampling period used for estimation Subsequently the measurement signal is corrected with the determined parameter vector Note that with a subset of the parameters you can enable or disable correction see chapter 5 9 1 Demodulation Compensation on page 203 Estimation ranges The estimation ranges are determined internally according to the signal description e For continuous signals the estimation range corresponds to the entire result range since it can then be assumed that the signal consists of valid modulated symbols at all time instants e For bursted signals the estimation range corresponds to the overlapping area of the detected burst and the Result Range Furthermore the Run In Run Out ranges see Burst Settings on page 145 are explicitly excluded from the estima tion range In the special case that the signal is indicated as a burst signal but is so highly dis torted that the burst search cannot detect a burst the estimation range corresponds to the pattern and if an offset of the pattern is indicated the useful part of the burst from its start to the pattern start Signal Model
609. urement and Tx Filters eese 479 ASCII File Export Format for VSA 2 2 481 Known Data File Syntax Description esses 483 geile 485 Data File 6 tnn nnn n 499 List of Remote Commands 5 4 2 02 1 506 7 517 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S FSW Vector Signal Analysis User Manual provides all the information spe cific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included e Welcome to the VSA Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application e Typical applications Example measurement scenarios in which the application is frequently used e Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types e Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement e Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and a
610. ut data to the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B17 For details on I Q input see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW Analyzer User Manual RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 149 See Digital Input State page 161 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 163 Configuring VSA 11 5 2 2 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA MSRT mode external mixers are not supported For details on working with external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual LEE copo m 321 trt test rb ede 323 e Conversion Loss Table Settings eae eee tbe ree is 328 e Programming Example Working with an External 332 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer SENSE
611. valuated RST STATistics Configuring Bursts and Patterns The burst and pattern search settings can be configured and new patterns can be defined Manual configuration of bursts and patterns is described in chapter 5 7 Burst and Pat tern Configuration on page 191 367 e Pattern Searches tcc ee eere itu Ee eer ES ee e reu 369 Configuring P attefmis n erre 371 Burst Search The burst search commands define when a burst is detected in the analyzed signal SENSe J DDEMod SEARCYBURSEAUTO anii terra itr HR ex Xe 368 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO cese enn 368 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt GLENgth MINimum eese 368 Configuring SENSe DDEMod SEARGICBURSENMOPDE crre ran atram nnn n nh hti hk n irn ng 368 SENSe JDDEMod SEARChHIBURSES TA T xata aen ntt ha eer ede nhe xe eed rn 369 SENSe DDBEMod SEARCH BURSET OLBr amp anee eter ee RA vee nivel iene 369 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt AUTO lt AutoBurstSearch gt This command links the burst search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as bursted burst search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt AutoBurstSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Manual operation See Enabling Burst Searches on page 192 SENSe DDEMod SEAR
612. values except for capture buffer display i e if you move the marker in one dia gram it is moved in all coupled diagrams Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 399 Marker Search Settings Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings These settings are available as softkeys in the Marker menu or in the Search tab of the Marker dialog box To display this tab do one of the following e Press the key then select the Marker Config softkey Then select the hori zontal Search tab e Inthe Overview select Analysis and switch to the vertical Marker Config tab Then select the horizontal Search tab Markers Search Peak Search NextPeakMode Real Imag Plot search Mode for Next Peak aaa aaa neds 223 Real Imag 224 Search Limits Left 224 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on
613. veral Sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of phase errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERRor type This command queries the results of the Quadratur error measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters type none quadrature error for current sweep AVG Average quadrature error over several sweeps RPE Peak quadrature error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of quadrature error PCTL 95 percentile value of quadrature error Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO type This command queries the results of the Rho factor measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters type Usage lt none gt Rho factor for current sweep AVG Average rho factor over several sweeps RPE Peak rho factor over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of rho factor PCTL 95 percentile value of rho factor Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SNR lt type gt This command queries the results of the SNR error measurement performed for digital demodulation Query parameters lt type gt Usage lt none gt RMS SNR value of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS SN
614. w Pulse 4 4 D 4 4 D b 0 Magnitude dB 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 18 18 2 Frequency in f symbol Formulae EDGE HSR Wide Pulse 20 4 Ag eee gp 100 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in f EDGE NSR 1 43 1 4 2 20 0 8 8p 1 80 100 06 08 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 0 4 0 2 Frequency in Low Pass Marrow 20 4 4 1 4 2 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 3 Bn 100 06 08 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 8 f ymbol 0 4 0 2 Frequency in Formulae Low Pass Wide 20 1 4 2 4 4 4 Mi anti gp 1 4 BO L 100 14 16 18 1 2 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in f ymbol Rectangular 20 1 4
615. width on page 182 Triggering Measurements The trigger commands define the beginning of a measurement MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal Thus no trigger settings are available in the VSA application in MSRA MSRT operating mode However a capture offset can be defined with a similar effect as a trigger offset It defines an offset from the start of the captured data from the MSRA MSRT Master to the start of the application data for vector signal analysis See Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Tasks for manual configuration are described in chapter 5 6 2 Trigger Settings on page 183 TRIGger SEQuence BBPowerTMOLEDoff iere ettari eee 361 361 FAOLDON TIME 2s ttr co hoa eun uo ret tti 361 TRIGger SEQuence IFPowerHODL BDofr 22 teet ett eene 362 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYS Teresis e nna eterne trennen nn anna nn 362 Configuring
616. xample DDEM FORM QPSK Switches QPSK demodulation on DDEM QPSK FORM 4 Switches rr 4 DQPSK demodulation order Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 464 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 142 SENSe DDEMod SRATe lt SymbolRate gt This command defines the symbol rate The minimum symbol rate is 25 Hz The maximum symbol rate depends on the defined Sample Rate see chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate Bandwidth on page 64 Configuring VSA Setting parameters lt SymbolRate gt numeric value Range 25 to 250 6 RST 3 84e6 Default unit Hz Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 464 Example See chapter 11 13 3 Measurement Example 3 User Defined Pattern Search and Limit Check on page 469 Manual operation See Symbol Rate on page 143 SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa lt Alpha gt This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters lt Alpha gt numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Example See chapter 11 13 1 Measurement Example 1 User defined Measurement of Continuous QPSK Signal on page 464 Manual oper
617. xer settings 1 7 a Radio Off Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start Digital 19 RF Stop Handover Freq RF Overrange Preset Band Harmonic Type Range Harmonic Order Conversion Loss B Mixer Settings RF EUER 152 Preset Bald ER ER RR SR 153 Input Output and Frontend Settings UE 153 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration cet e tre e er rte t even 153 XR FL a e ka RE ua 153 2 2 MART 153 Ordai 153 L Conversion 154 External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 152 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe page 321 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 2 on page 153 For details on available frequency ranges see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt 2 on 324 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 324 Handover Freq Defines the fre
618. ximum bandwidth is allowed see chapter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 65 This parameter corresponds to the Auto setting in manual operation with TRACe 10 WBANd MBWIDTH 320 MHZ OFF The bandwidth extension options R amp S FSW B500 B320 B160 are deactivated the maximum analysis bandwidth is restricted to 80 MHz This parameter corresponds to the 80 MHZ setting in manual operation RST ON Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 182 TRACe IQ WBANd MBWIDTH Limit Restricts the maximum analysis bandwidth 11 5 4 Configuring VSA Parameters Limit 80 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 80 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B160 B320 B500 is deactivated TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to OFF 160 MHz Restricts the analysis bandwidth to a maximum of 160 MHz The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B320 is deactivated Not available or required if bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B500 is installed TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to ON 500 MHz 320 MHz MAX All installed bandwidth extension options are activated The cur rently available maximum bandwidth is allowed see chap ter 4 2 1 Sample Rate and Maximum Usable Bandwidth for RF Input on page 65 TRACe IQ WBANd STATe is set to ON RST maximum available Default unit Hz Manual operation See Maximum Band
619. y drift for FSK modulated sig nals Query parameters type none Carrier frequency drift for current sweep AVG Average FSK carrier frequency drift over several sweeps RPE Peak FSK carrier frequency drift over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of FSK carrier frequency drift PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK carrier frequency drift Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERRor type This command queries the results of the frequency error of FSK modulated signals Query parameters type Usage Retrieving Results lt none gt RMS frequency error of display points of current sweep AVG Average of RMS frequency errors over several sweeps PAVG Average of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS frequency error over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PPCT 95 percentile of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum frequency errors over several sweeps RPE Maximum value of RMS EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency errors over several sweeps TPE Maximum EVM over all display points over several sweeps Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the measurement deviation of FSK modulated signals
620. y to display the Overview for VSA Select the Signal Description button and configure the expected signal character istics a In the Modulation Settings section ensure that the Type is PSK and that the Order is QPSK The Mapping defines the mapping of the bits to the QPSK symbols It is relevant if you are interested in a bit stream measurement but does not affect the other measurement results Hence you do not need to change it here b Enter the Symbol Rate 1 MHz R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples c Inthe Transmit Filter section select RRC as Type and enter the Alpha BT value 0 35 In the preview area of the dialog you should then see a non distorted QPSK constellation diagram as shown in figure 9 3 i Modulation amp Signal Description Modulation Modulation Settings Type PSK Order QPSK Mapping WCDMA Symbol Rate 1 0 MHz Transmit Filter Alpha BT 0 35 Trace Constellation 1 Q Meas amp Ref b 1M Stop 4 68 Fig 9 3 QPSK signal with RRC transmit filter 7 Close all open dialog boxes By default four measurement windows showing differ ent measurement results are displayed User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 262 R amp S FSW K70 Measurement Examples Spectrum VSA Ref Level 4 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 1 0 MHz m el Att 20 4 08 Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 800 A Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Result Summary Phase Err RM Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature E
621. yed when you press the MKR gt key Peak inier encode c t P Pr 224 Search 222 025 0 0 2 aqua rte ETAT iu aas dn 224 Max Peau cett eap 224 SEACH MINIMUM oe e De da na 225 Search Next re as Te Ve ccv revoca dv ee 225 Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 405 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK on 403 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 404 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 403 Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum APEak on page 404 Modulation Accuracy Limit Lines Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 405 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 404
622. yed than symbols 32 Capture Oversampling the number of samples per symbol defined in the signal capture set tings are displayed see Sample Rate on 182 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue on page 430 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on 429 Oversampling Defines the sample basis for statistical evaluation This setting is only available for the result type transformation Statistics Zoom Functions Ref Level 10 00 Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input RF B Stat FreqAbs Meas 69 1M 92M a A EET E EE EE Start 101 562 kHz Stop 101 562 kHz Start 101 562 kHz Stop 101 562 kHz ul 1M WR BI dca La nna PO 1 Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym Fig 6 1 Statistics measurement window C measured signal symbols highlighted window A sta tistics for all trace points window B statistics for symbol instants only Symbols only Statistics are calculated for symbol instants only See window B in figure 6 1 Infinite Statistics are calculated for all trace points symbol instants and inter mediate times See window A in figure 6 1 Auto Oversampling is automatically set to Symbols only Statistics are calculated for symbol instants only Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE on page 428 6 6 Zoom Functions The zoom fu
623. ym bol decisions Within this stage a coarse synchronization of the carrier frequency off Set the carrier phase the scaling and the timing takes place Furthermore an auto matically selected internal receive filter Rx filter is used in order to remove the inter symbol interference as effectively as possible The outputs of this stage are the coarsely synchronized measurement signal and the symbol decisions bits The symbol decisions are later used for the Pattern Symbol Check stage and for the Ref erence Signal Generation stage User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 95 4 4 1 Overview of the Demodulation Process Pattern Symbol Check The I Q Pattern Search stage can only detect whether the similarity between the pattern and the capture buffer exceeds a certain threshold and in this way find the most likely positions where a pattern can be found Within this stage the VSA application checks whether the pattern symbols bits really coincide with the symbol decisions at the pre detected position For example if one out of 20 symbols does not coincide the I Q Pattern Search stage might detect this I Q pattern but the Pattern Symbol Check stage will decline it Note that this stage is only active if the pattern search is switched on If individual symbols do not match the pattern these symbols are indicated by a red frame in the symbol table Reference Signal Generation The ideal reference signal is generated bas
624. ymbol are always identical to the sample rate For the Result Summary the number of display points corresponds to the estimation points per symbol By default 1 for QAM and PSK modulated signals and the sample rate for MSK and FSK modulated signals This value also controls which samples are considered for the peak and RMS values and the power result For all other result displays the default number of displayed points per symbol is iden tical to the sample rate R amp S9FSW K70 200Measurement Basics 4 8 Capture Buffer Display In previous firmware versions the capture length in the R amp S FSW VSA application was restricted to 256 000 samples As of firmware version 2 00 up to 200 million symbols can be captured and processed at a time Processing large numbers of samples If more than 256 000 samples are captured overlapping result ranges with a size of 256 000 samples each are created ber of samples per symbol for example for the default sample rate of 4 symbol rate the maximum number of symbols to be captured is 50 000 000 see also chapter 4 2 Sample Rate Symbol Rate and Bandwidth on page 64 D The maximum number of symbols that can be captured depends on the specified num Only one result range at a time can be displayed in the result displays based on the capture buffer except for the Magnitude Overview Absolute You can scroll through the samples in different ranges When you scroll in the diagra
625. you select the Burst Pattern button in the Overview or the Burst Pattern Search softkey in the main VSA menu Burst Search Pattern Search Auto according to Signal Structure MU o Advanced Meas only if Burst found Auto Configuration Search Tolerance 14 769 ps Minimum Gap Length 3 692 us Information Expected Burst Length 148 4 sym Burst Found Preview Preview Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym huc LIE LI ME 192 193 merde 193 EE 0E pe RR EEEM 193 L 193 Enabling Burst Searches Enables or disables burst searches If Auto is selected burst search is enabled only if the signal structure defines a bursted signal in the Signal Structure tab of the Modu lation amp Signal Description dialog box see on page 145 Remote command 2 368 User Manual 1173 9292 02 10 192 5 7 2 Burst and Pattern Configuration Measuring only if burst was found If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid burst has been found When measuring bursted signals that are averaged over several measurements it is recommended that you enable this option so that erroneous meas urements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE on page 368 Burst Configuration The conditions under whi

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Silva Schneider Trail Speed Elite  Télécharger le document - Bibliothèque départementale de la Sarthe  Philips PAL feed-through connectors SWV3031W  the Warmup Tempo Thermostat user manual.    Operating Instructions - HF  Manual do Proprietário  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file